JP5097956B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a control board that performs control related to a game, and a board storage box that stores the control board.

Conventionally, in general, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine has been provided with various control boards for performing control related to the game, and the control board is stored in a board storage box and can be attached to the back side of the gaming machine. It is attached. As such a board storage box, in order to prevent an illegal act on the control board to be stored (for example, illegally replacing electronic components such as a ROM mounted on the main control board for controlling the main operation of the game). The base body and the cover body constituting the substrate storage box are sealed with a sealing tool (for example, an anchor rivet, a one-way screw, etc.) that cannot be released unless a part is broken. (See, for example, Patent Document 1). As a specific sealing structure, the base body forming the side wall of the substrate storage box and the side walls of the cover body are polymerized as inner and outer walls, and the base body opened upward is closed with the cover body, and the base body and the cover By sealing each sealing portion provided on the side wall portion of the body with a sealing tool, the substrate storage box is sealed to prevent fraud with respect to the control substrate in the substrate storage box.
Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-290870 (FIG. 2)

  By the way, in the configuration in which a part of the side wall of the substrate storage box (base body and cover body) is sealed with a sealing tool as in Patent Document 1, the substrate storage box is opened by destroying the sealing portion. When fraud is made on the control board, the destruction mark of the sealing portion remains as a trace, so that fraudulent acts can be easily detected, but each case (base body and cover body) overlaps with each other. In the case where a gap is formed in the side wall portion and a tool is inserted through the gap to perform fraud on the control board, it is difficult to find fraud and it is difficult to find fraud. That is, in recent years, the base body and the cover body that constitute the substrate storage box are often formed of a resin that is transparent and has high toughness (for example, polycarbonate resin). For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 149, in the substrate storage box A storing the control substrate B, the side wall portion C1 of the base body C and the cover body D about the central portion on the long side of the substrate storage box A. The tip of the driver E is inserted from the joint with the side wall portion D1, and the peripheral portion thereof is bent and the side wall portion D1 of the cover body D is partially removed from the side wall portion C1 of the base body C (side wall portion D1). And the side wall C1 is released), the driver E is further invaded to widen the gap L, and another tool is invaded from the gap L, so that the control board B in the board storage box A is illegally Increasing number of cases. At this time, since the base body C and the cover body D are each formed of a resin having high toughness, even if the base body C and the cover body D are greatly bent, the base body C and the cover body D return to their original shapes after fraud without leaving any traces such as cracks and deformations. It is difficult to detect fraud by changing the appearance of box A. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a substrate storage box composed of a base body and a cover body, in each housing (base body and cover body). An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an act of cheating on a control board in a board storage box by forming a gap in a side wall portion.

  In order to achieve the above object, the means adopted in claim 1 is a gaming machine comprising a control board for performing control related to a game, and a board storage box for storing the control board. A casing-shaped base body having a side wall portion standing to form a storage opening of the control board, and an outer wall portion in which the side wall portion of the base body is fitted to cover the storage opening portion. A body-shaped cover body, and a sealing tool that seals the cover body and the base body, and the base body is erected along the side wall portion on the outer peripheral side of the side wall portion. In addition, the outer wall portion is concavo-convexly fitted between the side wall portion in the assembled state with the cover body, and a plurality of outer wall pieces that are individually broken along with foreign matter inserted through a gap with the outer wall portion. The parts are arranged in parallel through the slit part.

  Further, the means adopted by claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the cover body is erected along the outer wall portion on the inner peripheral side of the outer wall portion, and is connected to the base body. An inner wall portion is provided for fitting the side wall portion with the outer wall portion in an assembled state.

  Further, according to claim 3, in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, a screw stop boss is provided on a part of the side wall of the base body instead of the outer wall piece. A base side affixing outer surface part is formed so as to cover the outside of the screw fixing boss, and the base side affixing is performed on the upper surface and the outer wall part covering the storage opening in the cover body in an assembled state with the base body. A cover side affixing outer surface part is formed at a position corresponding to the outer surface part, and the cover side affixing outer surface part is an outer peripheral surface in an assembled state of the cover body and the base body, and an upper wall part recessed in a step shape from the upper surface. Is formed of a side wall portion that is flush with the base side sticking outer surface portion, and the cover side sticking outer surface portion and the base side sticking outer surface are secured to the upper wall portion by screwing with the screw fastening boss. The mounting holes for fixing is bored, wherein the screwing portion of the seal seals across upwardly and the cover-side sticking outer surface so as to cover said base-side sticking outer surface is stuck.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the lower end surface of the side wall portion of the cover-side pasting outer surface portion is the base side in the assembled state of the cover body and the base body. The upper end surface of the sticking outer surface portion is brought into contact with a side wall position of the substrate storage box, and the contact portion becomes a joint between the cover side sticking outer surface portion and the base side sticking outer surface portion.

  Further, the means adopted by claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 3 or claim 4, wherein the sealing sticker includes an IC chip storing identification information and the identification information of the IC chip to the reading means. And an elongate antenna portion that enables transmission, and the IC tag seal seal is configured such that the antenna portion has the upper wall portion of the cover-side pasting outer surface portion and the cover side. It sticks so that it may straddle the said side wall part of the sticking outer surface part and the said base side sticking outer surface part.

In the invention which concerns on Claim 1, the outer wall part of a cover body is unevenly fitted between the some outer wall piece part and side wall part of a base body. That is, the substrate storage box in the assembled state is configured to have a concave-convex fitting structure including a plurality of outer wall pieces, an outer wall, and a side wall from the outside in the side wall portion. For this reason, even if an elongated object is inserted through the gap between the side walls of each housing (base body and cover body), the three-layer wall structure (a plurality of outer wall pieces, outer wall parts, In addition, the unauthorized insertion is prevented by the side wall portion, so that it is possible to prevent unauthorized use of the unauthorized tool from the side wall portion to the control board in the board storage box.
In addition, if an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver is screwed into the side wall of the board storage box to forcibly create a gap from the side wall and an attempt is made to cheat on the control board in the board storage box, it becomes the outermost wall surface of the board storage box A fraudulent tool is screwed between the outer wall piece and the outer wall to create a gap. However, since the outer wall piece part which becomes the outermost wall surface is a plurality of side wall pieces arranged in parallel via the slit part, the base part is broken along with the screwing operation of the unauthorized tool. For this reason, when an unauthorized tool is screwed into the control board in the board storage box, any one of the outer wall pieces, which is the outermost wall surface of the board storage box, is always broken. As a result, the broken part of the outer wall piece will remain as a trace of the fraud, and the fraudulent act of screwing a fraudulent tool into the side wall portion of the substrate storage box sealed by the sealing tool is easy. Can be found.

  In the invention according to claim 2, the outer wall portion of the cover body is concavo-convexly fitted between the plurality of outer wall piece portions and the side wall portion of the base body, and further, between the outer wall portion and the inner wall portion of the cover body. The side wall portion of the base body is concavo-convexly fitted. In other words, the substrate storage box in the assembled state is configured in a double uneven fitting structure from the four wall surfaces of the outer wall piece portion, the outer wall portion, the side wall portion, and the inner wall portion from the outside in the side wall portion. . For this reason, even if an elongated object is inserted through the gap between the side wall portions of each housing (base body and cover body), the four-layer wall structure (a plurality of outer wall pieces, Since the unauthorized insertion is prevented by the outer wall portion, the side wall portion, and the inner wall portion), even if the fraudulent tool is used to improperly operate the control board in the board storage box, this can be prevented more reliably. Can do.

  Moreover, in the invention which concerns on Claim 3, by sticking a sealing seal across the cover side sticking outer surface part provided in the cover body, and the base side sticking outer surface part provided in the base body, a board | substrate storage box ( The sealing state of the cover body and the base body) with the sealing tool can be secured with a seal seal. Of course, the cover-side pasting outer surface portion is fixed to the base-side pasting outer surface portion by attaching a mounting hole drilled in the upper wall portion thereof to a screw-fastening boss provided on the base body side. For this reason, in the assembled state of the cover body and the base body, it is possible to partially fix each cover outer surface portion on the cover side and the base side where the outer peripheral surfaces are flush with each other. A seal seal can be pasted over each pasting outer surface part. Further, since the seal seal is pasted so as to cover the upper part of the screw-fastening portion in the upper wall portion of the cover-side pasting outer surface portion, it is also possible to prevent unauthorized release of the screw-fastening.

  Moreover, in the invention which concerns on Claim 4, in the assembly state of a cover body and a base body, each sticking outer surface part on the cover side and base side in which an outer peripheral surface becomes the same is the lower end surface of the side wall part of a cover side sticking outer surface part And the upper end surface of the base-side pasting outer surface portion are brought into contact with each other at the side wall position of the substrate storage box, and the contact portion becomes a joint between the cover-side pasting outer surface portion and the base-side pasting outer surface portion. It can be attached to the substrate storage box in a difficult state. That is, when the joint between the cover-side sticking outer surface part and the base-side sticking outer surface part is provided at either the upper or lower end (corner part) of the side wall of the substrate storage box, when a tensile force acts on the seal seal The force acts in a concentrated manner on the joint located at the corner, and the sealing seal is easily broken at the joint at the corner. On the other hand, when the joint between the cover-side sticking outer surface portion and the base-side sticking outer surface portion is used as the side wall portion of the substrate storage box, when a tensile force acts on the seal, the force is applied to the side wall portion. Since it can disperse | distribute planarly in the joint located in this, a sealing seal | sticker can be made hard to fracture | rupture.

  In addition, in the invention according to claim 5, the sealing part for sealing the substrate storage box is constituted by the IC tag sealing seal, so that the antenna part constituting the IC tag sealing seal in addition to the visual confirmation of breakage of the sealing seal It is also possible to confirm the breakage of the seal seal depending on whether or not the IC chip identification information transmitted from the reader can be read by the reading means (if the antenna portion breaks, the IC chip identification information is not transmitted from the antenna portion), The presence or absence of fraud with respect to the seal seal can be confirmed more reliably. However, the antenna part is pasted so as to straddle the upper wall portion of the cover side pasting outer surface portion, the side wall portion of the cover side pasting outer surface portion, and the base side pasting outer surface portion. In other words, the antenna part for transmitting the identification information of the IC chip can be arranged over a wide range across the upper wall part and the side wall part of the substrate storage box. For this reason, even if it is a combination of an IC tag seal seal and a reading means that can only communicate at a very short distance, the reading means can be brought close to or in contact with the IC tag seal seal without taking an excessive inspection posture. The inspection of the IC tag seal seal can be easily performed.

[Overall structure of pachinko machines]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an entire pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment, and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, FIG. 4 is a side view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 5 is a side view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 7 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view, and FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  1 to 8, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A main body frame 3, a game window 101 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven, and a lower part of the game window 101. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing balls to be paid out as a result of the game.

  A lower front plate 14 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device 650 and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 are provided at the lower part of the back surface thereof. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards and power boards for controlling electrical components are collectively provided is attached, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 7) of the main body frame 3 is detachable. Is provided. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 250 and a handle device 460 so as to close the gaming window 101. The feature of the present embodiment is that there is one dish unit 300 provided on the door frame 5, and the handle device 460 conventionally provided on the main body frame 3 is provided on the door frame 5, and the door Since the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described in detail.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 9 to 13. 9 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 13 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 11A, a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 13A, and a sectional view taken along line DD. , E-E sectional view (D).

  9 and 10, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment is a connection for connecting the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 at their respective ends. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with the member 19. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  In that state, the insertion hole 21 and the left and right sides of the connecting member 19 are lowered by one step on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are also fixed by a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( Two (in the illustrated case) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 that are lowered by one step are aligned to form a plurality (from the lateral outer side). The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 10 are fixed by fastening with three connecting screws 26 and 27 in the case of illustration. A lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19 but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. It is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the nail, but such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that the nail is easily made. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 23) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main body frame 3 can be widened. This is because the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed larger.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .) Is formed by drawing so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased by forming a space portion 28 (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 12) opened rearward by a rib. Yes. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (on the side where one portion of the left and right portions lowered by one step of the connecting member 19 is fitted. 9 is formed in the groove 29 of the frame plate 13. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 13B to 13D, a flat plate shape with which the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is brought into contact. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 13B, the recessed portion 30 (side) into which the hanging piece 53 of the upper support metal fitting 45 is inserted. A recess 30 of the frame plate 13 is formed in FIG.

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above has a hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fixing with a fixing screw 32 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 31, and a fixing screw 34 is formed at the lower portion thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. Further, a mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the lower front plate 14 with a fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

  On the other hand, in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame portion 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 in the upper portion thereof, and closing the lower portion thereof. A mounting hole 40 for mounting the projection 41 with the mounting screw 42 is formed, and a mounting hole 43 for fixing the side frame plate 13 and the lower front plate 14 with a fixing screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Is formed.

  The closing protrusions 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 67) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ), And as will be described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and turning it to one side, The main frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by being uncoupled.

  The lower front plate 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface thereof when closed. The front and side surfaces of the decorative cover plate 15 are covered with a decorative cover plate 15, and a fixing protrusion 16 (see FIG. 12) is formed on the rear surface of the decorative cover plate 15. The attachment protrusion 16 is attached to the lower front plate 14 by being passed through a fastening hole 17 that passes through the lower front plate 14. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer cover 2 on the decorative cover plate 15.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the main frame 3 is attached along one upper surface of the upper support plate 45 and the lower front plate 14 that also serve to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support hole 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 25) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed to protrude forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68. The support hole formed in FIG. 26 is inserted. Accordingly, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, By pivoting the pivot pin 504 of the upper pivot bracket 503 in the support hole 47, it can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the holding plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  Further, there is a hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53, and this mounting hole and the mounting hole are provided. 31 is fixed with fixing screws 32 to fix the upper support bracket 45 and the side frame plate 12 and to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 via the upper support bracket 45. Yes.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 drilled in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are constituent members, with the connecting member 19. Since the connection member 19 is fastened in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the mounting strength is high and the rectangular shape is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state of the connecting member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, when the connecting member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13, Since one part of the structure is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 is strengthened, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Even when the lower support fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

(Door frame)
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. 14 is a front view of the door frame 5, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the door frame 5, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 14, and FIG. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame 5, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame 5.

  As shown in FIGS. 14, 15, 18, and 19, the door frame 5 has a vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 formed on the upper part of a door frame main body 100 that is formed in a square shape. A door lens unit 120 is attached around the front surface, a plate unit 300 is provided on the door frame main body 100 on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, and a handle is provided on one side (open side) of the plate unit 300. An operation handle portion 461 of the device 460 is fixed in a projecting manner. Further, a reinforcing sheet metal 210 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 250 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101, and a plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. The joint unit 480, the mounting base 280, and the frame decoration relay board 290 corresponding to the operation handle portion 461 are attached to the back surface of the frame. A security cover 270 having a security function is also attached to the bottom of the back surface of the glass unit 250. Hereinafter, a more detailed structure of each of the above constituent members constituting the door plate 5 will be described.

<Door frame body>
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the door frame main body 100 is formed in a frame shape with a synthetic resin, and as described above, the vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 is formed on the upper portion, and the lower side of the gaming window 101 is It is a plate-like part. A circular speaker opening 102 that penetrates a speaker 163, which will be described later, is formed on the upper left and right of the gaming window 101, and a stopper 254 of a glass unit 250, which will be described later, is locked below the speaker opening 102. A stop lever 108 (see FIG. 15) is rotatably provided. Note that the gaming window 101 according to the present embodiment is attached with the gaming board 4 having larger vertical and horizontal dimensions than conventional gaming windows 101, so the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the gaming window 101 are also increased. Yes. For this reason, the shape of the door frame lens unit 120, which will be described later, is greatly different from that generally known in the art.

  On the other hand, in the plate-like portion below the game window 101, a prize ball passage port 103 through which the prize ball communication rod 451 of the dish unit 300 passes is opened at the upper part on the pivot support side. A lid opening 105 for detaching 406 is opened, and a ball feeding opening 104 for mounting the ball feeding unit 287 is opened at a position adjacent to the opening side of the lid opening 105. Further, a lock hole 106 for allowing the cylinder lock 1010 to pass therethrough is opened closer to the open side.

  Also, a joint unit mounting recess 107 for attaching the joint unit 480 is formed on the back side of the plate-like portion below the ball feed opening 104. An attachment receiving piece (not shown) for engaging the engaging protrusion 255 of the unit 250 is formed, and an attachment elastic piece 273 (to be described later) of the security cover 270 is attached to the side of the engagement receiving piece. An opening 110 is formed. In addition, an engagement protrusion 111 is formed in the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion so as to be inserted into a guide hole 456 (see FIG. 16) of the dish unit 300 described later. Further, the lower side of the door frame main body 100 is a door frame protruding piece 112 protruding rearward, and as will be described later, the door frame protruding piece 112 and engagement grooves 584 and 585 formed in the main body frame 3 Constitutes the outer ridge and the engaging portion at the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

<Door lens unit>
Next, the structure of the door lens unit 120 attached to the upper part on the front side of the door frame main body 100 will be described. The door lens unit 120 includes a reflector having a front surface as a reflection surface, a cold cathode tube and an LED substrate attached to the front and inside of the reflector, a light-transmissive lens cover 150 covering the front of the reflector, and the lens cover 150. And a lens base body 121 serving as a base of the lens cover 150.

  In the lens cover 150, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 in the lens base body 121 are formed of a transparent resin. And since the opening dimension of the game window 101 formed in the door frame main body 100 is formed larger than before, as described above, the dimension between the outer periphery of the door frame main body 100 and the inner periphery of the game window 101. In other words, since the dimensions for attaching the lens cover 150 (particularly the dimensions of the left and right sides) are narrow, the lens cover 150 in this embodiment includes the upper lens cover 151 and the side lens cover. All of the maximum forward projecting portions of the portions 156 and 157 have a wedge-shaped cross section in which the projecting size projecting forward is larger than the base size (the width size of the portion contacting the door frame body 100). ing. More specifically, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are both formed as a white lens portion with a wedge-shaped front bulging portion formed of a synthetic resin, and the lower end portion of the white lens portion. A red lens portion formed of synthetic resin with different coloring is connected to the inside of the gaming window 101 to be bordered.

  By the way, the upper lens cover portion 151 is formed in a wedge shape in a cross section with a hollow inside and opened at the rear, and is formed in a boomerang shape in a plan view. It is formed so that the distance between the cathode tube and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is reduced. An opaque leading molding member 154 colored in silver is fixed to the outer side of the wedge-shaped front end portion of the upper lens cover portion 151, and the front bulging surface having a wedge-shaped cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover portion 151 is formed. Illuminated with an upper cold cathode tube. The side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are similar to the upper lens cover portion 151 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section. The distance between the side cold cathode fluorescent tube formed in a straight line and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is smaller than that of the lens cover 151 and is formed in a boomerang shape having a gentle curve as a whole. Is formed to be close.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the reason why the cold cathode tube is used as the illumination means for decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5 is as follows. When decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5, there is a restriction that the distance between the light source and the lens cover disposed on the front surface of the light source cannot be made too large. This restriction is because the door frame 5 is always opened and closed, and if the protrusion amount is made too large, there is a possibility that the operation at the time of opening may be hindered. Thus, in a situation where the distance between the light source and the lens cover is not so large, the light decoration visible through the lens cover is continuous when the lamp or LED is scattered as the light source as in the past. The light decoration is not visible, but can only be seen as a spotted pattern with strong and weak parts. On the other hand, when a continuous cold cathode tube is used as a light emitting source as in this embodiment, even if the distance between the cold cathode tube and the lens cover 150 is short, the light decoration visible through the lens cover 150 is A beautiful light decoration in a continuous state is visible. For this reason, since the area surrounding the game board 4 is bordered by a continuous beautiful light decoration, a decoration effect not found in conventional pachinko gaming machines can be achieved. If the distance between the light source and the lens cover can be kept to some extent, even if light sources such as LEDs are used, the light diffuses and the entire area of the lens cover is illuminated without much intensity. Can do.

  Further, a decorative member attachment region 184 is formed below the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 of the lens cover 150, and the decorative member 185 is attached to the decorative member attachment region 184. The decorative member 185 has a shape similar to the speaker cover 165 described above, and when the lens cover 150 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the impression that the upper left and right and the lower left and right of the lens cover 150 are balanced. It is attached to give Note that the speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 described above do not simply cover the front of the speaker 163 or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 150 as described above, but the periphery thereof is light-decorated with LEDs. It has a structure.

  As described above in detail, the speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 according to the present embodiment have four corners in the region surrounding the game window 101 of the door frame 5 apart from the light decoration by the cold cathode tube and the LED substrate described above. Since it is configured so as to be intensively decorated with light, the entire circumference except for the lower side of the gaming window 101 is not casually decorated with light, but can be made with a light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a tendency that only a speaker is conventionally arranged, and the light decoration around the speaker is not performed. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery except the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively decorated with light.

<Reinforcing sheet metal>
The door lens unit 120 described above is attached to the front side of the door frame main body 100, and the dish unit 300 is attached below the door lens unit 120. Here, before describing the structure of the dish unit 300, the reinforcing sheet metal 210, the glass unit 250, the security cover 270, the mounting base 280, the frame decoration relay board 290, and the handle device 460 attached to the back side of the door frame main body 100 will be described. A description will be made sequentially. First, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 19 and 15 to 17.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 is attached along the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 211 that is attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame main body 100 and the rear side of the side of the shaft support side of the door frame main body 100. A pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 212, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 213 that is attached along the back of the open side of the door frame body 100, and a lower reinforcing sheet metal that is attached along the back of the lower side of the gaming window 101 of the door frame body 100. 214 are fastened with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 18, an upper shaft support portion 218 having a shaft pin 219 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 and a shaft pin 221 ( And a lower shaft support portion 220 having a structure (see FIG. 15). The upper and lower shaft pins 219 and 221 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the width dimension of the door frame main body 100, and the lower long side edge of the both long side edges is bent rearward. Although it becomes the lower bending protrusion piece 229, and both sides of the upper long side edge are the upper bending protrusion pieces 230 bent backward, The sandwiched portion is a vertical bent protrusion 231 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229 is not so large, and the lower bent protrusion 229 does not engage with the groove or the recess to form the uneven engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusion 230 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229, and somewhat prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 214 is a vertical bent protrusion 231.

  The vertical bent protrusion 231 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 described later, and when the glass unit 250 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protruding piece 231 is adapted to engage with an engaging groove 261 formed along the outer periphery of substantially the center in the width direction of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 (see FIG. 17). ). The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 228 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

<Glass unit (transparent plate unit)>
Next, the glass unit 250 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the glass unit 250 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 251 molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 101, and outer peripheral front and back surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 251. It is constituted by adhering two glass plates 262 (not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate) as a transparent plate (with a hot melt adhesive). In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the unit frame 251, the desiccant enclosure space part which encloses a desiccant inside is formed.

<Security cover>
Next, with respect to the crime prevention cover 270 that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 250 and is provided with a crime prevention function that prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4, mainly FIG. 15, FIG. 17, FIG. Will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the security cover 270 is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 250 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 212 and 213 with a transparent synthetic resin, and the upper side portion thereof is the inner side of the game board 4. It is formed as an arc-shaped contact recess 271 along the lower arc surface of the rail 603, and a post-crime prevention projection piece 274 protrudes rearward along the contact recess 271. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the pivot support side with the security cover 270 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 270, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 272 is projected along the lower shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 with the crime prevention cover 270 attached, and U-shaped at the lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 273 formed in a protruding manner is formed to project forward.

  The security cover 270 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 273 in the mounting opening 110 formed in the door frame main body 100. In the attached state, as shown in FIG. 17, the pre-crime projection piece 272 faces the lower rear side surface of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 272 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 231. In addition, the post-crime projection piece 274 and the post-crime end edge projection piece 275 are in a state of protruding rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the half of the post-crime prevention projection piece 274 on the shaft support side is The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces each other, but the half on the open side of the post-crime projecting piece 274 is rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is superposed along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 30). ).

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 270 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 285 and the security space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure, the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the lower front direction of the security cover 270 is caused by the polymerization of the pre-crime projection pieces 272 and the unit frame 251 even if an unauthorized device is attempted to enter from the lower side of the glass unit 250. The anti-crime piece 274 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component member 601 are superposed to prevent unauthorized equipment from entering from the lower side of the rear face of the security cover 270. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 275. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4 by the superposed structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime projection piece 274.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent protrusions 223 and 225 of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 213, the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the obliquely lower side on the opening side of the door frame 5, Due to the uneven engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 274, it is possible to further prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 274 and the rear end protrusion 275 on the back side of the security cover 270 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball hitting or back feeding the guide path part from colliding with the glass plate 262.

<Mounting base>
As shown in FIGS. 15, 18, and 19, the mounting base 280 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 270. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. This mounting base 280 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 280 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed in order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the launch rail 515 to the game board 4. For this reason, a ball flight guide surface 286 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting base 280. By the way, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 281 that penetrates the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 228 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 at the upper part on the shaft support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is formed in the lower part of the open side to which the ball feed unit 287 is attached. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is a ball flight guide surface 286.

  The ball feed unit 287 attached to the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is provided with a ball feed member that swings in response to the reciprocal movement difference of a ball striking rod 687 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls at the lower end of the guide passage portion of the dish unit 300 are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 by the swinging operation. Further, a lid opening 283 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 406 described later is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 280. Further, an upright wall 284 is formed to stand vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting base 280. As shown in FIG. 15, the upright wall 284 is provided to restrict the lower portion of the security cover 270 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 270 when the security cover 270 is attached. is there.

  Further, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment is characterized in that the security protrusion 285 is obliquely projected from the lower side of the above-described ball flight guide surface 286 to the prize ball passage opening 281 toward the rear. It is. As described above, the security projecting piece 285 is provided between the security space 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

<Frame decoration relay board>
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 18, a frame decoration relay board 290 is attached to the lower shaft support side of the mounting base 280, and a relay board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the frame decoration relay board 290 is attached. ing. This frame decoration relay board 290 is an electrical part or electrical part provided on the door frame 5 (cold cathode tube, LED board, speaker 163, switch provided in the operation handle part 461, ball rental unit 327, operation button unit 329. Etc.) are integrated and connected, and the prize ball payout control board via the door relay board 1102 etc. incorporated in the board unit 1100 to which the wiring from the frame decoration relay board 290 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 It is connected to the main control board 1350 (see FIGS. 78 and 110) of the main control board box 624 attached to 1186 and the game board 4.

<Dish unit>
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14, 18 and 19. The dish unit 300 is roughly divided into a unit frame 301 constituting an appearance, a lower speaker unit 340 attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, and an upper part of the lower speaker unit 340 so as to face the upper surface of the unit frame 301. , A second ball extraction link unit (not shown) for performing the ball extraction operation of the second ball extraction valve provided on the plate body 380, and a plate lid plate for closing the rear surface of the unit frame 301 450.

  The unit frame 301 is provided with a ball rental unit 327. This ball lending unit 327 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like when a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the unit frame 301 is provided with an operation button unit 329 at the front center on the upper surface. The operation button unit 329 includes a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) push buttons 330 a, 330 b, and 330 c, and the plurality of operation buttons 330 is a liquid crystal provided on the game board 4. It is operated when the player participates in the game content performed on the display device 640 or the like.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is provided with a first ball extraction button 316 on the right side of the upper surface of the unit frame 301, and a second part of the second ball extraction link unit is formed at the lower center of the unit frame 301. A two-ball removal button 421 is arranged. In this embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 316 and 421, which are the first ball removal button 316 and the second ball removal button 421, are provided by storing the dish body 380 by operating the first ball removal button 316. Although all the spheres stored in the portion 381 and the guide passage portion can be removed, the operation of removing the spheres takes some time to remove the spheres arranged in a line in the guide passage portion 382. On the other hand, by operating the second ball removal button 421, the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 381 of the dish body 380 can be quickly removed from the second ball extraction opening having a large diameter. Can be shortened. For this reason, it is possible to select the length of time for the player to take the ball.

  In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 57), the payout operation is stopped, or the ballistic operation is stopped and the game is not possible even though the game is being hit. In such a case, the second ball release button 421 By performing the operation, the ball that is being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained, and the game during the big hit can be continued.

<Handle device>
Next, the handle device 460 attached to the lower part of the door frame 5 on the open side will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 19, and 20. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device 460 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided on the main body frame 3. The handle device 460 is assembled to an operation handle portion 461 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 on the open side, and the back surface of the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 461, and rotates according to the turning operation of the operation handle portion 461. And a joint unit 480 that cooperates with the rotating shaft 465 and changes the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 465 into a slide motion.

  Although not shown, the handle device 460 is a micro switch that is turned on when the operation handle portion 461 is rotated, and a single button that turns the micro switch off when the micro switch is turned on. And a touch sensor for detecting contact of the player with the operation handle portion 461 through conductive plating applied to the outer peripheral surface of the operation handle portion 461. Then, when the player rotates the operation handle portion 461, the microswitch is turned ON and the touch sensor detects contact, a later-described launch motor 695 (see FIG. 37) of the hitting ball launcher 650 is rotationally driven. It has become so. In addition, a cam formed in the shape of a ball is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 465, and the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 moves in the left-right direction by rotating this cam. .

  As shown in FIG. 20, the slide movement of the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball hitting device 650, and the tension of the biasing spring 684 (see FIG. 37) of the ball hitting device 650 is increased. By adjusting, the strength of the urging force of the hitting ball rod 687 can be adjusted to obtain the ball hitting force desired by the player. The relationship between the handle device 460 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

[Body frame]
Next, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for discharging a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, a ball path unit 770, and a prize ball unit 800. And the full tank unit 900, the locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the electrical provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 excluding the game board 4. Various components such as a substrate unit 1100 on which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling the components are collectively provided, a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580, and the like are mounted on the main body frame main body 500. The main body frame 3 configured as described above will be described with reference to the drawings.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. FIG. 21 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching the components, FIG. 22 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching the components, and FIG. 23 is a main body frame main body before attaching the components. FIG. 24 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching the components, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 with the components attached. 26 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 27 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 29 is a perspective view as seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which components are attached, and FIG. It is.

  In FIG. 21, an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 (both see FIG. 25) for attaching and closing the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are mounted on one side of the body frame main body 500. In the state where the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502 are formed and the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502, the upper side and the side side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. Is substantially coplanar with the upper and side sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and side sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially coplanar with the lower and side sides of the lower shaft support 509 (FIG. 27). reference). Here, the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 27. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward, and the shaft support pin 504 A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is provided on the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 220 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the door support plate 507 is provided with the lower shaft support portion 220 of the door frame 5. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 221 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof becomes a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 25) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface that is connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is more forward than the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side of the front surface is bent toward the rear with both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 211 attached and fixed to the rear side of the upper side of the door frame 5. The bent projecting pieces 215 and 216 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back at the long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 213 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 223 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 225 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 217 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.

  Further, the above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where fraud is likely to be performed. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 212 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 217 also functions sufficiently, but in many cases the support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is larger than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 is formed for passing through a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 67) provided on a lock device 1000 (described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 and projecting forward. A board positioning projection 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projecting piece 217 of the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 212 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the board positioning projection 576 on the side side of the front pivot side is slightly lower. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the distal ends are inserted project. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side flat portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate part 511 is a game board placement part 512 for placing the game board 4, and the game board 4 is placed on the placement part 512 in the approximate center of the game board placement part 512. A passage support protrusion 513 is provided to support the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 30) formed in the game board 4 when placed. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the end on the open side at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 25) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. The connecting passage 609 (see FIG. 30), which is the downstream end of 603, is adjacent.

  In addition, at the side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515), the upper end of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 25) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 is provided. A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is projected, and a stopper 518 is projected diagonally below. In other words, the game board fixing tool 519 is provided so as to be rotatable about the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and the game board 4 is rotated clockwise in a state where the game board 4 is mounted on the game board mounting portion 512. The board fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that projects in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connecting window 522 that houses a slide member 710 (see FIG. 41) that is associated with the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 described above is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is formed at the position adjacent to the connecting window 522 so that the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 37) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-shaped through hole opening 521 for projecting the hitting ball rod 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 upward, and a plate portion 511 obliquely above the saddle through opening 521. Is provided with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, as shown in FIG. 22, a ball discharge passage 524 that extends from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then goes downward is formed. . This ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 25), which will be described later, from below the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inside of the island. Further, a cylindrical guide projection 525 protrudes rearward above the launching device mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 73) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is inserted into the guide projection 525. This facilitates the mounting of the substrate unit 1100. Further, attachment holes 527 for attaching the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the attachment pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are associated with the attachment holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with a ball extraction connection opening 530 that is an opening at the upstream end of the ball extraction discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. Yes. The downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that a full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting a full unit 900 (see FIG. 25), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with the engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 57) of the full unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, an outlet for blocking a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 511 in front of the full unit mounting part 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided.

  Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. Also, as shown in FIG. 25, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper part of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided rearward from the inner side surface on the shaft support side and the upper side portion and the open side surface portion described above, and is provided rearward from the first side wall 540. A second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 circumferentially provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 circumferentially provided rearward from the third side wall 542, The body frame 3 is formed in a concave shape in which the left and right sides and the rear part of the upper side are surrounded.

  The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 29) that is inclined inwardly from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done.

  At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is made using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 63) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. In order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Further, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the side walls 540 to 543 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively. In this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated.

  In other words, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the back of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts the rear side wall of the gaming device 4 that extends from the first side wall 540 toward the rear substantially in parallel with the first side wall 540 and is provided on the game board 4. It constitutes. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the reservoir 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are provided so as to project inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 21), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is like that. Accordingly, it is sufficient for the projecting width dimension to the inside of the pivot support side rear wall 546 to have a width for attaching the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800.

  Further, the front surface of the upper rear wall 545 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 21), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface thereof. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 if there is a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 21), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even in the case where a gaming device in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the gaming board 4 is attached, The rear projecting portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board mounting recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open side plane portion. The middle and lower three places are opened, and the upper and lower door hook holes 549 are further above, below, and below, the lock locking holes 548 with which the locking protrusions 1004 described later of the locking device 1000 are engaged (see FIG. 22). Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 22) for performing the attachment with a screw is an upper part of the rear end portion of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the middle. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only by the upper and middle screws but also by a screw fixing portion 1003 formed in a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing 547 to 547 with screws.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24, on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 5). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 45) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. Further, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper portion of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is provided at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top.

  When the tank rail member 740 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 and the locking protrusions 749 and 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail hooking elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 is formed below the rail hooking elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground connector 207 is attached to the inside of the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, vertical support walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the support-side rear wall 546 on the support-supporting rear wall 546, and a spherical passage unit is provided between the stand-up walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guide projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream portion between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle flow portion. The prize ball guiding projection 561 is projected rearward on the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that its projecting height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 50) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. Further, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 50). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engagement protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engagement portion 824 (see FIG. 52) as an engagement portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 52) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 52) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A relief hole 566 is formed to receive the end. Also, a payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as the drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 25). The prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the engaging groove 573 formed at the lowermost lower end of the rear surface of the shaft supporting side rear wall 546 and is supported by the engaging protrusion 565 and the locking elastic claw 564. The rear wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body abutting groove 567 into which an end of the cover body 1250 on the open side is formed is formed at the end of the shaft support side rear wall 546 on the open side. A locking wall 569 protrudes downward. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 (see FIG. 28) of the cover body 1250, and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown). By doing so, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. The locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. By passing through the formed through-hole 1254 (see FIG. 28) and, for example, hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protrusion 570, only the person having the key of the padlock can open the cover body 1250. You can make it impossible.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 was demonstrated, when the door frame 5 was closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 21) are formed into which the door frame protrusions 112 and 113 (see FIG. 19) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame main body 100 bent rearward. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the above-described firing device mounting portion 520, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 112 corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 113 corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protrusion 112 with a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protrusions 112 and 113 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engagement portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project, but the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launching device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 are in close contact with each other. It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 280 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has the door frame 5 in a closed state. A security protrusion 285 that enters 586 is formed. The security protrusion 285 is formed on the mounting base 280 so as to extend from substantially the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the launch rail 515 and the outer rail 602 attached to the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention projection piece 285 protruding from the mounting base 280. The security projection piece 285 and the security space 586 constitute an inner ridge and engagement portion in the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, and these will be sequentially described below.

<Schematic configuration of game board>
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35. 30 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 31 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 32 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. FIG. 34 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 35 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG.

  In FIG. 30, the game board 4 includes a substantially square panel holder 600 holding a transparent plate-like game panel 599, and a front component member 601 attached to the front surface of the panel holder 600 so as to surround the game area 605. It is configured. On the surface of the game panel 599, various game devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 605. Then, after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided, the front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 600, and the front component 601 has a circular hollow inside so as to surround the game panel 599. And the outer shape is formed in the shape of the outer shape of the panel holder 600, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided. The outer rail 602 has a connecting passage portion 609 that is connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 515 at a starting end portion thereof, and is formed adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609 with a foul. A mouth 610 is formed. A metal rail is attached in close contact with the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stopper 620.

  The stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when a hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 605, from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a security protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. As described above, the security projection 608 overlaps with the rear end projection 275 of the security cover 270 protruding from the security cover 270 in the state in which the door frame 5 is closed. It prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the support side gap.

  Further, an out port 606 is provided at the center of the lower portion of the inner rail 603, and the hit ball hits the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guided passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to the foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. The tray unit 300 is again discharged. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. In addition, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component member 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 274 protruding from the security cover 270 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the post-crime protrusion piece 274, the piano wire or the like that is inserted from the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is overlapped in the vertical direction. This will ultimately prevent the tool from entering.

  By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to fit in the board positioning projection 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and is formed on the main body frame 3 on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, the game board 4 is entirely inserted after the positioning recess 611 is inserted from the front side of the main body frame 3 in an oblique direction so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576. Is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 614 which is in a free state in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end thereof is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. Thereafter, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIG. 30 and FIG. 34, a mounting notch 616 that passes through the game board 4 in the front and rear direction is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the game board 4 (exactly). Is formed with a mounting notch 616 in the front component 601.), and a fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed in the horizontal direction below the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a belt groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, it is the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3, and the firing rail 515 is fired. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the portion, and a fastening linkage 534 for hooking the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 35). ).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, illegal removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

  Further, the outer shape of the game board 4 has speaker cutouts 612 formed on the upper left and right sides of the game board 4 so as to receive the rear protruding portions of the speakers 163 provided on the back surface of the door frame 5, and the side of the foul mouth 610. A notch portion 613 for passage into which a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted is formed obliquely below. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate sticking unit 615 for attaching a certificate check certificate is provided.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the game board 4, the balls won in various gaming devices (for example, a prize having a V entrance or a prize opening such as a general prize opening) arranged in the game area 605 are aligned downstream. A back box 621 that can be guided is attached, and controls the display of a liquid crystal display device 640 (see FIG. 74, etc.) as a display device that is disposed on the back surface of the back box 621 at approximately the center of the game area 605. A liquid crystal display control board box 622 is attached as a display control board box in which the display device control board is stored.

  Further, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed to the back of the game board 4 below the back box 621. This board substrate holder 623 has a space part (this space part has a width in the front-rear direction larger than the width of the back box 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in front of it. And a drop port 629 (see FIG. 29) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 73) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

  Further, the board substrate holder 623 is connected to the main control board box 624 for storing the main control board 1350 for controlling the game operation on the back surface thereof, and a payout control board 1186 and a power supply board provided in the board unit 1100 described later. And a relay terminal plate 625 for mounting. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 simply by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

  Furthermore, the board substrate holder 623 is formed with a joint guide protrusion 628 that protrudes backward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joint guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as will be described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the joining guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 73). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

<Hitball launcher>
The ball striking device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 is a perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball launcher 650, a perspective view (B) with the firing motor part removed, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 39 is the hit ball launch in the state where the operation handle 461 is not operated. 40 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 40 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 461 is operated. 41 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), a front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball striking device 650, and a cross-sectional view A-A in the front view (B). It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 rotatably supports the hitting ball rod 687 on the launching base frame 651, and attaches a shooting motor 695 for reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the urging force of the urging spring 684 that imparts the urging force that returns to the position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, the launch base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape with a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at substantially the center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper portion and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is configured to guide a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding from an upper rear end of a slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. Further, as shown in FIG. 38, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656.

  Further, a hook portion is formed with respect to the main body of the launch base frame 651 at a front portion of the upper side of the launch base frame 651, and an operating piece opening 657 is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 652. ing. The operating piece opening 657 abuts on a supply swing piece 289 (see FIG. 15) provided facing a hitting ball supply port 288 (see FIG. 15) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. The operating piece 658 is swingably provided by a stop pin 659 on a mounting portion 660 protruding from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the operating piece opening 657. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with the operating piece abutting portion 693 provided to project, and the upper side portion swings the supply swing piece 289 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball rod 687. One hit ball that flows out from the supply port 288 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 515 one by one.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. In addition, a swinging piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swinging piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a projecting manner to slide the slide rod 677 to the lower rear of the slide member storage space 656. Has been.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hitting ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. For this reason, the metal plate 665 has through holes 666, 667, 668, 669 corresponding to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, each of the through holes 666 to 671 has the members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663 corresponding thereto. It is fixed to the launch base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the launch base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 37, the swing piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, the shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. A connecting hole 674 having a shape is formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is a contact portion 675 that contacts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Accordingly, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663 and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swing piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. A guide bush 681 having a set screw 682 is passed through to fix the set screw 682 in the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. An operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 protrudes from the front back surface side of the base plate 690, and a locking ring 686 at the other end of the urging spring 684 is hooked on the front front surface. A spring locking portion 692 is protruded, and a motor contact protrusion 691 that is engaged with and disengaged from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is protruded on the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 fixed above the tip 688. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and is enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion to attach the motor. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 698 and a motor cam at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 formed integrally with an attaching portion in which an attachment fixing hole 699 for attaching to the boss 661 is formed. 697 is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698 and engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 39) fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. This prevents rotation in the opposite direction. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the reverse direction so that the motor cam 697 and the motor abutting protrusion 691 mesh with each other to prevent a failure in which the ball striking device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor abutting protrusion piece 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), the main configuration of the hit ball launching device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  Incidentally, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moved is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open as shown in FIG. 41, and an elliptical oval convex portion 711 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 provided in the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface to the inside slightly behind the first inclined surface 715. In addition, a clamping piece 716 is formed in which a predetermined interval is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state in which the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 41B, one end side of the slide protrusion 492 on the inclined side 493 side contacts the side wall in the sliding direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing a function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. 38A in the state of being stored in the slide member storage space 656. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connecting opening 664 having a shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. Although it is illustrated as being in contact, in a normal state, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball striking device 650 will be described. The slide member 710 has a right position at the initial position (FIG. 39, the swing piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 677 that is in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 39) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocatingly rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (when it moves toward the left inner wall in FIG. 38A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right side in FIG. 40) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the firing position is increased. The game area 605 of the game board 4 is reached by being strongly bulleted. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the slide amount of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the ball hitting device 650. The movement of the slide member 710 is performed by the operation handle portion 461 of the handle device 460 described above. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 483 of the joint unit 480 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 464. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 of the handle device 460 is rotated, the slanting cam 466 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 465 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 480 483 slides and moves in one direction inside the storage body 481. For this reason, the slide protrusion 492 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 483 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 of the slide body 483 penetrates the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side on the inclined side 493 side of the sliding protrusion 492 is in contact with the side wall in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Accordingly, when the slide protrusion 492 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, the ball striking force of the ball striking device 650 can be adjusted by rotating the rotation operation member 464 of the handle device 460.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 460 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 of the handle device 460 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 492 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 460. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 460 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 460 and the ball hitting device 650 can be linked / separated with the opening / closing of the door frame 5 very easily. In particular, when the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 714, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 that protrudes into the insertion space 714 even if the position of the slide protrusion 492 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction. The slide projection 492 is smoothly inserted into the clamping position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, the player may stuff the padding operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent, but the store clerk at the game hall knows the padding without knowing the padding. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide protrusion 492 is simply separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide protrusion 492 is not limited. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 493 of the sliding protrusion 492 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 492 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged with each other while moving 710 in one direction. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 460 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461. It is.

<Prize ball tank>
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 24) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a notch portion 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface thereof extends from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward 723 and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward a discharge port 730 described below.

  In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and the discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this manner, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port protruding wall 725 that connects the U-shape. Further, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720, the main body frame 3 is provided. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the fourth side wall 543 project, and a ball leveling member 744, which will be described later, is attached to the lower part of the rear surface wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. The ball leveling attachment shaft 735 is projected. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed on and attached to the upper part on the back surface side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. 28, the prize ball tank 720 is stored via the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 communicates with the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 5, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 described below. ing. Accordingly, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 for storing the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to the 4th side wall 543, and it is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543.

  Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rearward projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, so that the side walls 541 to 541 are formed. Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodates the rearward projecting portions of the gaming apparatus, and the award is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is positioned outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protruding portion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 to be stored can be protruded rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that the rear protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can also be comfortably accommodated in the inside of the rear side wall 541 to 543.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the storage part 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that house the rearward projecting part of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is provided in the prize ball tank 720. A unique effect that is not found in conventional prize ball tanks can be obtained only by the configuration of being provided outside the rear wall 722. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the sphere at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a prize-ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side of FIG. 43, or a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball collapse projection 736B as shown in FIG. , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the outlets 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure.

  For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced due to the degree of sphere overlap, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the outlets 730A and 730B, resulting in the occurrence of clogging. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, an action force directed from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and a reaction thereof, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state in the discharge port 730, and it is possible to achieve an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur.

<Tank rail member>
The tank rail member 740 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 46 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball path unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the tank rail member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 24) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 is provided so as to be hooked on the rail locking groove 554 from above. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in an inclined bowl shape with an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, the inside of the tank rail member 740 serves as a passage 742 through which the spheres flow down in two rows by the partition wall 741 as shown in FIG.

  The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign matters that roll along the passage 742 together with the sphere fall downward from the narrow groove. In addition, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 22). Yes. For this reason, the static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the passages 742 in the two rows of the tank rail members 740. The spheres that are suspended and flow down the respective passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 743 formed in the lower portions of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gears 747. During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of passages 742 fall in a row alternately to the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

<Ball passage unit>
A ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the winning ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 51. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 49 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 50 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 51 is a connection structure of the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. 48 and 49, the prize ball unit 800 portion is a drawing of the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 with the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat sink 841 and the unit sub plate 825 removed. is there. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 770, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface of a substantially rectangular plate (the surface seen from the back surface is called the front surface). As shown in FIG. 46A, the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front / rear bent passage portion 772a. It consists of a left and right bent passage portion 772b bent in the left and right direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back) and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portion 772b and having a substantially vertical shape.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (A), the front / rear bent passage 772a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 742, as described above, because the position of the upper end inlet 773 falling from the tank rail member 740 described above is the main body. The winning ball guide projecting from the front / rear bent passage 772a and the pivot-side rear wall 546 is located on the rear side from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 and the pivot-side rear wall 546 of the frame 3. The projection 561 bends the ball drop passage 772 in the front-rear direction so that the ball drop passage 772 is positioned close to the surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546. Further, as shown in FIG. 50, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a U shape so as to be almost full of the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the spheres that have fallen from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending.

  Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, it is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When no ball is present in the portion 772c due to clogging or ball deficiency, the ball piece detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball piece switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, stops and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 in order to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detecting piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 has a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 inserts a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 to prevent clogging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 when it is difficult to swing the ball breakage detection piece 776 due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball break detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 778.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball passage unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop passage 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is also formed in the passage unit mounting boss formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546. 562. Thus, in order to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In this state, the screw 784 can be screwed from the stop hole 782. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 The projecting shaft 789 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 787 serving as the shaft support projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting lid 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the ball passage unit 770 by closing, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end portion of the ball dropping passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 51B). The state shown in FIG. 51) and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball dropping passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 51A). A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 51). In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball The bent passage 803 of the unit 800 is communicated with the passage wall 790 so that a ball falling on the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball path unit 770 is that the prize ball unit 800 is easily detachably attached to the main body frame 3 as described later, and the detachable attachment lid member 786 is detachable. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide projection 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is located substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  In addition, the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . In addition, the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

<Prize ball unit>
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55. 52 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800. FIG. 53 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member. FIG. 55 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 55 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  52, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 forming a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and the unit base body. A unit sub-plate 825 covering the rear surface of 801, a relay board 830 attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a gear provided in a substantially central surface region (rear surface region) of the unit sub-plate 825; It comprises a group 843, 844, 847 and a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to the middle of the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. In addition, the middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged, and a unit base body 801 from the lower portion of the distribution space 805. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of the bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end.

  That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage constitutes a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is housed and fixed in a motor housing space 814 that is located at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Is done. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of the spheres staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but the upstream side of the distribution space 805 An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface of the. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  Further, in the distribution space 805 described above, a sprocket 807 as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof A payout ball detection sensor 812 is detachably mounted.

  The payout ball detection sensor 812 is a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which a ball passes is formed at the front end, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end is provided with a bent passage wall 802. By being formed with, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the payout ball detection sensor 812 is connected to a relay board 830 described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed.

  In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 are formed by covering the rear surface side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted at the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction path 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 The guided ball is guided to a ball pulling connection passage 880 described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is mounted on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. Is provided.

  The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801 and is attached with a rod-like detachable button 822 slidably in the depth width direction. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the distal end portion of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In the engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged with each other, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 800 cannot be performed.

  Note that the hook-shaped engaging portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub-plate 825. After passing through 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are coupled with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched by fitting the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. doing.

  The configuration of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat radiating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. A relay board region 826 for attaching the relay board 830 is formed on the top side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, and a plurality of gears 843, 844, 847 and detection are formed below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which the disk 850 is attached is formed.

  The relay substrate region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for mounting the relay substrate 830 are provided along the square shape, and a substrate cover 835 (described later) is formed above and below the one side vertical side. An engagement groove portion 828 that engages with the engagement protrusion 836 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with the locking projection portion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Further, the relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and an attachment boss part 832 for fixing the relay board 830 with screws (not shown).

  The relay board 830 attached to the relay board area 826 described above includes wiring from the above-described payout ball detection sensor 812, payout motor 815, and sensor 855 described later provided in the prize ball unit 800, and a payout control board 1186 (described below). 25 and 72), a plurality of connectors are provided for this purpose, and a button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and a mounting hole 831 corresponding to the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. And are drilled. Thus, the relay board 830 is mounted on the mounting rib 827 in the relay board area 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown). It can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the plate 825.

  Further, the relay board 830 attached as described above is covered with a board cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and an engagement projection 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side of the other vertical side. ing. A button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The relay substrate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the relay substrate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 projects through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and is formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. A shaft 845, the other end of which is supported in the shaft hole 846, is rotatably provided. Above the second gear 844, a third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is a unit sub-plate. A shaft 848 press-fitted in a shaft hole 849 formed in 825 is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807. .

  As shown in FIG. 55, the tip of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. The rotating shaft 808 is supported by being pressed into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801 and supported at the other end by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is pivotally supported. However, as shown in FIG. 55, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated around the rotation shaft 808. It is designed to rotate. Accordingly, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. This detection notch 851 is detected by a light emitting / receiving sensor 855 (rotation position detecting means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. . The sensor 855 monitors whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If an abnormal rotation is detected by the sensor 855 (mostly a ball-engaged state by the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball-engaged state). It is. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 55, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side. As a result, the gear cover 866 that covers the gear region 840 is provided. A mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. In this state, the base unit body 451 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, there is a wiring processing piece 869 that holds and collects wiring connected to the relay board 830 (for example, wiring connecting the relay board 830 and a payout control board 1186 described later). Projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub-plate 825, the relay board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, as shown in FIG. The cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is positioned below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be taken out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 arranged in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 serving as a payout member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission members (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connect the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 has a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 formed in a single passage shape, so Thinning is achieved. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. 55, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front portion of the main body frame 3 from the lower discharge motor escape opening 572, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness of the shaft support side rear wall 546 from the protruding dimension. Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side relative to the shaft support side rear wall 546 is small. Further, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  Further, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 47, the hook-shaped engaging portion 824, the engaging protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed down while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to be.

  That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. In this way, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claws 820, whereby the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball inlet 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed, and the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

<Full tank unit>
The full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 62. 56 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900. FIG. 58 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 59 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 60 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610, 61 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  The full unit 900 is placed and fixed on the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3 as described above. As shown in FIG. 58, the full unit is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  In addition, the sphere that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed forward and the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920 of the plate unit 300 described above. Guided to prize ball contact 451.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905 so as to open over the entire bottom surface. ing. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is semi-circularly supported by being fitted to the shaft support protrusion 911 when viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A bearing portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 61, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 protrudes downward from the center of the back surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when the number of normal prize balls paid out (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the payout number is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 described below when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted and supported on the shaft support protrusion 911. It has become.

  Further, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed outside the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 60, the foul ball passage 922 is bent and formed such that the foul ball entrance 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. For this reason, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 451 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  The box main body 901 includes engagement pieces that are engaged with unit engagement grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching projection 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid body 926 is formed while a projection 924 is provided. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid body 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball inlet 927 is opened in the passage 902 at a position corresponding to the upstream end. Further, a latching piece 928 for engaging with the latching protrusion 925 of the box main body 901 is provided around the lid 926 so as to project downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 56, the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the side guide passage 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The sphere colliding with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920, and the front guide passage 920. From the exit 921 through the prize ball communication rod 451 to the dish unit 300. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball contact hole 451 from the outlet 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. Since the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of normal prize balls is paid out, the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock, and the detection protrusion 909 is a light projecting / receiving method as shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 is placed between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the biasing force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection protrusion 909 is projected as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving full tank switch 916 is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls). Will be stopped after paying out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having a width substantially the same as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogging. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  Moreover, in the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the full unit is formed on the main body frame as in the prior art because it is detachably attached to the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to form a passage for the full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 for guiding the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 920 for paying out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

<Lock device>
Next, the lock device 1000 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 63 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the lock device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 64 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing a latching structure of the lock device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 66 is a partial cross-sectional view taken in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 66 shows the detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 67 is a side view (A) of the locking device 1000, and a perspective view (B) seen from the front side, and FIG. 68 is a perspective view seen from the back side of the locking device 1000 (FIG. 67). A) Perspective views (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and FIG. 70 is a door frame sliding rod 104. And is a front view for explaining the operation of the body frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 71 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The locking device 1000 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated example) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, the locking device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding frame 1040 for the main body, the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame cannot be illegally slid. The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 are attached to the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased. The mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width dimension of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment because the size between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

  First, a rectangular hook penetration opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass is opened on the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 and on the closed side. Further, a screw fixing portion 1003 protrudes in the horizontal direction at the upper part and the middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 69) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, and further, the side surface 1001a (not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side) A locking projection 1004 is formed in a protruding manner at the upper end and middle portion of FIG.

  The screw stoppers 1003 and the locking protrusions 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The locking protrusions 1004 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (See FIG. 64) In this state, since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. can do. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 for positioning and locking, and the U-shaped Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two locations on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the locking structure of the front part is not loosened as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 1042 is formed at each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are respectively formed at the main frame sliding rod 1050. By passing the rivet 1006 through the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock attaching piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 protrudes laterally, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 are provided on the side face 1001 b in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 is arranged so that the lock attachment piece 1008 is positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is formed with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are drilled in two places at the top and bottom, and screw stoppers 1003 for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are drilled.

  The insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032, and the clearance lateral hole 1022 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock body fixed to the front of the lock attachment substrate 1011, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is the lock attachment substrate. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement projection piece 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has an attachment hole 1013 and a lock attachment piece 1008 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011 by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into the lock insertion hole 1009. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by making the mounting holes 1014 coincide with each other and screwed with screws 1012.

  Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. . Therefore, each of the anti-tamper members 1023 and 1032 has a structure in which the first anti-tamper member 1023 and the second anti-tamper member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rods 1040 and the body frame sliding rods 1050, the lowermost insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engaging protruding piece 1018 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 1026. It can be inserted. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, a slanting portion 1024 is an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. The inclined portion 1024 contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are rotated when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. , The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings about the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise direction in FIG. 71B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding on an outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a restriction protruding piece 1031 is provided below the stopper piece portion 1027. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is engaged. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. Further, in the restricting protruding piece 1031, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by a spring 1035, and the second tamper-proof member 1032 is biased when connected by the spring 1035. The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the U-shaped body. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with a connection pin 1034.

  The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at one upper end thereof, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and one end of the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base body 1001. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on a closing projection 41 that is fixed to an inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed forward and downward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) formed on the door 3 and engages with a hook cover 227 (see FIG. 15) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are locked with each other by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

  In addition, a vertically long rivet hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the uppermost rivet for the rivet long hole 1042 is formed. A guide projection 1043 is provided below the elongated hole 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 passes, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end portion of the rivet slot 1042. The guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. And the sliding motion 1050 for the main body frame are guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The upper hook member 1051 is engaged with a spring hook portion 1057. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling.

  Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed in the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. A clearance notch 1049 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed.

  The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1056 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. The connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1059 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001, and the upper hook member 1051 is smoothly moved without rattling. It is for doing so.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the elongated rivet hole 1061, the descending engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063. One moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, a connecting hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper and lower sides are contacted. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing protrusion 41 provided on the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061.

  As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. Further, the connecting hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1067 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 can be smoothly performed without rattling. It is for making.

  The members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above. To attach the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. In this state, the guide protrusion 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are placed in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base body 1001. You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036, and the second fraud prevention member 1032. Is in contact with the restricting protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the lock device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While being inserted into the hook hole 549, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in this state the screw fixing portion 1003 and screw fixing protruding horizontally By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. . In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 1001 are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Compared to the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the backlash does not occur.

  By the way, the operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 are locked. Yes. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and lowered. Therefore, the locking projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are released. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 70A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is forced into the closing projections 38, 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered downward, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hooked state of the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 70A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the slope is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side slope portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is hooked to the hook cover 227 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 rises upward, and finally the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are locked again. The sliding rod 1040 moves down and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the side surface in the vertical direction of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and that is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction, and an illegal act of forcibly opening the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is performed. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering it may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. It is in a contact state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves away from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, and thus the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 71 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame provided inside is used. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 close the closed space of the unauthorized tool. Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 for a door frame, compared with a lock device whose lateral width is concentrated on a conventional L-shaped base. The sliding hook 1040 and the main body frame sliding hook 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 can be 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since it is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, a main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws, the locking device 1000 The front portion of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. The structure may be such that the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (lock base). It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 1050. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

<Board unit>
Next, the substrate unit 1100 that is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. 72 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as viewed from the front side.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 22 and 24) formed in the lower portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in the figure, the frame unit is made of synthetic resin. The board holder 1101 is configured by attaching various boards such as a door relay board, a power board box 1103, a terminal board box 1104, a payout control board box 1105, a main drawer relay board, and a sub drawer relay board. Among the above boards, the door relay board, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 in the front-rear direction, and are attached to the main drawer relay board. The auxiliary drawer relay board is attached to the front side of the frame board holder 1101. A shield plate is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from a power supply board or the like, and the main drawer relay board and the sub drawer relay board are covered with a board cover 1109. Attached.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed of a synthetic resin in a horizontally long shape, and as shown in the drawing, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side. A recess for a relay board for attaching the door relay board to the door is formed. At both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 are projected outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment hole portions of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to 527 (see FIG. 22). As shown in FIG. 24, the mounting hole portion 527 has an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the mounting piece 1122. Furthermore, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 73) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  Further, an out-sphere passage 1119 is formed in an inverted L shape substantially at the center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. The out ball passage 1119 is formed broadly at the upper side so as to correspond to the out port 606 (see FIG. 31), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 22), and the drop port 629 (see FIG. 29). In addition, the downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 25, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  The board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board, and a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board. A rectangular connector opening for projecting outward is formed.

  The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body to which a horizontally long rectangular payout control board is fixed, and a cover body that is attached to the box main body and covers the surface of the payout control board. One side of the box main body and the cover body are engaged, and the other side is caulked and fixed by a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body and the cover body, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act.

<Cover body>
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 24, and 28. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed at substantially the center of the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In the case of releasing, the engagement between the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be released.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, a locking hole 1253 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and a locking protruding hook piece 570 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, an abutting protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed in the same manner as a cover body 1270 according to a second embodiment described below. Has been. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1283, the standing wall 1284, the contact protrusion 1285, and the reinforcing rib 1286 of the cover body 1270 according to the second embodiment. Have the same function. Then, in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are aligned and fixed with screws (not shown), so that the cover body 1250 can fix the main body frame 3. The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Since the locking protrusion 570 passes through the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person in charge having the padlock key.

[Detailed configuration of game board]
A detailed configuration of the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 82. FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 75 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from an oblique front, FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from an oblique rear, and FIG. 74 is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 74, FIG. 78 is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 74, FIG. 79 is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member and was seen from diagonally forward, FIG. 81 is the perspective view which looked at the exploded view of FIG. 80 from diagonally behind.

  As shown in the figure, the gaming board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a game ball as a game medium is driven when a player operates an operation handle portion 461. A frame-shaped front component member 601 that partitions and forms the outer periphery of the gaming area 605, and a transparent plate-like game panel 599 that is arranged on the rear side of the front component member 601 so as to close the inside of the frame of the front component member 601. The frame-shaped panel holder 600 that covers the outer periphery of the game panel 599 and holds the game panel 599 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear side of the front component 601, and the back box attached to the rear side of the panel holder 600 621 and a back box 621 are detachably supported on the back side of the back box 621 and have at least a liquid crystal display device 640 as an effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. And bets 2000, after covering the lower side of the back unit 200 is fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 600 and a board substrate holder 623 by the main control board box 624 is fixed.

  In the game area 605 of the game board 4, an accessory prize winning unit 1400 disposed substantially at the upper center thereof, and a front left side member 1500 </ b> L and a front right side member 1500 </ b> R disposed on both the left and right sides in the game area 605 A front side member 1500 and an arcuate start port unit 1600 disposed substantially along the lower outer periphery in the game area 605. As will be described in detail later, the prize winning unit 1400 is a prize winning opening 1402 that serves as an entrance of a game ball into the prize having the V entrance 2002, and an entry of the gaming ball into the prize winning opening 1402 It mainly includes a pair of movable pieces 1404 that enable or disable.

  Further, the front left side member 1500L and the front right side member 1500R are arranged at the approximate center in the vertical direction near the center of the game area 605 and allow a game ball to pass therethrough, and are arranged below the chucker 1510 and played. A general winning opening 1520 capable of receiving a ball and a special indicator 1530 arranged near the outer periphery of the game area 605 at a substantially center in the vertical direction and having a plurality of LEDs arranged in an arc shape.

  Further, the start port unit 1600 is capable of receiving a game ball and is directly above the out port 606 between the two first start ports 1602 and the two first start ports 1602 that are arranged at a predetermined interval in the left-right direction. And a second starting port 1604 arranged at the same position. The pair of movable pieces 1404 of the prize winning unit 1400 expands upon receipt of the game balls at the first start opening 1602 and the second start opening 1604, and the game balls are received at the prize winning opening 1402. It has become possible. The second starting port 1604 of the starting port unit 1600 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 1606, and a normal lottery that is drawn by passing game balls through the chuckers 1510 of the front left side member 1500L and the front right side member 1500R. In accordance with the result, the pair of movable pieces 1606 are expanded for a predetermined time, and the winning probability of the game ball to the second starting port 1604 can be changed.

  On the special indicator 1530 of the front left side decorative member 1500L, a first special symbol display for displaying a first special lottery result that is drawn in response to a start winning of a game ball at the first start port 1602 in the start port unit 1600 is displayed. If the first special symbol indicating the result of the first special lottery corresponding to the start winning to the first starting port 1602 cannot be displayed in the first special symbol display 1532 and the first special symbol indicator 1532, A first special symbol hold indicator 1534 that displays the number of holds on which the display of one special symbol is held, and a normal symbol display that displays a normal symbol corresponding to a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the chucker 1510 The normal symbol related to the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball passes the chucker 1510 on the device 1536 and the normal symbol display 1536 And a, a normal symbol reservation display 1538 for displaying an ordinary lottery holding number that hold the display of results of normal symbol according to the passage of chucker 1510 may not be Rukoto.

  In the first special lottery, the “first small hit” in which the movable piece 1404 of the prize winning unit 1400 is opened only once for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 5 seconds). Or, the first special lottery result of “big hit” as a special advantageous gaming state in which the movable piece 1404 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern is drawn, and when the movable piece 1404 is in the open state, It is possible to win a game ball in the prize winning port 1402. Further, in the normal lottery, if the normal lottery result is “winning”, the normal symbol indicating “winning” is displayed on the normal symbol display 1536 and a predetermined time (for example, between 15 seconds and 30 seconds) has elapsed. Later, the movable piece 1606 of the start port unit 1600 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 1 second), and the winning probability of the game ball to the second start port 1604 is increased. .

  On the other hand, the special indicator 1530 of the front right side decorative member 1500R displays a second special lottery result that is drawn in response to the start winning of a game ball at the second start port 1604 in the start port unit 1600. When the symbol display 1540 and the second special symbol display 1540 cannot display the second special symbol indicating the second special lottery result corresponding to the start winning to the second starting port 1604, the start winning A second special symbol hold indicator 1542 for holding the display of the second special symbol and displaying the number of holds. In the second special lottery, the “second small hit” in which the movable piece 1404 of the prize winning unit 1400 is opened twice for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 5 seconds), Alternatively, any second special lottery result of “big hit” as an advantageous gaming state in which the movable piece 1404 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern is drawn.

  Further, the special indicator 1530 of the front right side decorative member 1500R has an opportunity when the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are “big hit”, or the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. Round game indicator 1544 that displays the number of times of opening / closing (number of rounds) for opening and closing the movable piece 1404 of the prize winning unit 1400 in a predetermined pattern when a game ball that has won the winning prize winning port 1402 enters the V entrance 2002. And.

  The first special symbol indicator 1532 and the second special symbol indicator 1540 in the special indicator 1530 each have three LEDs, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result depending on the lighting pattern of the three LEDs. It is possible to display the first special symbol and the second special symbol that suggest the above. In the first special symbol display 1532 and the second special symbol display 1540, when the game ball is started and won at the first start port 1602 and the second start port 1604, each LED flashes to cause the first special symbol and The first special symbol and the second special symbol suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result after the two special symbols are displayed in a variable manner and are displayed for a predetermined time according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result The special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Moreover, the normal symbol display 1536 in the special indicator 1530 has two LEDs, and can display a normal symbol by the lighting pattern of the two LEDs. Further, the first special symbol hold indicator 1534, the second special symbol hold indicator 1542, and the normal symbol hold indicator 1538 in the special indicator 1530 each have two LEDs. The number of holds on hold (for example, a maximum of four) can be displayed by the combination of blinking and extinguishing. Furthermore, the round indicator 1544 has three LEDs, and can display “3R big hit”, “8R big hit”, or “15R big hit” depending on the position of the LED to be lit. Yes.

  In the first special lottery and the second special lottery, the lottery probabilities of “first jackpot” and “second jackpot” are 299/300, respectively, and the lottery probability of “big jackpot” is 1 / 300. In addition, the number of rounds in the “big hit” game is drawn in the form included in the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result at each start winning prize.

  Although not shown, the game board 4 has a plurality of obstacle nails arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 599. Further, the game panel 599 has a transparent plate shape so that the rear side of the game panel 599 can be visually recognized from the player side. The game panel 599 has a plurality of openings 599e (see FIG. 83, FIG. 84, etc.) that penetrate in the front-rear direction and have a predetermined inner peripheral shape, and corresponding to these openings 599e, The front left side member 1500L, the front right side member 1500R, and the start port unit 1600 are respectively fixed to the game panel 599 from the front side.

  In addition, an opening window 599f (see FIGS. 83 and 84, etc.) that opens to a predetermined shape is formed in the approximate center of the game panel 599. It is fixed to the game panel 599 from the front side. In addition, a transparent frame-like center frame 1700 extending forward substantially along the periphery of the opening window 599f below the bonus winning unit 1400 is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 599. The center frame 1700 can prevent the game ball from entering the opening window 599f from the front side of the game panel 599. The center frame 1700 has an arcuate portion 1702 that is a part of a circle centered on the approximate center of the game area 605 and a linear portion 1704 that hangs downward substantially vertically from the arcuate portion 1702. The outer shape is formed in a substantially keyhole shape.

  Further, the back unit 2000 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 599 in the game board 4 is arranged so as to be visible from the player side through the opening window 599f on the rear side of the game panel 599 as shown in the figure. In the back box 621, the liquid crystal display device 640, the back box 621 that supports the liquid crystal display device 640 at a position away from the rear surface of the game panel 599 by a predetermined distance and is attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 600. The arc-shaped decorative body 2100 arranged substantially along the inner periphery of the circular game area 605 and the game balls won in the prize winning port 1402 of the prize winning unit 1400 are supplied. The first movable accessory 2200 supported in the back box 621 so as to be visible from the player side through the lower inner periphery of the open window 599f, and the first movable accessory 2200 and the first movable accessory 2200 A frame-shaped second movable accessory that is supported in the back box 621 so as to be visible from the player side through the opening window 599f of the game panel 599 with the panel 599 and substantially along the inner peripheral shape of the opening window 599f. And a movable accessory unit 2004 having 2400.

  The decorative body 2100, the first movable accessory 2200, and the second movable accessory 2400 of the back unit 2000 are visible from the player side through the transparent portion of the game panel 599, the opening window 599f, and the like. Thereby, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the pachinko so far in which the decorative body 2100, the first movable accessory 2200, and the second movable accessory 2400 are visible on the rear side of the game panel 599, that is, on the rear side of the game area 605. It has a characteristic appearance that is not found in gaming machines, and can be strongly attracted to the player's interest by being differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

  Note that the gaming board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a vibration sensor 2538 and a magnetic sensor 2302 that detect that an illegal act has been performed by shaking the pachinko gaming machine 1 or using a magnet. In addition, a fraud warning indicator 2005 that is turned on when a fraud is detected by the sensors 2538 and 2302 is provided (see FIGS. 74 and 92). As shown in the figure, the cheating warning indicator 2005 is disposed on the upper side from the center in the vertical direction with respect to the game area 605 and at the right corner in the left and right direction, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. In addition, even if a player sits on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a staff member of the game hall or the like can surely see the cheating warning indicator 2005 from the rear side of the player.

<Holding structure of game panel on game board>
The holding structure of the game panel 599 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view showing the front component member, the game panel, and the panel holder in the gaming board in a longitudinal direction in an assembled state, and FIG. 83 is a front component member mainly constituting the game board. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the panel, the panel holder, and the like as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 as seen from an oblique rear.

  As described above, the game board 4 of the present embodiment includes a plate-like game panel 599 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin that detachably holds the game panel 599 from the front. A frame-shaped panel holder 600, and an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 for guiding the game ball into the game area 605 and defining the outer periphery of the game area 605 disposed on the front side of the panel holder 600. It mainly includes a front structural member 601 and a plate-like panel back plate 635 disposed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600.

  As shown in the drawing, the front component member 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601a and positioning protrusions 601b protruding rearward on the rear surface side. Although the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b will be described in detail later, the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 600, the board substrate holder 623, and the game panel 599 disposed on the rear side.

  The gaming panel 599 in the gaming board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin or the like. . The game panel 599 is thinner than the panel holder 600 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when an obstacle nail (not shown) is implanted.

  The gaming panel 599 has a plurality of fitting holes 599a formed by round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 599b extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the up-down direction. Each is provided. The fitting hole 599a and the long hole 599b are disposed outside the game area 605 and are positioned with respect to the panel holder 600. In addition, the game panel 599 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 599c whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 599c is formed by cutting out approximately half of the board thickness of the game panel 599, and is disposed outside the game area 605 in the same manner as the fitting hole 599a and the long hole 599b. This is for engaging and fixing the game panel 599 to the panel holder 600.

  The game panel 599 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 599d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 599b protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 603 into the inner rail fixing hole 599d.

  Further, the gaming panel 599 is formed with a plurality of openings 599e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the front left side member 1500L, the front right side member 1500R, the start port unit 1600, and the like are provided. In addition, fixing holes for fixing them are formed at appropriate positions. In addition, the game panel 599 is formed with an opening window 599f having a predetermined inner shape and larger than the opening 599e at substantially the center thereof, and an accessory winning award unit 1400 is fixed to the upper inner periphery of the opening window 599f. In addition, the center frame 1700 is fixed to the front side substantially along the periphery.

  The panel holder 600 in the gaming board 5 has a size that includes the gaming panel 599 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape. The thickness of a member (for example, a gaming board base) made of wooden plywood in the gaming board of a conventional pachinko gaming machine. And a thermoplastic synthetic resin having substantially the same thickness as this (in this example, about 20 mm). The panel holder 600 includes a holding step portion 600a that holds the game panel 599 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 605 inside the holding step portion 600a. It mainly includes a through-hole 600b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 600a of the panel holder 600 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 599. It is designed to be almost the same surface. Further, the holding step portion 600a has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance C is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 599. With this clearance C, even if the game panel 599 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed (see FIG. 82). An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 600 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 599a and the long hole 599b formed in the game panel 599 held by the holding step portion 600a, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 599a. A plurality of projecting pins 599 c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 599 a and the long holes 599 b of the game panel 599 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 600c into the fitting holes 599a and the long holes 599b of the game panel 599, the panel holder 600 and the game panel 599 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 600 is provided with an engaging claw 600d and an engaging piece 600e that engage with the engaging step portion 599c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 599c of the game panel 599. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the engaging claws 600d are disposed on the upper holding step portion 600a of the panel holder 600 and correspond to the upper engaging step portion 599c of the game panel 599. The holding step portion 600a protrudes forward from the front surface and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 599c. The engaging claw 600d has such a size that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 600. On the other hand, the engagement piece 600e is disposed on the lower holding step portion 600a of the panel holder 600, corresponds to the lower engagement step portion 599c of the game panel 599, and is played between the front surface of the holding step portion 600a. In a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 599c of the panel 599 to be inserted is formed, the panel 599 is configured to extend a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 600. By engaging the engagement step portion 599c of the game panel 599 with the engagement claws 600d and the engagement piece 600e, the game panel 599 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 600.

  Further, the panel holder 600 is provided with a boss insertion hole 600f penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided in the front component member 601 can be inserted. By inserting 601a, the panel holder 600 and the front structural member 601 are positioned with respect to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 600 has a mounting support portion 600g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. Is provided. With this mounting support portion 600g, the rear surface of the panel holder 600 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height and the rear outer peripheral portion protrudes rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 621d (see FIG. 94, etc.) of the back box 621 in the back unit 2000 attached and fixed to the mounting support portion 600g. It is desirable to be between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 600g, the fixing portion 621d can be prevented from protruding rearward from the panel holder 600, and the panel holder 600, that is, the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko gaming machine. It is possible to securely install and install in one game board installation recess 510.

  In addition, the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 600g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back body 635. The storage recess 600h is further provided with a locking portion 600i that is disposed so as to penetrate the storage recess 600h in the front-rear direction and that can lock the locking claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The housing recess 202h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by engaging the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 with the locking portion 600i, and the rear surface of the received panel back plate 635 is a panel. It is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the holder 600.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 600 has a plurality of mounting holes 600j that are disposed in the mounting support portion 600g on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recessed portion 600h and into which predetermined screws can be screwed. They are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 600 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 600k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 600j. The positioning hole 600k is for inserting a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion 621f formed on the fixing portion 621d of the back box 621) formed on a member that is mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 600j. In this example, the positioning hole 600k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  The mounting hole 600j has a large diameter and a small diameter so that the inner diameter of the hole is mixed, and the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be fixed. 600j may be used.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 600 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 600l that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 600 is reduced by the thinned portions 600l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 83, these thinning portions 600l are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 600h, that is, in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front surface side of the panel holder 600 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 600 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component member 601 disposed on the front surface thereof becomes a substantially flat surface, and the ball hitting device 650 The launched game ball is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 600 is formed with a thinned portion 600l so that the mounting holes 600j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 600. For this reason, lattice-shaped ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 600 is provided with a positioning part 600m corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 599 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 600, an opening 600n that communicates with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 600o that communicates with the foul port 610 of the front component 601 are further provided.

  Next, the panel back plate 635 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 so as to cover the thinned portion 600l within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the rear surfaces of the housing recess 600h of the panel holder 600 are arranged with each other. A plurality of screw holes 635a that can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface, are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on a flat rear surface and can be screwed with a predetermined screw, and a plurality of screw holes 635a are arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a. The positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 600i of the panel holder 600, and a concave portion 635d for reducing the amount so as not to penetrate from the front side are provided.

  The screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting hole 600j and the positioning hole 600k in the panel holder 600. Similarly to the panel holder 600, the panel back plate 635 is formed into a boss-like portion where the screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b are formed by the recessed portion 635d, and supports or supports the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 635, lattice-shaped ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 600n of the panel holder 600, the communication hole 600o, and the boss insertion hole 600f.

  The panel back plate 635 is housed in the housing recess 600h of the panel holder 600, and the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 is locked to the locking portion 600i of the panel holder 600, thereby being integrated with the panel holder 600. In this state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 600. By integrating the panel holder 600 and the panel back plate 635 in this manner, the mounting holes 600j and screw holes are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through-hole 600b over substantially the entire circumference. A mounting hole made of 635a and the like and positioning holes 600k and 635b are arranged, and the presence of these mounting holes allows a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the game panel 599 in the present example, the game panel 599 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 600a of the panel holder 600 from the front, and the engaging claw 600d and the engaging piece 600e, By engaging the engagement step portion 599c, the panel holder 600 can hold the game panel 599, and the front side of the game panel 599 and the panel holder 600 are substantially flush with each other. It becomes possible to set the game panel 599 in the state where the game panel 599 is held in the panel holder 600 without modifying the used obstacle nail planting device, and to install the obstacle nail planting device. An increase in the cost can be suppressed.

  Further, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 599, the panel holder 600, and the front component member 601, positions of obstacle nails, winning holes, etc., depending on the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game panel 599 having a change in the size can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 600 and the front component member 601 can be used as a common part. The panel holder 600, the front component member 601 and the like can be recycled and the game panel It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a game board 4 that can be used for various types of machines by replacing only 599.

  Further, since the panel holder 600 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 600j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various types such as the back unit 2000 and the board substrate holder 623 mounted on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 depending on the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of the predetermined members are different from each other, the panel holder 600 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that does not depend on the model can be obtained by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 600j. It can be used as a common part.

<Board substrate holder>
A detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80, 85, and 86. FIG. 85 is a perspective view shown obliquely from behind with the main control board box fixed to the board holder. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, drawer holder, and main control board box in FIG.

  The board substrate holder 623 is attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 600, and as shown in FIG. Is inclined so as to become lower toward the front side, and after receiving the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 599, it can be discharged downward from a substantially horizontal center. . On the rear surface of this board substrate holder 623, a sealed portion 1302 made of a metal plate fixed with a predetermined screw from the rear side and corresponding to the sealing portion 624a provided in the main control board box 624 was formed. A caulking base member 1300 and a drawer holder 1305 that supports the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are fixed.

  The main control board box 624 of this example is supported by the board substrate holder 623 so that the caulking base member 1300 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the board board holder 623 and the sealing portion of the main control board box 624. 624a is sealed to the sealed portion 1302 of the caulking base member 1300. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board substrate holder 623 in this state, an opening mark remains on the sealed portion 1302 of the caulking base member 1300, and the main control board box 624 is illegally removed. Whether or not it has been confirmed can be visually confirmed.

  Further, in a state where the main control board box 624 is fixed to the board substrate holder 623, the heads of screws fixing the caulking base member 1300 to the board board holder 623 are connected to the caulking base member 1300 and the main control board box 624. The main control board box 624 can be prevented from being removed together with the caulking base member 1300. In addition, since the caulking base member 1300 is formed of a metal plate, the sealed portion 624a of the main control board box 624 can be firmly sealed by the sealed portion 1302, and a structure in which illegal acts are difficult to be performed. It has become.

<Front side member>
The configurations of the front left side member and the front right side member will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80, 81, and 87. FIG. 87 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the front side member and the start port unit attached to the game panel. The front side member is composed of a front left side member 1500L and a front right side member 1500R, and has a substantially symmetrical shape with respect to the center in the left-right direction on the game board 4 as shown in the figure. The front left side member 1500L and the front right side member 1500R include a main body portion 1502 having a special indicator 1530 at a substantially center in the vertical direction, an upper extending portion 1504 extending upward in an arc from the main body portion 1502, and a main body. A middle extension portion 1506 extending from approximately the center of the portion 1502 toward the center of the game area 605, and a lower extension portion 1508 extending downward from the main body portion 1502 in an arc shape. The portion 1504 and the lower extending portion 1508 form an arcuate outer shape along the outer periphery of the game area 605.

  The middle extension 1504 in the front left side member 1500L and the front right side member 1500R is provided with a chucker 1510 through which a game ball circulating in the game area 605 can pass. The chucker 1510 is provided with a passage sensor 1512 capable of detecting a passing game ball. When the passage sensor 1512 detects the passage of the game ball, a predetermined normal lottery result is drawn.

  Further, the front left side member 1500L and the front right side member 1500R receive a game ball flowing down in the game area 605 in a downwardly extending portion 1508 extending downward in a circular arc shape from the main body portion 1502, and the rear surface of the game panel 599. A receiving member 1514 leading to the side is provided. The receiving member 1514 is guided by a general winning port 1520 that serves as a receiving port for game balls in the game area 605, a guide unit 1522 that guides game balls that have won the general winning port 1520 to the rear side, and a guide unit 1522. A guide path 1524 for guiding the played game ball to the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area 605 below the general winning opening 1520 along the panel surface of the game panel 599, and the game ball guided by the guide path 1524 to the game panel And a discharge portion 1526 for discharging downward to the rear side. The front left side member 1500 </ b> L and the front right side member 1500 </ b> R are provided with an opaque flange portion 1528 that abuts the front surface of the game panel 599, including the receiving member 1514. The opening 599e is closed from the front side so that the player can hardly see the opening 599e.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the receiving member 1514 in the front left side member 1500L and the front right side member 1500R is inserted into the opening 599e formed in the game panel 599 from the front side. The guide path portion 1524 of the member 1514 guides the game ball within the approximate thickness of the game panel 599, and the amount of protrusion from the rear surface of the game panel 599 is larger than the diameter of the game ball except for the discharge portion 1526. The amount of protrusion is small. Thereby, the space on the rear side of the game panel 599 can be made as wide as possible.

  Further, the front left side member 1500L and the front right side member 1500R include a main body inner front substrate 1550 to which a plurality of LEDs arranged in the main body portion 1502 and constituting a special indicator 1530 are attached, and a main body inner front substrate 1550. A rear substrate 1552 in the main body with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front and rear surfaces disposed on the rear side, a substrate 1554 in the upper extension with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front extension 1504, and a lower extension It further includes a lower extension portion inner substrate 1556 that is disposed in the extension portion 1508 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. The front left side member 1500 </ b> L and the front right side member 1500 </ b> R can be decorated with light emission by the LEDs mounted on the front side of the main body inner rear substrate 1552, the upper extending portion inner substrate 1554, and the lower extending portion inner substrate 1556. It has become.

  On the other hand, the LED mounted on the rear side of the rear board 1552 in the main body can illuminate the decorative body 2100, the second movable accessory 2400, and the like of the back unit 2000 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 599. The decorative body 2100, the second movable accessory 2400, and the like can be illuminated and decorated by the LEDs mounted on the rear side of the rear substrate 1552 in the main body portion of the front left side member 1500L and the front right side member 1500R. It has become.

<Starting port unit>
The structure of the start port unit will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80, 81, and 87. As shown in the figure, the starter unit 1600 abuts on the front surface of the game panel 599 and closes a predetermined opening 599e in the game panel 599 from the front side, and forms an arc-shaped opening covering substantially along the outer periphery of the game area 605. Portion 1608, a first start port 1602 that is disposed in the vicinity of both left and right ends of the opening covering portion 1608, opens upward, and allows a game ball flowing down in the game area 605 to be received, and the first start port 1602 A guide portion 1610 for guiding the game ball to the rear, a second start port 1604 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the opening covering portion 1608 and opening upward to receive the game ball in the game area 605; A pair of movable pieces 1606 that are arranged on both the left and right sides of the start port 1604 and that can be expanded, and the pair of movable pieces 1606 are moved and supported on the rear side of the second start port 1604. A start port solenoid 1612, a guide unit 1614 that supports the start port solenoid 1612 and guides the game ball received in the second start port 1604 to the rear side, and detects the game ball guided by the guide unit 1614 and moves downward. And a second start port sensor 1616 for discharging to the outside.

  Further, the starter unit 1600 includes a rib 1618 having a shape substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 599e of the game panel 599 on the rear side of the opening covering portion 1608, and the rib-shaped opening covering portion 1608 forms a plate-like opening covering portion 1608. It is in a reinforced state. In addition, from the rear side of the opening covering portion 1608, the guide portion 1610, the guide portion 1614, and the rib 1618 are protruded rearward, and the guide portion 1610, the guide portion 1614, and the like are the opening portions of the game panel 599. 599e is inserted from the front side. Note that the guide portion 1610 and the rib 1618 have substantially the same rear projection amount as the thickness of the game panel 599.

  The pair of movable pieces 1606 in the start port unit 1600 has an upper end side that is a free end and a lower end side that is rotatable about an axis extending in a direction perpendicular to the panel surface of the game panel 599. When the plunger moves in the front-rear direction, the lower ends of the pair of movable pieces 1606 are rotated via a predetermined link mechanism (not shown) so that the upper ends approach or separate from each other. In a normal state, the pair of movable pieces 1606 are substantially upright, and the distance between the upper ends is substantially the same as the opening width of the second starting port 1604 (a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball). The upper end of the pair of movable pieces 1606 is rotated in a direction away from each other by driving the start opening solenoid 1612 so as to be in a state of opening in an inverted C shape (expanded state). As a result, the probability of receiving a game ball at the second start port 1604 (winning probability) is increased.

<Bonus winning unit>
The composition of the prize winning unit will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. FIG. 88 is a perspective view of the accessory prize winning unit viewed from obliquely upward and forward, and FIG. 89 is a perspective view of the accessory winning prize unit viewed obliquely from below and backward. FIG. 90 (A) is a front view showing a state where an accessory winning port in the accessory winning unit is opened, and FIG. 90 (B) is a front view showing a state where an accessory winning port is closed. Further, FIG. 91 is a perspective view showing a drive mechanism in the prize winning unit.

  The bonus item winning unit 1400 can be fixed to the front surface of the game panel 599 and has at least a bonus body winning port 1402 that opens upward in the game area 605, and a bonus game prize in the front body member 1406. A pair that is arranged on both the left and right sides of the mouth 1402 and makes it impossible or possible to enter the game ball (winning) into the prize winning port 1402 by rotating each other to the rising position (closed position) or the lowering position (open position). Of the movable piece 1404, a prize winning-port solenoid 1408 for rotating the movable piece 1404, and the pair of movable pieces 1404 are arranged on the outer sides in the left-right direction, respectively, and are turned to the rising position or the lowering position. A pair of sub movable pieces 1410 that can be guided to the side of the prize winning port 1402 or the side opposite to the prize winning port 1402, and a prize winning that drives the sub movable piece 1410 to rotate. A secondary solenoid 1412, and a body member 1414 after being fixed to the character object winning opening solenoid 1408 and the character object winning opening sub solenoid 1412 to the rear side of the supporting front body member 1406 is mainly provided.

  The front main body member 1406 in the prize winning unit 1400 is inserted into the opening window 599f of the game panel 599 and the rear main body member 1414 is fixed to the rear side, and a game is attached to the front end of the base portion 1416. A plate-like flange portion 1418 that comes into contact with the front surface of the panel 599 and can be fixed to the game panel 599, and is arranged in front of the flange portion 1418 to form an accessory winning hole 1402, and a movable piece 1404 and a sub-movable piece 1410 The front decoration part 1420 that can be partially covered on the front side of the game ball and the bonus ball 1402 that protrudes forward from the flange part 1418 on the upper side of the prize winning hole 1402 and the pair of movable pieces 1402 are in the raised position. And a cover portion 1422 for preventing entry.

  The flange portion 1418 of the front main body member 1406 is formed with a protrusion 1418a that protrudes rearward at a predetermined position and a mounting hole 1418b. Can be positioned at a predetermined position of the game panel 599, and a predetermined screw is fixed to the game panel 599 via the mounting hole 1418b. 1400 can be fixed to the game panel 599.

  The prize winning port 1402 in the front body member 1406 has a width in the left-right direction that is about 2.5 to 3 times the diameter of the game ball. Two mouth sensors 1424 are arranged side by side (see FIG. 90). These accessory winning prize sensors 1424 are held at predetermined positions by the base portion 1416 and the front decoration portion 1420 of the front main body member 1406. The front main body member 1406 further includes a guide portion 1426 for guiding the game ball that has passed through the accessory winning a prize port sensor 1424 to the rear side of the gaming panel 599 below the bonus winning award sensor 1424. The game ball guided by the guide unit is released downward on the rear side of the game panel 599 and is delivered to a second movable accessory 2400 described later.

  In addition, the cover portion 1422 of the front main body member 1406 is three-dimensionally formed with characters “PINK LADY” on the surface side thereof, so that the player can recognize the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It has become.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the prize winning unit 1400 includes a light-transmitting portion in each of the base portion 1416 and the front decoration portion 1420 of the front main body member 1406, and an internal A plurality of LEDs are arranged on the screen, and light emission decoration is possible. In FIG. 89, reference numeral 1428 is connected to the prize winning port solenoid 1408, the prize winning port sub-solenoid 1412, the prize winning port sensor 1424, various LEDs, the main control board 1350, the peripheral control board 2600, and the like. It is a prize winning port relay terminal board for the purpose.

  As shown in the figure, the movable piece 1404 in the prize winning unit 1400 has a fan shape such that the shape in front view spreads outward in the left-right direction centering on the prize winning prize outlet 1402 side. A flat guide surface 1404a and a partially cylindrical outer wall surface 1404b are formed on the outer peripheral side. The sub movable piece 1410 is disposed on the outer side in the left-right direction of the movable piece 1404 centering on the accessory winning award opening 1402 side, and a circular shape having a front view in the radial direction has a predetermined amount in the circumferential direction. A fan-like shape that is cut out, an inner wall surface 1410a having a curvature slightly larger than the curvature of the outer wall surface 1404b of the movable piece 1404 on the inner peripheral side, and a partially cylindrical outer wall surface that is concentric with the inner wall surface 1410a on the outer peripheral side 1410b and a flat auxiliary guiding surface 1410c that linearly connects the upper ends of the inner wall surface 1410a and the outer wall surface 1410b are formed on the upper side.

  The driving mechanism for the movable piece 1404 and the sub movable piece 1410 in the prize winning unit 1400 is arranged to extend in the front-rear direction near both sides in the left-right direction of the prize winning opening 1402, and the base end of the movable piece 1404 is fixed to the front end. A pivot shaft 1432, a crank member 1434 fixed to the rear end of the pivot shaft 1432, and a long hole 1436 a in which a crank pin 1434 a of the crank member 1434 is slidable in the left-right direction. A slider 1436 that moves up and down by a solenoid 1408, and a base end that can be rotated around a rotation shaft 1432 and that extend in a direction perpendicular to the rotation shaft 1432 and outside the turning range of the movable piece 1404. The arm member 1438 to which the sub movable piece 1410 is fixed at the position, and the base end of the arm member 1438 and the sub movable piece 1410 are fixed. And a drive pin 1440 that protrudes rearward from the arm member 1438 and a long hole 1442a in which the drive pin 1440 is slidable in the left-right direction. And a secondary slider 1442 that moves.

  In the normal state, the movable piece 1404 has the slider 1436 moved to the lowered position by a biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the slider 1436 is located at the lowered position, so The guide surface 1404a of 1404 is in a state of standing upright obliquely (see FIG. 90B). When the prize winning port solenoid 1408 is driven, the slider 1436 moves to the raised position against the biasing force of the spring, so that the rotating shaft 1432 rotates and moves via the crank member 1434. The piece 1404 is rotated so that the leading surface 1404a is slightly higher than the base end (see FIG. 90A).

  On the other hand, since the sub movable piece 1410 is normally fixed at a position eccentric from the base end of the arm member 1438, the drive pin 1440 is driven with respect to the arm member 1438 by the weight of the arm member 1438 and the sub movable piece 1410. The sub-slider 1442 that is connected to each other is also in the lowered position, and the side on which the sub-guide surface 1410c of the sub-movable piece 1410 is more distant from the rotating shaft 1432 (right and left with respect to the accessory winning hole 1402) (Outside in the direction) is lowered, and is in a position hidden by the front decoration portion 1420 in a front view (see FIG. 90B). When the accessory winning port sub-solenoid 1412 is driven, the sub-slider 1442 moves to the ascending position, so that the drive pin 1440 connected to the sub-slider 1442 is sandwiched between the rotating shaft 1432 and the opposite side. The fixed sub movable piece 1410 is rotated to the ascending position, and the sub guide surface 1410c of the sub movable piece 1410 is in a state in which the side of the prize winning port 1402 is lowered (see FIG. 90A). reference).

  As shown in the figure, when the movable piece 1404 is located at the raised position, the secondary movable piece 1410 is located at the lowered position, and the secondary guide surface 1410c of the secondary movable piece 1410 is more than the guide surface 1404a of the movable piece 1404. Is in a position that is lowered downward. In addition, when the movable piece 1404 is located at a position that surrounds, the sub movable piece 1410 is located at the raised position, and the mutual guide surface 1404a and the secondary guide surface 1410c are in the same direction side (the bonus prize winning port 1402 side). In addition to being in a lowered state, the sub guide surface 1410c of the sub movable piece 1410 is positioned higher than the guide surface 1404a of the movable piece 1404, and is supplied onto the sub guide surface 1410c. A game ball is supplied onto the guide surface 1404 a of the movable piece 1404.

  The relationship between the movable piece 1404 and the sub movable piece 1410 in the prize winning unit 1400 of this example is that the sub movable piece 1410 is lowered when the movable piece 1404 is raised, and the sub movable piece 1410 is raised when the movable piece 1404 is lowered. In this way, the probability of receiving a game ball to the prize winning port 1402 varies greatly depending on the state of the movable piece 1404 and the sub-movable piece 1410 that are movable per unit time. More specifically, when the guide surface 1404a of the movable piece 1404 is higher than the sub guide surface 1410c of the sub movable piece 1410, even if a game ball is supplied on the sub guide surface 1410c of the sub movable piece 1410, Since the game ball is restricted from moving toward the prize winning port 1402 by the outer wall surface 1404b of the movable piece 1404, the game ball supplied on the guide surface 1404a of the movable piece 1404 substantially wins the prize winning hole 1402. can do. On the other hand, when the guide surface 1404a of the movable piece 1404 is at a position lower than the sub guide surface 1410c of the sub movable piece 1410, the game ball supplied on the sub guide surface 1410c is supplied onto the guide surface 1404a of the movable piece 1404. As a result, not only the movable piece 1404 but also the game ball supplied on the auxiliary guide surface 1410c of the auxiliary movable piece 1410 can win the prize winning opening 1402.

  As a result, in a state where the movable piece 1404 is lowered and the sub movable piece 1410 is raised, the game ball flowing down in a wider range than before can be awarded to the accessory prize winning opening 1402, so The probability of winning a prize increases, and the interest of the player can be enhanced, and it is possible to drive the game ball to aim at the timing, suppressing the excitement of the player and lowering the interest Be able to.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), in this prize winning unit 1400, in a normal state where the pair of movable pieces 1404 are in the raised position, the pair of movable pieces 1404 are reversed with the upper side slightly opened. The front decoration part 1420 of the front main body member 1406 is decorated so as to have a letter C shape and to be continuous with the guide surfaces 1404a. An alphabet “V” shape is formed by the guide surfaces 1404 a of the pair of movable pieces 1404 and the decoration of the front decoration portion 1420, and this position is an entrance to the V inlet 2002. The player can be made aware.

  Further, the prize winning unit 1400 of this example has an arc shape such that the lower outer peripheral shape of the flange portion 1418 in the front main body member 1406 is a part of a circle centered on the approximate center of the game area 605. At the same time, arc-shaped decorations that are part of a plurality of concentric circles with different radii around the approximate center of the game area 605 are formed on the front decoration portion 1420 of the front main body member 1406. The plurality of arc-shaped decorations formed on the front decoration portion 1420 are continuous with the arc-shaped portion 1702 of the center frame 1700 formed in a keyhole shape (see FIG. 74 and the like).

<Back unit>
The configuration of the back unit will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a front view of the back unit, FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 94 is a back unit including a movable accessory unit, a decorative body, a liquid crystal It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled into the display apparatus etc. and was seen from diagonally forward.

  The back unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a box shape that is attached to the rear side of the panel holder 600 and has the front side opened, and an opening 621b having a predetermined shape is formed substantially at the center of the rear wall 621a. A back box 621, a liquid crystal display device 640 that is visible to the player through the opening 621 b of the back box 621 and is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 621, and a circular game area 605 in the back box 621. Correspondingly, a decorative body 2100 that is annularly arranged around the opening 621b and a game ball that is placed and fixed in the back box 621 and won in the prize winning port 1402 are supplied and moved to move a plurality of game balls. And a movable accessory unit 2004 having a V inlet 2002 on a predetermined flow path.

  In this back unit 2000, a liquid crystal display device 640, a decorative body 2100, and a movable accessory unit 2004 are unitized by a back box 621. By simply mounting and fixing the back box 621 to the rear side of the panel holder 600, The liquid crystal display device 640 and the like can be easily fixed to the rear side of the panel 599, and the decorative body 2100, the movable accessory unit 2004, the liquid crystal display device 640 and the like can be visually recognized from the player side.

  In the back unit 2000, the decorative body 2100 is provided with a plurality of LEDs so that various light emission effects can be produced according to the gaming state. The movable accessory unit 2004 includes a first movable accessory 2200 having a first V inlet 2002a and a second movable accessory 2400 having a second V inlet 2002b. A game ball won in the winning combination winning port 1402 is supplied to the first movable combination 2200 via the second movable combination 2400, and does not enter the first V entrance 2002a of the first movable combination 2200. A part of the game ball is supplied to the second movable accessory 2400, and the game ball rolls together with various movable effects by the movement of the first movable accessory 2200 and the second movable accessory 2400. Production is now possible. Further, the back box 621 includes various board boxes in which a control board for controlling a light emission effect and a movable effect is accommodated in addition to the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear side, and a relay terminal for connecting and relaying each board. A plate or the like is fixed.

  In the back unit 2000, as shown in FIG. 81, a first decoration control board box 2052 having a first decoration control board 2050 for controlling the light emission effect of the decoration body 2100 and the like on the rear side of the back box 621, A second decoration control board box 2056 having a second decoration control board 2054 for controlling the light emission effect of the decoration body 2100 and the like together with the first decoration control board 2050, and a vibration sensor 2538 for detecting vibration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to fraud. (See FIG. 110) The vibration sensor box 2058 having the second movable accessory relay terminal plate 2060 for relaying the electrical connection between the second movable accessory 2400, and a special indicator on the front left side member 1500L. Left special indicator relay terminal board 2062 for relaying electrical connection with 1530, and special indicator 1530 in front right side member 1500R Liquid crystal display having a right special display relay terminal board 2064 for relaying the electrical connection of the display and a liquid crystal display control board 2612 (see FIG. 111) for controlling the display of effect images and the like displayed on the liquid crystal display 640 Control board box 622, first decoration control board 2050, second decoration control board 2054, vibration sensor 2538, second movable accessory relay terminal board 2060, left special indicator relay terminal board 2062, right special indicator relay terminal board 2064, a panel relay terminal plate 2066 that is electrically connected to the liquid crystal display control board 2612, etc. and relays the electrical connection between the back unit 2000 side and the main control board 1530.

  The back unit 2000 is fixed to the rear side of the rear wall 621a of the back box 621 on the left side in the rear view of the opening 621b, and supports a liquid crystal support member 2030 that supports one side of the liquid crystal display control board box 622. A liquid crystal lock mechanism 2032 that is disposed on the opposite side of the member 2030 with the opening 621b interposed therebetween and detachably supports the other side surface of the liquid crystal display control board box 622 is further provided (see FIGS. 81 and 94). ). In this example, the liquid crystal display device 640 is fixed to the liquid crystal display control board box 622, and the liquid crystal display device 640 is attached to the back box 621 when the liquid crystal display control board box 622 is attached to or detached from the back box 621. It can be attached to and detached from the box 621. Further, on the rear side of the back box 621, support portions 2034 for supporting the four corners of the liquid crystal display control board box 622 are provided, and the support section 2034 allows the liquid crystal display control board box 622 to move in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition to the regulation, the weight of the liquid crystal display control board box 622 can be favorably supported together with the liquid crystal display device 640.

  The back box 621 in the back unit 2000 of the present example has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width, and an outer shape extending from the front end of the outer tube portion 621c. A flange-shaped fixing portion 621d, a rear wall 621a for closing the rear end opening of the outer cylinder portion 621c, and an opening 621b having a predetermined shape penetrating the rear wall 621a are provided. In the fixing portion 621d of the back box 621, a plurality of fixing holes 621e penetrating in the front-rear direction and a plurality of positioning protrusions 621f protruding forward are formed (see FIG. 94). A predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting holes 600j and 635a of the panel holder 600 and the panel back plate 635 through the fixing hole 621e after the front surface side of the fixing portion 621d is brought into contact with the rear surface side of the panel holder 600. Thus, the back box 621, that is, the back unit 2000 can be attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 600.

  Further, the positioning protrusion 621f is engaged with positioning holes 600k and 635b formed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 and the panel back plate 635, so that the relative position between the panel holder 600 and the back box 621 (back unit 2000). Can be positioned. Note that the positioning holes 600k and 635b are square holes with respect to the cylindrical positioning protrusion 621f, and the insertion resistance is reduced by reducing the contact area between the positioning protrusion 621f and the positioning holes 600k and 635b. It can be inserted and fitted easily.

  Further, the back box 621 is connected to the rear surface side of the rear wall 621a so that the base end side protrudes from the rear surface of the rear wall 621a to the rear side, and the front end side is a predetermined amount between the rear wall 621a and the rear surface of the rear wall 621a. A plurality of key-like cord holding pieces 621g that can form a gap through which the wiring cord can pass are provided between the proximal end side and the distal end side (see FIG. 81). . These cord holding pieces 621g are arranged so as to hold the wiring cords substantially along the periphery of the liquid crystal display control board box 622 supported on the rear side of the back box 621.

  In the back box 621 of the back unit 2000, game balls that are received by the general winning opening 1520 of the receiving port member 1514 of the front side member 1500 and discharged from the discharge unit 1526 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 599 are stored. A winning ball guide bar 2010 is provided for receiving and guiding to the rear side of the back box 621 and then guiding it downward and discharging it out of the game board 4. A general winning opening sensor 2532 (see FIG. 110) is provided in the middle of the winning ball guiding bar 2010, and a game ball received in the general winning hole 1520 is received through the receiving member 1514. The winning in the general winning opening 1520 is determined by being detected by the general winning opening sensor 2532.

  Further, the back box 621 receives a game ball that is received in the first start port 1602 of the start port unit 1600 and released from the guide portion 1610 to the rear side of the game panel 599 and receives the game board 4 from the lower surface of the back box 621. A first starting winning ball guiding rod 2012 is provided for guiding and discharging outside. A first start port sensor 2534 (see FIG. 110) is provided in the middle of the first start winning ball guiding rod 2012, and the game ball received in the first starting port 1602 is the first starting winning ball guiding rod 2012. The first start opening sensor 2534 detects the winning of the first starting opening, and a predetermined first special lottery result is drawn as a starting winning.

  Further, the back box 621 receives a first V entrance guide path 2014 for receiving a game ball that has entered the first V entrance 2002a of the first movable accessory 2200 in the movable accessory unit 2004 and discharging it downward, The second V entrance guiding path 2016 that receives the game balls that have entered the second V entrance 2002b of the second movable accessory 2400 and discharges it downward, and the first V entrance 2002a and the second movable in the first movable accessory 2200. The first lose ball guiding path 2018 that receives the game balls that have not been distributed to the accessory 2400 and discharges them downward, and receives the game balls that have not been distributed to the second V inlet 2002b in the second movable accessory 2400 and downwards. And a second lose ball guiding path 2020 for discharging.

<Decorative body>
A detailed configuration of the decorative body 2100 in the back unit 2000 will be described. As shown in FIG. 94, the decorative body 2100 is disposed and fixed inside the back box 621 so as to surround the opening 621b, and is arranged on the left and right sides along the inner wall of the back box 621. A member 2120, a plate-shaped background decoration plate 2140 arranged and fixed at a position close to the rear wall 621a of the back box 621 between the arc-shaped rear side member 2120 and the opening 621b, and an opening 621b of the back box 621 And a logo decoration member 2160 which is arranged and fixed at the upper part and is three-dimensionally formed with characters “Pink LADY”.

  The background decoration board 2142 arranged on the rear side of the background decoration board 2140 is located on the center side in the left-right direction (within the frame of the center frame 1700) to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the opening 621b in the back box 621 rather than the background decoration board 2410. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface of the extended portion. In addition to the background decoration plate 2140, the background decoration board 2142 is a side frame of the second movable object body 2402 of a second movable combination 2400, which will be described later, disposed between the center frame 1700 and the background decoration board 2142. The arc-shaped decorative portion of the portion 2402b can be illuminated and decorated from the rear side (see FIG. 77).

  The rear side member 2120 in the decorative body 2100 includes a rear left side member 2120L disposed on the left side and a rear right side member 2120R disposed on the right side, and the rear left side member 2120L and the rear right side member 2120R. Are symmetrical to each other. The rear side member 2120 includes a fan-shaped wide decorative portion 2122 at substantially the center in the vertical direction, a plurality of narrow decorative portions 2124 arranged at predetermined intervals above and below the decorative portion 2122, the wide decorative portion 2122, and each And a transparent lens portion 2126 which is arranged so as to connect the narrow decorative portions 2124 and whose cylinder is bent in an arc shape.

  The wide decorative portion 2122 of the rear side member 2120 protrudes in a curved shape from the vicinity of the rear wall 621a side of the back box 621 toward the front side as the surface of the wide decorative portion 2122 moves outward from the center of the back box 621, and the back box 621. It is formed in a sawtooth shape so as to form a concentric step centered on the center (see FIG. 77). A plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the wide decorative portion 2122 and the narrow decorative portion 2124 so that a gorgeous decorative effect can be obtained. In addition, the wide decorative portion 2122 of the rear side member 2120 has a sawtooth-shaped step from the LED mounted on the rear side of the main body rear substrate 1552 in the main body portion 1502 of the front side member 1500 attached to the game panel 599. The movable accessory unit 2004 arranged in the center of the back box 621 can be illuminated and decorated from the side surface side. Yes.

  Although not shown, a sawtooth reflector plate plated with silver is disposed on the rear side of the lens portion 2126, and light enters the lens portion 2126 at the axial end of the lens portion 2126. After mounting the LED that irradiates the LED, a side member decorative substrate 2128 is arranged, and the lens portion 2126 can emit light in a rod shape by emitting the LED.

  Further, the background decoration plate 2140 in the decorative body 2100 is mounted on a background decoration board 2142 (see FIG. 111) disposed on the rear side while being provided with an outer space pattern such as a star or a nebula on the surface side. As the LEDs emit light, stars and nebulae drawn on the surface side appear to shine. Further, the logo decoration member 2160 in the decoration body 2100 is configured by a member having a white light-transmitting character portion “Pink LADY”, and a logo decoration board 2162 disposed on the rear side (see FIG. 111). Each character can emit light independently by the LED mounted on the). On this logo decoration board 2162, LEDs that emit the letter “P” are mounted as a group L0 (see FIG. 92), and LEDs that emit the letter “I” are mounted as a group L1 (see FIG. 92). LEDs that emit the letter “N” are mounted as group L2 (see FIG. 92), LEDs that emit the letter “K” are mounted as group L3 (see FIG. 92), and LEDs that emit the letter “L” are emitted. Is implemented as group L4 (see FIG. 92), LEDs that emit the letter “A” are implemented as group L5 (see FIG. 92), and LEDs that emit the letter “D” are implemented as group L6 (see FIG. 92). 92), LEDs for emitting the letter “Y” are mounted as a group L7 (see FIG. 92), and the group is configured to emit light according to various effects. It is allocated as L0~L7.

<Movable accessory unit>
A detailed configuration of the movable accessory unit 2004 in the back unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 95 to 106. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the movable accessory unit as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the first movable combination in the movable combination unit as seen from diagonally forward, and FIG. 97 is an exploded view of the first movable combination divided into a first combination and a storage unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 98 is a perspective view in which the first accessory unit in the first movable accessory is disassembled into a first accessory body and a first accessory drive unit and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st accessory unit in an accessory into the 1st accessory main body and the 1st accessory drive unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the drive mechanism of the first accessory drive unit in the first accessory unit as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the storage unit in the first movable accessory as viewed from the front and obliquely above, and FIG. 102 is a perspective view of the storage plate drive mechanism in the storage unit as viewed from the diagonal front.

  FIG. 103 is a perspective view of the second movable combination in the movable combination unit as viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 104 is a perspective view of the second movable combination as viewed from an oblique rear. FIG. 105 is a perspective view of the second movable accessory in the movable accessory unit, which is disassembled into a second accessory body and a second accessory driving unit, and is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the driving mechanism of the second accessory driving unit in the second movable accessory as viewed obliquely from the front.

  As shown in the figure, the movable accessory unit 2004 in the back unit 2000 of the present embodiment is disposed between the first movable accessory 2200 having the first V inlet 2002a and the front side to the upper side of the first movable accessory 2200. And a second movable accessory 2400 having a two-V inlet 2002b.

  First, the first movable accessory 2200 will be described. The first movable accessory 2200 in the movable accessory unit 2004 includes a first accessory unit 2202 that can distribute the game balls won in the accessory winning prize opening 1402 to the first V entrance 2002a, And a storage unit 2204 that can temporarily store a part of the game balls that have not been distributed to the first V inlet 2002a by the single accessory unit 2202.

  The first accessory unit 2202 in the first movable accessory 2200 includes a first accessory body 2206 having a first V inlet 2002a and an outer shape formed in a UFO shape, and the first accessory body 2206 at both ends in the left-right direction. And a first accessory driving unit 2208 that swings so as to alternately move up and down and moves in the vertical direction as a whole. The first accessory body 2206 includes a rolling portion 2210 that allows a game ball that has won a winning feature winning opening 1402 to roll and extends in the left-right direction, and a first V that opens substantially rearward of the center of the rolling portion 2210. Between the inlet 2002a, the first V inlet 2002a and the rolling portion 2210, the first discharge port 2212 opened adjacent to the front side and both sides of the first V inlet 2002a, and the left and right ends of the rolling portion 2210 are disposed. A second discharge port 2214.

  The first accessory body 2206 is configured such that after the game ball that has entered the first V inlet 2002a is once guided to the rear part in the first accessory body 2206, it is released downward from the substantially center in the left-right direction. (See FIG. 78). In addition, the game ball that has entered the first discharge port 2212 is discharged downward from its position. Further, the second second discharge port 2214 is discharged downward from the vicinity of the rear portion of the first accessory body 2206. That is, in the first accessory body 2206, the game ball that has entered the first V inlet 2002 a and the second discharge port 2214 is released downward from the rear position of the first accessory body 2206 and enters the first discharge port 2212. The game ball is discharged downward from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction of the first accessory body 2206 in front of the first V inlet 2002a and the second outlet 2214.

  As shown in the figure, the rolling portion 2210 in the first accessory body 2206 has a shape in which the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is slightly bulged upward. A groove portion 2210 a having a bottom surface that is continuous with the bottom surface of the inlet 2002 is formed. In the groove portion 2210a of the rolling portion 2210, an inclined portion 2210b that decreases toward the first discharge port 2212 is formed on the bottom surface at the position where the first discharge port 2212 is opened. Only a slight width portion at the center is formed so as to be continuous with the bottom surface of the first V inlet 2002a. Moreover, the rolling part 2210 is formed in a shape that curves backward as it goes to both ends in the left-right direction.

  The first accessory body 2206 includes a front cover 2216 disposed so as to extend upward along the front edge of the rolling portion 2210, and is supplied to the rolling portion 2210 by the front cover 2216. It is possible to prevent the played game ball from falling to the front side of the rolling portion 2210. In addition, the front cover 2216 has a predetermined amount of gap formed between the end portion in the left-right direction and the rear surface of the first accessory body 2206, and the second discharge port 2214 is formed by this gap. It has come to be. Note that the front cover 2216 is made of a transparent member so that a game ball rolling on the rolling portion 2210 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  Further, the first accessory main body 2206 includes three lower members 2218 that bulge downward downward from the rolling portion 2210 (see FIG. 92 and the like). The lower member 2218 is formed of a transparent member as a whole, and the lower member 2218 at the center in the left-right direction has a prismatic white cloudy inner wall that extends downward in the approximate center in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. An inner cylinder portion 2218a is formed (see FIG. 78). The lower member 2218 reflects the light emitted from the storage unit 2204, which will be described later, by the curved outer periphery and inner peripheral surface, so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. .

  The first accessory body 2206 in the first accessory unit 2202 is formed with a circular support hole 2220 at a predetermined position on one side across the center in the left-right direction on the rear surface side. A long hole 2222 having a predetermined width (height) extending in the left-right direction is formed on the opposite side of the center in the left-right direction from the side on which 2220 is formed (see FIG. 99). A support pin 2240 of a first accessory driving unit 2208 described later is inserted into the support hole 2220 and the long hole 2222.

  On the other hand, the first accessory drive unit 2208 in the first accessory unit 2202 is disposed away from each other in the left-right direction, and the first drive 2230 (first motor left 2230L and first Motor right 2230R), a first drive gear 2232 fixed to the rotational drive shaft of the first motor 2230, and a first driven gear that meshes with the first drive gear 2232 and is disposed between the pair of first motors 2230. 2234, a cylindrical rotating body 2236 that rotates together with the first driven gear 2234 and extends to the front side, a support shaft 2238 that rotatably supports the rotating body 2236 and the first driven gear 2234, and a shaft of the support shaft 2238 And a support pin 2240 extending from the front side to the front side of the rotating body 2236 at a position eccentric from the center.

  Further, the first accessory driving unit 2208 has a pair of openings 2242 whose front surface is substantially flush with the front surface of the rotating body 2236 so that the support pins 2240 extend forward, and where the rotating body 2236 faces the front surface side. A rectangular unit base 2244 that extends in the left-right direction, and is fixed to the rear side of the unit base 2244 so that the first drive gear 2232, the first driven gear 2234, and the rotating body 2236 can be accommodated together with the unit base 2244. And a unit cover 2246 that supports the first motor 2230 and the support shaft 2238 at predetermined positions.

  Further, the first accessory driving unit 2208 includes a rotation detection sensor 2248 that is fixed to the unit cover 2246 and can detect the rotation position of each support pin 2240. Specifically, the first driven gear 2234 is formed with an arc-shaped detection piece 2234a protruding rearward, and the rotation position of the support pin 2240 is detected by detecting the detection piece 2234a by the rotation detection sensor 2248. Be able to.

  The first accessory driving unit 2208 supports the first accessory body 2206 by inserting support pins 2240 protruding forward from the unit base 2244 into the support holes 2220 and the long holes 2222 of the first accessory body 2206. Can be done. As illustrated, a roller member 2250 is rotatably inserted into the support pin 2240 corresponding to the elongated hole 2222 of the first accessory body 2206 arranged on the left side when viewed from the front, and the roller member 2250 is By rolling the inside of the long hole 2222 of the first accessory main body 2206, the support pin 2240 corresponding to the long hole 2222 can slide in the long hole 2222 well.

  Further, in the first accessory driving unit 2208, each first motor 2230 is controlled to rotate separately by a main control board 1530 described later, and the revolution angle phase position of the support pin 2240 with respect to the support shaft 2238 is set. By rotating the first motors 2230 so as to be different from each other, the first accessory body 2206 supported by the two support pins 2240 can be moved up and down while being swung. It has become.

  Subsequently, the storage unit 2204 in the first movable accessory 2200 is disposed below the first accessory body 2206 in the first accessory unit 2202 and enters the first V inlet 2002a from the first accessory body 2206. A first V-entry catching portion 2260 capable of catching a game ball released downward, and a second release port 2214 of the first accessory main body 2206 disposed on both the left and right sides of the first V-entry catching portion 2260. The first lose ball catching portion 2262 capable of catching the game ball released downward, and the first loser ball catching portion 2262 and the first V incoming ball catching portion 2260 are arranged in front of the first accessory main body 2206. A game shelf released from the first discharge port 2212 can be captured, and a storage shelf 2264 is formed so that the center side in the left-right direction and the front side in the front-rear direction are lowered and the captured game balls can be stored. , And a reservoir plate 2266 to impossible storable or stored a game ball to the storage shelf 2264 by raised or lowered is disposed at the front end of the storage shelves 2264.

  In addition, the storage unit 2204 includes a second V-entrance capturing unit 2268 that can capture game balls released from the storage shelf 2264 in front of and below the storage shelf 2264, and a second V-entry capturing unit. And a second lost ball capturing section 2270 that is disposed on the rear side of 2268 and is capable of capturing game balls that have been released from the storage shelf 2264 and that have not been captured by the second V entrance capturing section 2268. Further, the storage unit 2204 includes a rear shelf 2272 that is inclined to the left and right of the rear half of the storage shelf 2264 in the front-rear direction toward the first lose ball capturing unit 2262, and a second V-entry capturing unit 2268. The front shelf 2274 that is arranged on both the left and right sides of the sphere and inclines so as to be lowered toward the second lost ball capturing portion 2270, and extends upward to substantially the same height as the first accessory unit 2202 at both ends in the left-right direction. And a side wall portion 2276.

  Further, the storage unit 2204 includes a rear end wall 2278 that rises from the rear end of the storage shelf 2264, a side end wall 2280 that rises from both left and right ends of the storage shelf 2264, and both left and right sides of the storage plate 2266 at the front end of the storage shelf 2264. And a front end wall 2282 having a shape having a rising decorative property. The rear end wall 2278, the side end wall 2280, and the front end wall 2282 have substantially the same height, and the storage shelf 2264 is surrounded by the entire periphery. In this example, the storage shelf 2264 and the storage plate 2266 are formed of a transparent member, and the light from the LED that is disposed on the lower side of the storage shelf 2264 and mounted on the lower shelf substrate 2284 passes through the storage shelf 2264. The one-piece main body 2206 can be illuminated from below (see FIG. 96).

  In addition, the storage unit 2204 includes a rear partition wall that rises at substantially the same height as the rear end wall 2278 and the like that surround the storage shelf 2264 by partitioning the rear ends of the first V-entry ball capturing section 2260 and the first lose ball capturing section 2262. 2286, an intermediate partition wall 2288 connected to the side end wall 2280 and the side wall portion 2276 at substantially the same height as the side end wall 2280 surrounding the storage shelf 2264 at the front end of the rear shelf portion 2272, and the second lost ball capturing portion 2270 and the front A front partition wall 2290 that extends a predetermined amount from the side wall 2276 toward the center in the left-right direction between the shelf 2274 and a game ball can be circulated from the front shelf 2274 to the second lose ball capturing unit 2270 It has. The middle partition wall 2288 is formed in an integral flat shape in which the left and right middle partition walls 2288 are connected to each other below the storage shelf 2264.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the storage unit 2204 includes a first V entrance sensor 2292 that can detect a game ball guided by a bottom surface that is inclined so as to be lowered in a predetermined direction. The game balls received by the first V inlet 2002a of the first accessory body 2206 and released from the first accessory body 2206 are captured by the first V entrance capturing portion 2260 and are then As a result of detection by the entrance sensor 2292, the entry of the game ball into the first V entrance is determined. The first lose ball capturing unit 2262 includes a first lose mouth sensor 2294 that can detect a game ball guided by a bottom surface that is inclined so as to be lowered in a predetermined direction. The game ball released from the second discharge port 2214 is captured by the first lose ball capturing unit 2262 and detected by the first lose port sensor 2294, so that the release of the game ball to the second discharge port 2214 is confirmed. It is supposed to be. Note that the game balls detected by the first V inlet sensor 2292 and the first lose mouth sensor 2294 are discharged from the storage unit 2204 downward.

  In addition, the second V entrance catching portion 2268 in the storage unit 2204 is provided with a second V entrance sensor 2296 capable of detecting a game ball guided by a bottom surface that is inclined so as to be lowered in a predetermined direction. The second lose ball capturing unit 2268 includes a second lose mouth sensor 2298 capable of detecting a game ball guided by a bottom surface that is inclined so as to be lowered in a predetermined direction (see FIG. 101). The game balls detected by the second V inlet sensor 2296 and the second lose mouth sensor 2298 are discharged below the storage unit 2204.

  It should be noted that the bottom of the first V-entrance ball catching unit 2260 and the first lose ball catching unit 2262 has an impact absorbing sheet (low level) that absorbs an impact when catching a game ball released from the first accessory body 2206. A repelling member) is provided on the surface to prevent the captured game ball from bouncing and moving to other capture units, storage shelves 2264, etc., and to prevent the bottom surface from being damaged by the impact of the game ball. Can be done.

  Moreover, since the 1st lose ball capture | acquisition part 2262 and the storage shelf 2264 incline so that the bottom face may become low in the side which left | separated from the 1st V entrance capture part 2260, as shown in figure Even if the game ball released from the main body 2206 bounces at the bottom of the first lose ball catching portion 2262 and the storage shelf 2264, it can be made to bounce to the opposite side to the first V entering ball catching portion 2260. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being captured by the first V entrance capturing unit 2260, and the game ball is mistakenly stored in the storage unit 2204 even though the game ball is not received at the first V entrance 2002a. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) occurs when the player is caught by the V-entry catching unit 2260 and gives a distrust to the player, or a negative on the side of the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. There has been become possible to reliably prevent or increased.

  Further, the storage unit 2204 has a protruding piece 2300 protruding upward between the first V-entry ball capturing part 2260 and the first lost ball capturing part 2262, and the protruding piece 2300 allows the first V-entry capturing part 2260 to It is possible to prevent a game ball from going back and forth between the ball catching portion 2262 and the first lose ball catching portion 2262. In addition, the storage unit 2204 includes a magnetic sensor 2302 that can detect magnetism generated from a magnet or the like. The magnetic sensor 2302 can detect an illegal act using the magnet or the like so as to issue a warning or the like. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the drive mechanism of the storage plate 2266 in the storage unit 2204 includes a storage plate solenoid 2304 having a plunger disposed below the storage shelf 2264 and capable of moving backward and forward, and a storage plate. A slide member 2306 that is slidable in the front-rear direction by a solenoid 2304, a crank member 2308 in which a storage plate 2266 formed at the front end moves in the up-down direction by sliding the slide member 2306 in the front-rear direction, and a crank member 2308 And a storage plate position sensor 2310 capable of detecting the movement position of the storage plate 2266.

  The slide member 2306 extends from the rear side of the storage plate solenoid 2304 to the left and right sides of the storage plate solenoid 2304 toward the front side, and vertically extends to the distal ends of the pair of projection pieces 2306a. And a detection piece 2306c that protrudes outward in the left-right direction from one protruding piece and can be detected by the storage plate position sensor 2310. Further, the crank member 2308 includes a horizontal hook 2308a extending from the left and right ends of the storage plate 2266 to the rear side, a hanging hook 2308b extending downward from the rear end of the horizontal hook 2308a, and a left and right from the lower part of the hanging hook 2308b. A pin 2308c that protrudes outward in the direction and is slidably inserted into the elongated hole 2306b of the slide member 2306, and protrudes inward in the left-right direction from the rear end of the horizontal flange 2308a and is pivotally supported by a predetermined member. And a rotation shaft 2308d.

  The storage plate 2266 is driven by the storage plate solenoid 2304 so that the slide member 2306 slides in the front-rear direction, and the pin 2308c of the crank member 2308 inserted into the elongated hole 2306b moves in the front-rear direction, whereby the crank member 2308 Rotates around the rotation shaft 2308d, and thus the storage plate 2266 formed at the tip of the crank member 2308 moves in the vertical direction, and the storage plate 2266 moves up to store the storage shelf 2264. Thus, the game ball can be stored and the storage plate 2266 is lowered, so that the game ball cannot be stored in the storage shelf 2264 and the game ball is discharged forward from the storage shelf 2264. In this example, the storage plate 2266 is biased to a lowered position by a spring (not shown), and the storage plate 2266 is raised by driving the storage plate solenoid 2304. In this example, the storage plate position sensor 2310 detects the slide position of the detection piece 2306c of the slide member 2306, so that the vertical position of the storage plate 2266 can be detected.

  The storage unit 2204 further includes a storage ball detection sensor 2312 that detects whether or not a game ball is stored in the storage shelf 2264 above the storage plate solenoid 2304 and below the storage shelf 2264. Yes.

  The first movable accessory 2200 includes a first motor 2230, a rotation detection sensor 2248, a first V inlet sensor 2292, a first lose mouth sensor 2294, a second V inlet sensor 2296, a second lose mouth sensor 2298, A storage plate solenoid 2304, a storage plate position sensor 2310, a storage ball sensor 2312, a magnetic sensor 2302, and a first movable accessory relay terminal plate 2320 that relays connection to the main control board 1350 are provided. In addition, a first movable accessory decorative relay terminal plate 2322 for relaying the connection between the under-shelf substrate 2284 and the peripheral control substrate 2600 is provided (see FIG. 97).

  Next, the second movable accessory 2400 will be described. The second movable accessory 2400 in the movable accessory unit 2004 is disposed below the accessory winning award unit 1400 and is formed in a frame shape so that the liquid crystal display device 640 disposed on the rear side is visible. A second accessory main body 2402 having a second V inlet 2002b at the lower end and a second accessory drive unit 2404 for moving and driving the second accessory main body 2402 in the left-right direction are provided. The second accessory body 2402 in the second movable accessory 2400 includes an upper frame portion 2402a extending in the left-right direction, a side frame portion 2402b extending downward from the left and right ends of the upper frame portion 2402a, and lower ends of the side frame portions 2402b. And a lower frame portion 2402c for connecting the two. As shown in the figure, the second accessory main body 2402 is provided with a substantially concentric arc-shaped decoration on the upper half of the left and right side frame parts 2402b, and the lower half of the left and right side frame parts 2402b is downward. It extends in a direction approaching each other as it goes toward, and has a shape in which the lower side is narrowed as a whole. Further, the lower frame portion 2402c of the second accessory main body 2402 is arranged immediately above the second V-entrance catching portion 2268 of the storage unit 2204 in the first movable accessory 2200 (see FIG. 95). ).

  When the second accessory main body 2402 is positioned at the approximate center in the left-right direction, the arc-shaped decorative portion of the side frame 2402b is a part of a circle centered at the approximate center of the game area 605. As a result, the side frame portion 2402b of the second accessory main body 2402, the arc-shaped decoration applied to the front main body member 1406 in the accessory prize winning unit 1400, and the arc-shaped portion 1702 of the center frame 1700 are formed. Are arranged in a substantially concentric circle shape or substantially the same circumferential shape (see FIG. 74, etc.).

  The second accessory main body 2402 has a winning ball receiving unit 2406 for receiving a game ball that has won a bonus winning port 1402 from the accessory winning port unit 1400, and a winning ball receiving unit 2406 at approximately the center in the left-right direction of the upper frame 2402a. A pair of vertical guide paths 2408 for guiding the game balls received by the vertical guide path 2408 along the left and right side frame portions 2402b and the game balls guided by the vertical guide paths 2408 to the second role A pair of lateral guiding paths 2410 for guiding toward a substantially central position in the frame of the main body 2402, and a winning ball discharge port 2412 made of a crone that is disposed at the downstream end of the lateral guiding path 2410 and releases the game ball while turning downward. It is equipped with. As shown in the figure, the pair of croons 2412 are connected to each other.

  The pair of winning ball outlets 2412 in the second accessory body 2402 is located above the rolling portion 2210 of the first accessory body 2206 in the first movable accessory 2200 and is released from the winning ball outlet 2412. The game balls are supplied to the rolling part 2210 of the first accessory body 2206. Although not shown in detail, the winning ball receiving unit 2406 is formed so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the outer side in the left-right direction with the approximate center in the left-right direction as a boundary. Further, the winning ball receiving portion 2406 and the vertical guiding path 2408 are formed of opaque members so that the game balls circulating in the inside cannot be seen from the player side. Further, the lateral guiding path 2410 and the winning ball outlet 2412 are formed of a transparent member so that the game balls that are distributed can be seen by the player, and are arranged on the rear side of the second movable accessory 2400. The liquid crystal display device 640 to be viewed can be viewed.

  The lower frame portion 2402c of the second accessory main body 2402 is disposed immediately above the second V entrance catching portion 2268 of the storage unit 2204 in the first movable accessory 2200, and on the front side and the lower side of the storage shelf 2264. The game balls released from the storage rack 2264 are supplied to the upper portion of the lower frame portion 2402c, and the second V-entrance catching portion 2268 can be closed. (See FIG. 95). The lower frame portion 2402c includes a second V inlet 2002b disposed substantially in the center in the left-right direction and having an upper portion and a lower portion opened, and a second loser opening disposed on the left and right sides of the second V inlet 2002b and having an upper portion and a rear portion opened. 2414, and when the game balls released from the storage shelf 2264 of the storage unit 2204 are received by the second V inlet 2002b, the game balls are released from the lower part of the lower frame portion 2402c to the lower second V entrance catching portion 2268. When it is received in the second loser opening 2414, it is discharged from the rear part of the lower frame part 2402c to the second loser ball capturing part 2270 disposed behind the second V-entry ball capturing part 2268.

  In the second accessory main body 2402 in the second movable accessory 2400, when a game ball released from the storage shelf 2264 of the first movable accessory 2200 is received by the second V inlet 2002b, the second V entrance below is received. The ball is captured by the capturing unit 2268 and detected by the second V entrance sensor 2296 disposed downstream of the second V entrance capturing unit 2268, thereby determining the entrance of the game ball to the second V entrance 2002b. It is like that. In addition, when the game ball released from the storage shelf 2264 is received in the second loser opening 2414, it is captured by the second loser ball capturing unit 2270 disposed at the rear, and downstream of the second loser ball capturing unit 2270. Detection by the arranged second losing port sensor 2298 confirms the acceptance of the game ball to the second losing port 2414.

  Further, the second accessory main body 2402 has a pulley holder 2416 extending rearward from the left and right ends of the lower frame portion 2402c, and is supported by the pulley holder 2416 so that the rotation axis is directed in the vertical direction. And a pulley 2418 that can roll with respect to the front surface of the partition wall 2288. The pulley 2418 can smoothly move the second accessory main body 2402, which is driven only in the left-right direction by a second accessory driving unit 2404 described later, in the left-right direction.

  The second accessory main body 2402 is provided with a transparent partition plate 2420 between the lateral guide path 2410 and the lower frame portion 2402c, which substantially closes the inside of the frame. It is possible to prevent the game ball from jumping out of the movable accessory unit 2004 from the first accessory body 2206 of the movable accessory 2200.

  The second accessory driving unit 2404 in the second movable accessory 2400 is disposed on the rear side of the upper frame portion 2402a of the second accessory main body 2402, and moves and drives the second accessory main body 2402 in the left-right direction. . The second accessory driving unit 2404 includes a second motor 2430 disposed so that the rotation axis faces in the front-rear direction, a second drive gear 2432 fixed to the rotation shaft of the second motor 2430, and a second drive gear. A second driven gear 2434 that meshes with 2432, a drive pulley 2436 that rotates together with the second driven gear 3434, a driven pulley 2438 that is disposed a predetermined distance away from the drive pulley 2436 in the left-right direction, A belt 2440 wound around a driven pulley 2438, a connection slider 2442 fixed to a predetermined position of the belt 2440 and connected to the rear portion of the upper frame portion 2402a of the second accessory main body 2402, and the connection slider 2442 guided in the left-right direction. And a guide shaft 2444 (see FIG. 106).

  Further, the second accessory driving unit 2404 supports the driven pulley 2438 in a rotatable manner and urges the driven pulley 2438 in a direction away from the driving pulley 2436 to apply a predetermined tension to the belt 2440. 2446, a pair of left and right position detection sensors 2448 that are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left and right direction and can detect the position of the connecting slider 2442 in the left and right direction, a second motor 2430, a second driven gear 2434, a drive pulley 2436, and tensioning A mechanism 2446, a guide shaft 2444, a left / right position detection sensor 2448, etc. are held at predetermined positions, and a base member 2450 formed by bending a metal plate is provided (see FIGS. 105 and 106). As shown in FIG. 106, the left / right position detection sensor 2448 includes a left position detection sensor 2448L that detects the left end position of the connection slider 2442, and a right position detection sensor 2448R that detects the right end position of the connection slider 2442. Yes.

  The connecting slider 2442 in the second accessory driving unit 2404 extends in the left-right direction and has a shaft insertion portion 2442a through which the guide shaft 2444 can be inserted. The roller 2442b is made to be capable of rolling, and the roller 2442b rolls on the guide shaft 2444 so that the connecting slider 2442 is smoothly guided in the left-right direction. The connecting slider 2442 includes a detection piece 2442c that protrudes rearward from the approximate center in the left-right direction and can be detected by the left-right position detection sensor 2448. The detection piece 2442c is separated from each other in the left-right direction. By being detected by the detection sensor 2448, the left and right moving end positions of the connecting slider 2442 can be detected.

  The base member 2450 in the second accessory driving unit 2402 is formed by appropriately bending a predetermined metal plate, and the rigidity is increased by bending the upper end extending in the left-right direction backward. . Further, both ends of the guide shaft 2444 are held on the front side, and the second motor 2430, the drive pulley 2436, the driven pulley 2438, and the like are held on the rear side. A part of the tension applying mechanism 2446, the second motor 2430, and the left / right position detection sensor 2448 are held by the base member 2450 via a unit cover 2452 fixed to the rear side of the base member 2450. .

  When the detection piece 2442c of the connection slider 2442 disposed between the pair of left and right position detection sensors 2448 is detected by the pair of left and right position detection sensors 2448, the second motor 2430 is configured to rotate reversely. The slider 2442, that is, the second accessory main body 2402 reciprocates in the left-right direction. Note that the distance at which the left position detection sensor 2448L and the right position detection sensor 2448R are arranged so that the detection piece 2442c provided in the connection slider 2442 is separated in the left-right direction is the reciprocating movement range of the connection slider 2442, that is, the second role. The second accessory body 2402 can reciprocate as a reciprocating range of the object body 2402.

  Next, the movement of the movable accessory unit 2004 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first accessory body of the first movable accessory in the movable accessory unit, and FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first accessory body following FIG. . FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the second movable accessory in the movable accessory unit.

  The first accessory body 2206 of the first movable accessory 2200 in the movable accessory unit 2004 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example moves up and down while swinging by the first accessory drive unit 2208. Can be done. More specifically, the first motor left 2230L and the first motor 2230R of the first accessory driving unit 2208 are used to play a game ball to the accessory winning port 1402 in the accessory winning port unit 1400 by a main control board 1350 described later. When the game ball is detected by the prize winning sensor 1424 (the bonus prize opening 1402 is opened by the winning prize of the gaming ball at the first starting slot 1602). The game ball is controlled when the game ball can be won, and a predetermined time (for example, after the game ball can be received in the game winning port 1402 (can be awarded a game)) The first motor right 2230R is first driven and the right support pin 2240 starts revolving clockwise at a predetermined speed. . Then, when the right support pin 2240 revolves about 90 degrees, the first motor left 2230L is driven, and the left support pin 2240 starts revolving clockwise at a predetermined speed. The 2230R and the first motor left 2230L (left and right support pins 2240) are rotated once and stopped.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107A, in the initial state of the first accessory body 2206, the left and right support pins 2240 of the first accessory drive unit 2208 are both positioned at the lower point. The first accessory body 2006 is substantially horizontal at the lowered position. When the first motor right 2230R is driven and the right support pin 2240 rotates in the clockwise direction, the right support pin 2240 moves on the circumference from the lower point to the upper left direction, and the right support pin 2240 With this revolution, the support hole 2220 of the first accessory body 2206 in which the right support pin 2240 is inserted also moves in the upper left direction. At this time, the left support pin 2240 is positioned at the lower point, and slides in the elongated hole 2222 of the first accessory main body 2206 via the roller 2250, thereby allowing the first accessory main body 2206 to slide. As the revolution of the right support pin 2240 progresses, the right side gradually rises and tilts (see FIG. 107 (A)).

  When the right support pin 2240 revolves about 90 degrees, the drive of the first motor left 2230L is started, and the left support pin 2240 starts revolving in the clockwise direction. When the left support pin 2240 starts to revolve, the left support pin 2240 moves in the upper left direction, and as a result, the entire first accessory body 2206 is tilted (see FIG. 107). (See (c)). As the left and right support pins 2240 revolve, the left side of the first accessory body 2206 rises relatively gradually after the inclination of the first accessory body 2206 whose right side is highly inclined becomes maximum. When the right support pin 2240 revolves about 225 degrees (the left support pin 2240 revolves about 135 degrees), the first accessory body 2206 is substantially horizontal at a position higher than the initial state. (See FIG. 107D).

  Thereafter, when the revolution of the left and right support pins 2240 further proceeds, the right support pin 2240 is relatively lower than the left support pin 2240 and the right side of the first accessory body 2206 is inclined so as to be gradually lowered. (Refer to FIG. 108 (o)), and the inclination of the first accessory body 2206, whose right side is inclined downwardly according to the difference in the height direction of the left and right support pins 2240, becomes maximum and then the inclination becomes gentle. . When the right support pin 2240 makes one rotation and reaches the lower point, the drive of the first motor right 2230R is stopped and the revolution of the right support pin 2240 is stopped (see FIG. 108 (F)). On the other hand, even after the revolution of the right support pin 2240 stops, the revolution of the left support pin 2240 advances, so that the relative height with the right support pin 2240 is reduced, and the inclination of the first accessory body 2206 is tilted. When the left support pin 2240 makes one rotation and reaches the lower point, the drive of the first motor left 2230L stops and the revolution of the left support pin 2240 stops. Thus, the left and right support pins 2240 are positioned at the lower point, and the first accessory body 2206 is in a substantially horizontal state at the lowered position, and stops in an initial state (see FIG. 108 (K)). .

  As described above, the first accessory body 2206 in the first movable accessory 2200 is configured to swing the first accessory body 2206 by sequentially rotating the first motor right 2230R and the first motor left 2230L. The ball can be moved in the vertical direction, and the rolling portion 2210 of the first accessory body 2206 is swung to roll the game ball supplied on the rolling portion 2210 in the horizontal direction. Can be done. When the right support pin 2240 is positioned on the left side with respect to the center of revolution, the entire first accessory body 2206 moves to the left side, and when positioned on the right side with respect to the center of revolution, the entire first accessory body 2206 is on the right side. The first accessory body 2206 can be moved in the vertical direction while being swung, and can also be moved in the left-right direction.

  The first motor right 2230R and the second motor left 2230L in the first movable accessory 2200 accurately control the revolution positions of the left and right support pins 2240 by detecting the rotation positions by the rotation detection sensor 2248, respectively. Be able to.

  On the other hand, the second movable accessory 2400 in the movable accessory unit 2004 has its second accessory main body 2402 always reciprocated in the left-right direction by the second accessory driving unit 2404. More specifically, when the second motor 2430 of the second accessory driving unit 2404 in the second movable accessory 2400 is rotated, the belt 2440 is interposed via the second driving gear 2432, the second driven gear 2434, and the driving pulley 2436. Is driven, and the second accessory main body 2402 can move in the left-right direction at a predetermined speed via a connecting slider 2442 fixed to the belt 2440.

  In the second accessory driving unit 2404, when the connecting slider 2442 is moved to one side in the left-right direction by driving the second motor 2430, the detection piece 2442c protruding between the pair of left-right position detection sensors 2448 detects one left-right position. The second motor 2430 is driven in reverse by the main control board 1350 based on the detection signal of one of the left and right position detection sensors 2448 detected by the sensor 2448, and the connecting slider 2442 moves to the other in the left and right direction. When the connecting slider 2442 moves to the other in the left-right direction, the detection piece 2442c of the connecting slider 2442 is detected by the other left-right position detection sensor 2448, and the main control board 1350 is based on the detection signal of the other left-right position detection sensor 2448. As a result, the second motor 2430 is driven to rotate in the forward direction, and the connecting slider 2442 is again moved in the left-right direction. The separation distance between the pair of left and right position sensors 2448 is the movement width in the left and right direction of the connecting slider (second accessory body 2402). The second accessory main body 2402 reciprocates in the left-right direction via the connecting slider 2442 by repeating the normal rotation and reverse rotation of the second motor 2430.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (a), when the second accessory main body 2402 is positioned at the approximate center in the left-right direction, the arc-shaped side frame portion 2402b of the second accessory main body 2402 is formed on the center frame 1700. The arc-shaped portion 1702, the arc-shaped decorative portion of the front main body member 1406 in the accessory winning award unit 1400, and a part of a substantially concentric circle, are centered on the center of the liquid crystal display device 640. The appearance is such that a plurality of concentric circles are formed.

  Further, when the second accessory main body 2402 moves most to the left end side or the right end side, as shown in FIGS. 109A and 109C, the side frame portion 2402b on the side to which it has moved outwards from the center frame 1700. The arc-shaped portion of the side frame portion 2402b on the side that has been positioned is the arc-shaped portion on the outer periphery of the flange portion 1418 and the arc-shaped decorative portion of the front decoration portion 1420 in the front main body member 1406 of the accessory winning award unit 1400 It is designed to have a continuous appearance. The second accessory main body 2402 has a moving end in the left-right direction, that is, a movable range of the second accessory main body 1402 can be determined by an arc-shaped outer peripheral portion of the flange portion 1418 in the accessory winning prize opening unit 1400. Yes.

[Control configuration by main board and peripheral control board]
A detailed control configuration by the main board 2500 and the peripheral control board 2600 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. 110 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration around the main board in the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 111 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration around the peripheral control board in the pachinko gaming machine. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  The control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is roughly divided into a group of main boards 2500 including a main control board 1350 and a payout control board 1186, and a periphery including a first decoration control board 2050, a second decoration control board 2054, and the like. The control board 2600 is shared. The group of the main board 2500 controls game operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, movable control of the movable accessory unit 2004, etc.), and the group of the peripheral control board 2600 is a production action ( Light emitting decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display, etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 110, the main control board 1350 of the main board 2500 includes a CPU 2502 as a central processing unit, a ROM 2504 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 2506 as a readable / writable memory. The CPU 2502 controls various games performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 2504, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral control board 2600 and the payout control board 1186. . The RAM 2506 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 1350. The main control board 1350 is connected to the power supply board 2530 via the relay terminal board 625 and the payout control board 1186, and the operation power is supplied from the power supply board 2530.

  The input interface of the main control board 1350 includes a passage sensor 1512 that detects a game ball that has passed through the chucker 1510 and a general prize opening sensor 2532 that detects a game ball won in the general prize opening 1520 via the panel relay terminal board 2066. , A first start port sensor 2534 for detecting a game ball that has been won at the first start port 1602, a second start port sensor 1616 for detecting a game ball that has been won at the second start port 1604, and a prize at the prize winning port 1402. A prize winning hole sensor 1424 for detecting a game ball that has been played, a first V inlet sensor 2292 for detecting a game ball that has entered the first V inlet 2002a, and a second that detects a game ball having entered the second V inlet 2002b. The V inlet sensor 2296 and the movable accessory unit 2004 do not enter any of the first V inlet 2002a and the second V inlet 2002b. A lost mouth sensor (first lost mouth sensor 2294 and second lost mouth sensor 2298) for detecting a game ball and an all winning mouth winning number detection sensor 2536 for counting the number of winnings for all winning holes are connected. ing.

  In addition, a rotation detection sensor 2248 for detecting the rotational position of the first motor 2230 in the first accessory driving unit 2208 of the first movable accessory 2200 is connected to the input interface of the main control board 1350 via the panel relay terminal plate 2066. , A storage plate position detection sensor 2310 for detecting the position of the storage plate 2266 in the storage unit 2204 of the first movable accessory 2200, and a left-right position of the connecting slider 2442 in the second accessory drive unit 2404 of the second movable accessory. A left-right position detection sensor 2448, a vibration sensor 2538 that detects unauthorized vibration under a predetermined condition, and a magnetic sensor 2302 that detects unauthorized magnetism are connected.

  Furthermore, the input interface of the main control board 1350 has an operation sensor 2510 for detecting an operation state of the operation handle portion 461 operated by a player for driving a game ball into the game area 605 via the relay terminal board 625. A body frame opening switch 2512 for detecting the opening state of the body frame 3 and a door frame opening switch 2514 for detecting the opening state of the door frame 5 are also connected.

  On the other hand, the output interface of the main control board 1352 includes a start opening solenoid 1612 that drives a pair of movable pieces 1606 that change the winning probability to the second start opening 1604 via the panel relay terminal board 2066, and a prize winning opening. A winning combination solenoid 1408 that opens and closes a pair of movable pieces 1404 that opens and closes 1402, and a receiving range of game balls that are arranged outside the pair of movable pieces 1404 that open and close the winning combination winning openings 1402. A prize winning port sub-solenoid 1412 that drives a pair of secondary movable pieces 1410 that can change the first movable body 2200, a first motor 2230 of a first accessory drive unit 2208 that drives a first accessory body 2206, A storage plate solenoid 2304 for driving a storage plate 2266 in the storage unit 2204 of the first movable combination 2200, a second movable combination The second motor 2430 of the second accessory drive unit 2404 that drives the second accessory body 2402 of 400 and the peripheral control board 2600 are connected so that a drive signal can be output from the main control board 1350. It has become.

  Further, a special indicator 1500 attached to the front board 1550 in the main body is connected to the output interface of the main control board 1350 via the panel relay terminal board 2066, and the first special symbol display of the special indicator 1500 is connected. 1532, first special symbol hold indicator 1534, normal symbol indicator 1536, normal symbol hold indicator 1538, second special symbol indicator 1540, second special symbol hold indicator 1542, round indicator 1544, etc. Can be output. Further, the fraud warning indicator 2005 is connected to the output interface of the main control board 1350 via the panel relay terminal board 2066, and a drive signal is generated based on detection signals from the vibration sensor 2538 and the magnetic sensor 2302. It is output.

  The prize winning port sensor 1424, the prize winning port solenoid 1408, and the prize winning port sub-solenoid 1412 are further connected to the panel relay terminal plate 2066 via a bonus winning port relay terminal plate 1428. . In addition, the first motor 2230, the rotation detection sensor 2248, the first V inlet sensor 2292, the first lose mouth sensor 2294, the second V inlet sensor 2296, the second lose mouth sensor 2298, the storage plate solenoid 2304, and the storage plate position sensor 2310. The storage ball sensor 2312 and the magnetic sensor 2302 are further connected to the panel relay terminal plate 2066 via a first movable accessory relay terminal plate 2320.

  The second motor 2430 and the left / right position detection sensor 2448 are further connected to the panel relay terminal plate 2066 via the second movable accessory relay terminal plate 2060. The special indicator 1500 on the front left side member 1500L side has a left special indicator relay terminal plate 2062 between the special indicator 1500 and the panel relay terminal plate 2066, and the special indicator 1500 on the front right side member 1500R side has a panel relay terminal plate 2066. The right special indicator relay terminal plate 2064 is connected to each other.

  Further, the first motor 2230 and the second motor 2430 are stepping motors having an encoder for detecting a rotational position therein, and are feedback-controlled with the main control board 1350 during rotation driving. The rotational position can be controlled with high accuracy.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 1186 includes a CPU 2518 as a central processing unit, a ROM 2520 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 2522 as a readable / writable memory. The payout control board 1186 processes the command signal input from the main board 1350 and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 and the firing motor 695 connected to the firing control board 2524. Accordingly, the payout motor 815 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch motor 695 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  The payout control board 1186 is connected to a ball break switch 778 that detects that there are no more game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720. Based on the detection of the ball break switch 778, the player In addition, the ball side is notified to the hall side (hall computer). The payout control board 1186 is connected to a full tank switch 916 for detecting that the game ball stored in the storage unit 381 of the dish unit 300 is full. Based on this, a notification that “please take out the game ball from the storage unit 381” is made.

  In addition, bi-directional communication is performed between the main control board 1350 and the payout control board 1186 via the respective input / output interfaces. An ACK signal is returned from the control board 1186 to the main control board 1350.

  Further, an external terminal board 2526 is connected to the payout control board 1186, and the state of entering the starting port 1602, 1606, the V inlet 2002, etc., the fluctuation state of the normal symbol / special symbol, the special lottery result and the normal lottery result Various information such as a gaming state based on each lottery result such as a result and detection of fraud is output to a hall computer or the like provided in the gaming facility.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111, the peripheral control board 2600 has electronic components such as a CPU 2602, a ROM 2604, a RAM 2606, and the like, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components. . In addition, the peripheral control board 2600 is provided with a ROM 2608 that stores a sound source that is the basis of voice and music, and a sound source IC 2610 that outputs the sound and music according to the production content based on the sound source stored in the ROM 2608. It has been. Note that communication is performed in only one direction between the input / output interface and the input interface between the main control board 1350 and the peripheral control board 2600, and the main control board 1350 and the peripheral control board 2600. Even if a command is sent to, the reverse is not done. The peripheral control board 2600 is also supplied with operating power from the power supply board 2530 via the main control board 1350.

  Note that either the first decoration control board 2050 and the second decoration control board 2054 constituting the peripheral control board 2600 may be provided with the CPU 2602 or the sound source IC 2610, or only one of them may be provided with the CPU 2602 or the sound source IC 2610. You may do it.

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected to a liquid crystal display control board 2612 that controls display of effect images on the liquid crystal display device 640. A liquid crystal display device 640 is connected to the liquid crystal display control board 2612, the command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 2600 is processed by the liquid crystal display control board 2612, and a drive signal is output to the liquid crystal display device 640. To do. More specifically, the liquid crystal display control board 2612 includes a CPU 2614, a RAM 2616, a ROM 2618, a VDP 2620, and an image ROM 2622.

  The CPU 2614 of the liquid crystal display control board 2612 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 2600 via the input / output interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command to control the VDP 2620. The RAM 2616 provides a work area for the CPU 2614 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 2618 holds a program for the CPU 2614 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 2620 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 640. A register is provided in the VDP 2620, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 2620, setting information of various display functions, and the like. The CPU 2614 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode in the liquid crystal display device 640 can be changed variously. The image ROM 2622 is a nonvolatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display designs, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 2600 and the liquid crystal display control board 2612 with each input / output interface. The liquid crystal display control board 2612 is also supplied with operating power from the power supply board 2530 via the peripheral control board 2600 and the main control board 1350.

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected to a door frame decoration lamp 2624 provided in the door frame 5 and a speaker 163 via a frame decoration relay terminal plate 290. From the peripheral control board 2600, these lamps are connected. A drive signal is output to the speaker 163 and the like.

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected with a storage ball detection sensor 2312 for detecting a game ball stored on the storage plate 2264. In addition to receiving a detection signal from the storage ball detection sensor 2312, a frame Via the decorative relay terminal plate 290, operation buttons 330 including three push buttons 330a, 330b, and 330c (the symbols are in order from the left) arranged on the front surface of the door frame 5 are connected, and each push button 330a. , 330b and 330c are input.

  Further, the peripheral control board 2600 is arranged in the main body portion 1502 of the front side member 1500, and the LED is mounted on the rear surface thereof so that the movable accessory unit 2004 is decorated with light emission via the rear side member 2120 and the rear side member 2120. Rear substrate 1552, upper extending portion inner substrate 1554 for emitting and decorating the upper side of the front side member 1500, lower extending portion inner substrate 1556 for emitting and decorating the lower side of the front side member 1500, and rear side member for emitting and decorating the rear side member 2120 A decoration board 2128, a background decoration board 2142 for illuminating and decorating the background decoration board 2140, and a logo decoration board 2162 for illuminating and decorating the logo decoration member 2160 are connected, and an LED provided on each board is output by outputting a drive signal. It can be turned on, blinking, and turned off with a predetermined emission color.

  Further, the peripheral control board 2600 includes a start opening unit decoration board 2630 that decorates the start opening unit 1600 with light emission, an accessory winning opening decoration board 2632 that emits and decorates the accessory winning prize opening unit 1400, and a first movable accessory decoration relay terminal. An under-shelf substrate 2284 that mainly illuminates and decorates the first accessory body 2206 is connected via the plate 2322, and the LED provided on each substrate is turned on / flashed in a predetermined emission color by outputting a drive signal. It can be turned off.

[Game contents]
The game contents in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 77 and FIGS. 109 to 114. FIG. 112 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration on the main control board, and FIG. 113 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration on the peripheral control board. FIG. 114 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to the display of the fraud warning display on the main control board. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control side reset process, and FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control side timer interrupt process. Further, FIG. 117 is a sequence flowchart showing the movement of the prize winning opening and the movable accessory unit related to the start winning and the operation of various effects, and FIG. 118 is an example of various effect images in the start winning process or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows. FIG. 119 is a sequence flowchart showing a game process related to the continuous opening effect.

  First, a functional configuration related to game effect control on the main control board 1350 will be described with reference to FIG. 112 and the like. Note that a functional configuration relating to payout of game balls will be omitted. In the main control board 1350 of this example, the CPU 2502 executes a predetermined program stored in advance in the ROM 2504 with a periodic timer interrupt every 4 milliseconds (ms), thereby realizing various game controls and performance controls. It is like that. When a game ball detection signal is input from the passage sensor 1512, the main control board 1350 corresponds to a normal random number generator 2550 that generates a predetermined normal random number and a normal random number generated by the normal random number generator 2550. Normal symbol variation pattern selecting means 2552 for selecting a normal symbol variation pattern from a predetermined ordinary symbol variation pattern table stored in the ROM 2504, and normal symbol retention means for temporarily storing and retaining the selected normal symbol variation pattern 2554.

  The normal symbol holding means 2554 described above receives a predetermined number (for example, four) of the normal symbol variation pattern selected by the detection signal of the game ball from the passage sensor 1512 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1536 as a variation. And the number of holds is displayed on the normal symbol hold indicator 1538, and the execution of the stored normal symbol variation pattern is suspended until the normal symbol can be changed. When the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (normal random number) held by the normal symbol holding means 2554 is executed, after the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1536 is variably displayed based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (normal random number). When the stop-displayed normal symbol is “normal hit”, the start-port solenoid 1612 is driven to expand the pair of movable pieces 1606, and the winning probability of the game ball to the second start-up port 1604 is increased. It is supposed to be.

  The main control board 1350 also has first special random number generation means 2556 that generates a predetermined first special random number based on a detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 2534 by a start winning to the first start port 1602. And a first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the first special random number generated by the first special random number generator 2556 from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in the ROM 2504 in advance. Selection means 2558 and first special symbol hold means 2560 for temporarily storing and holding the first special symbol change pattern selected by the first special symbol change pattern selection means 2558 are provided. The first special symbol holding means 2560 starts the first start port 1602 when the first special symbol display unit 1532 cannot newly display the first special symbol such as the first special symbol being changed. The first special symbol variation pattern selected by the detection signal of the game ball from the first start port sensor 2534 by winning is stored as a predetermined number (for example, four) and held, and the reserved number is set as the first special number. While displaying on the symbol hold | maintain display 1534, the execution of the memorize | stored 1st special symbol variation pattern is suspended until the variation display of a 1st special symbol is attained. Then, when the first special symbol variation pattern (first special random number) reserved by the first special symbol retention means 2560 is executed, the first special symbol indicator 1532 of the first special symbol display unit 1532 One special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped to indicate either “first jackpot” or “big jackpot”.

  Further, the second special random number generator 2562 that generates a predetermined second special random number on the main control board 1350 based on the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 1616 by the start winning to the second start port 1604. And a second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special random number generated by the second special random number generator 2562 from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in the ROM 2504 in advance. Selection means 2564 and second special symbol hold storage means 2566 for temporarily storing and holding the second special symbol change pattern selected by the second special symbol change pattern selection means 2564 are provided. The second special symbol holding means 2566 starts to the second starting port 1604 when the second special symbol cannot be displayed in the second special symbol indicator 1540 such that the second special symbol is variably displayed. The second special symbol variation pattern selected by the detection signal of the game ball from the second start port sensor 1616 by winning is stored as a predetermined number (for example, four) and held, and the reserved number is stored as the second special number. While displaying on the symbol hold display 1542, the execution of the stored second special symbol variation pattern is suspended until the variation display of the second special symbol becomes possible. Then, when the second special symbol variation pattern (second special random number) held by the second special symbol variation means 2566 is executed, the second special symbol display 1540 of the second special symbol variation pattern 1540 is used. After the two special symbols are variably displayed, they are stopped and displayed to indicate "second jackpot", "big hit", or the like.

  The first special symbol variation pattern and the second special symbol variation pattern retained by the first special symbol retaining unit 2560 and the second special symbol retaining unit 2566 described above include “first small hit” and “second small hit”. In addition to “big hit”, the number of opening and closing of the movable piece 1404 that opens and closes the winning prize winning opening 1402 at the time of “first big hit” and “second small hit”, 1 special symbol and second special symbol change time etc. are included, and various information contained in these first special symbol change pattern and second special symbol change pattern will be described later as a lottery result by starting winning prize It is used for selection of effects such as movements of the pieces 1404, the first accessory body 2206, the storage plate 2266, etc., and effects images and effects sounds by the liquid crystal display device 640, the speakers 163, and the like.

  The main control board 1350 receives a detection ball from the first V inlet sensor 2292 or the second V inlet sensor 2296 when a game ball wins the first V inlet 2002a or the second V inlet 2002b, If the first special random number (first special symbol variation pattern) or the second special random number (second special symbol variation pattern) due to the start winning at the starting port 1602 or the second starting port 1604 indicates “big hit”, “big hit” An advantageous gaming state generating means 2568 for generating a special advantageous gaming state that gives a special benefit to a player such as a game, and the generation of a special advantageous gaming state by the advantageous gaming state generating means 2568, or the first start port A first special random number (first special symbol variation pattern) or a second special random number (second special symbol variation pattern) according to a start winning of a game ball at 1602 or the second starting port 1604 Suggests “first small hit” or “second small hit”, it is possible to open and close the movable piece 1404 by driving the prize winning hole solenoid 1408 to allow the game ball to be received in the prize winning hole 1402. And a prize winning opening / closing control means 2570.

  Further, the main control board 1350 is input with a control signal that allows at least the winning award winning opening / closing control means 2570 to drive the winning award winning opening solenoid 1408 so that a game ball can be received in the winning award winning opening 1402. In response to this, a first accessory drive control means 2572 for driving the first motor 2230 of the first movable accessory 2200 to drive the first accessory body 2206 is provided. As shown in the figure, the first accessory drive control means 2572 feedback-controls the first motor 2230 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 2248 that can detect the rotation position of the first motor 2230. Thus, the rotation of the first motor 2230, that is, the movement of the first accessory body 2206 is controlled to be always constant. Further, the rotation detection sensor 2248 can return the rotation position of the first motor 2230 to the origin.

  Further, the first special symbol variation pattern and the second special symbol variation executed by the cancellation of the retention condition are held on the main control board 1350 by the first special symbol holding unit 2560 and the second special symbol holding unit 2566. The pattern, the number of holds held by the first special symbol holding means 2560 and the second special symbol holding means 2566, the first special symbol holding means 2560 at the end of the special advantageous gaming state generated by the advantageous gaming state generating means 2568, On the basis of the holding status in the second special symbol holding means 2566, etc., there is further provided a holding effect control means 2573 that opens and closes the movable piece 1406 in the prize winning unit 1400 in a predetermined manner as a holding effect.

  Further, when a control signal enabling driving of the prize winning solenoid 1408 by the prize winning opening / closing control means 2570 by the prize winning opening opening / closing control means 2570 and allowing the game ball to be received into the prize winning opening 1402 is input to the main control board 1350. , A predetermined release waiting time (in this embodiment, it is set to 10 seconds, and at least the game ball received by the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1404 of the prize winning unit 1400 is temporarily stored in the storage shelf 2264. After the elapse of time, the storage plate solenoid 2304 is driven regardless of whether or not the game balls are stored in the storage shelf 2264 of the storage unit 2204. After the storage plate 2266 of the storage unit 2204 is moved from the raised state to the lowered state, the storage plate 2266 moves from the lowered state to the raised state. And a storage control unit 2574 that. This storage control means 2574 is preset by a control signal that allows the winning award winning opening solenoid 1408 to be driven by the winning award opening opening / closing control means 2570 and allows the game balls to be received in the winning award winning opening 1402. When the discharge waiting time has elapsed, the second V of the second accessory main body 2402 connected to the connection slider 2442 that is repeatedly reciprocated in the left-right direction at a constant speed by the second accessory drive control means 2575 described later. When the position of the entrance 2002b is a position corresponding to the second V-entrance catching portion 2268 provided in the storage unit 2204 in the first movable accessory 2200, the storage plate 2266 is lowered from the raised state. When there is a game ball stored in the storage shelf 2264, the stored game ball is released from the storage shelf 2264 and moved to the first position. Through the second V inlet 2002 of the character object body 2402 it is captured by the second V ball entrance acquisition unit 2268. As a result, the game ball captured by the second V-entrance capturing unit 2268 is detected by the second V-entrance sensor 2296, and this is used as an opportunity to give a special benefit to the player by the advantageous game state generating means 2568. The special advantageous gaming state to be granted will occur. When this special advantageous gaming state is completed, the storage control means 2574 makes a transition from a state where the storage plate 2266 is lowered to a state where it is raised. On the other hand, the storage control means 2574 is predetermined by receiving a control signal that enables the winning of a prize winning hole solenoid 1408 to be received by the winning prize winning opening 1402 by the winning prize opening / closing control means 2570. When the discharge waiting time has elapsed, the second of the second accessory main body 2402 connected to the connecting slider 2442 that is repeatedly reciprocated at a constant speed in the left-right direction by the second accessory drive control means 2575 described later. When the position of the V inlet 2002b is not a position corresponding to the second V-entry ball capturing section 2268 provided in the storage unit 2204 in the first movable accessory 2200, the storage plate 2266 is lowered from the raised state Then, the storage plate 2266 is returned from the lowered state to the raised state. When there is a game ball stored in the storage shelf 2264 when the storage plate 2266 is shifted from the raised state to the lowered state, the stored game ball is released from the storage shelf 2264 and the second combination. It is captured by the second lost ball capturing portion 2270 of the main body 2402. Thereby, the game ball captured by the second lose ball capturing unit 2270 is detected by the second lose mouth sensor 2298, discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and guided to a ball circulation device of a pachinko island facility (not shown). Is done. After the storage control unit 2574 shifts from the state in which the storage plate 2266 is raised to the state in which the storage plate 2266 is lowered, the storage plate 2266 moves from the state in which the storage plate 2266 is lowered.

  The main control board 1350 moves the second accessory body 2402 in the left-right direction at a constant speed (in this embodiment, based on the detection signal from the left-right position detection sensor 2448 provided in the second accessory drive unit 2404. The second slider drive control means for controlling the second motor 2430 of the second accessory drive unit 2404 that is always reciprocated by the time of one reciprocating movement of the connecting slider 2442 is set to 4 seconds. 2575 is further provided. When the second accessory drive control means 2575 drives the second motor 2430 to move the connecting slider 2442 from the right to the left, the detection piece 2442c provided on the connecting slider 2442 is moved to the left end position. When the detection signal is detected by the left position detection sensor 2448L provided, the detection signal is input, the position of the connecting slider 2442, that is, the position of the second accessory main body 2402 is grasped at the left end position, and the second motor 2430 is operated. By driving in reverse, the connecting slider 2442 starts moving from the left to the right. When the second accessory drive control means 2575 drives the second motor 2430 to move the connecting slider 2442 from the left to the right, the detection piece 2442c provided to the connecting slider 2442 is provided at the right end position. When the detection signal is detected by the right position detection sensor 2448R, the detection signal is input, the position of the connecting slider 2442, that is, the position of the second accessory main body 2402 is grasped at the right end position, and the second motor 2430 is reversed. By driving, the connection slider 2442 starts moving again from the right to the left. As described above, the second accessory body 2402 connected to the connection slider 2442 repeatedly reciprocates within a reciprocating movement range that is a distance at which the left position detection sensor 2448L and the right position detection sensor 2448R are arranged.

  In addition, the main control board 1350 includes a normal symbol variation pattern, a first symbol variation pattern, a second symbol variation pattern, and detection signals from the sensors according to the ordinary random number, the first special random number, and the second special random number, Predetermined on the basis of a control signal from the prize winning opening / closing control means 2570, the first accessory drive control means 2572, the advantageous game state generation means 2568, the hold effect control means 2573, the second accessory drive control means 2575, etc. A command transmission means 2576 for generating a command for control and transmitting the command to the peripheral control board 2600 is further provided. These control commands are composed of a status having an information amount of 1 byte and a mode having an information amount of 1 byte, and have a storage capacity of 2 bytes. For example, a detection signal 2442c provided on the connecting slider 2442 is detected by a left position detection sensor 2448L arranged at the left end position in a control signal input to the command transmission unit 2576 from the second accessory drive control unit 2575. There is a control signal for indicating that the detection piece 2442c provided in the connecting slider 2442 is detected by the right position detection sensor 2448R disposed at the right end position. When a control signal indicating that the detection piece 2442c has been detected by the left position detection sensor 2448L is input, the command transmission unit 2576 receives a left movement completion command (status: 65H (“H” represents a hexadecimal number), Mode: 01H) is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600, and when a control signal indicating that the detection piece 2442c is detected by the right position detection sensor 2448R is input, a right movement completion command (status: 65H ( “H” represents a hexadecimal number.), Mode: 02H) is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control board 1350 includes an abnormality determination unit 2578 for determining whether an abnormality such as an illegal act has occurred based on detection signals from the vibration sensor 2538 and the magnetic sensor 2302. Further, a game stop means 2580 for urgently stopping the game when the abnormality determination means 2578 determines that an abnormality has occurred is further provided. In this abnormality determination means 2578, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2302 is always received, and the detection signal from the vibration sensor 2538 is received in response to the detection signal of the game ball from the prize winning sensor 1424. It has become.

  Further, when it is determined by the abnormality determination means 2578 that an abnormality has occurred, the cheating warning indicator 2005 comprising an LED emits light in a predetermined manner. It is possible to determine which sensor has detected an abnormality.

  In the abnormality determination means 2578, a predetermined threshold is set for the detection signal from the vibration sensor 2538 or the magnetic sensor 2302, and an abnormality occurs depending on whether or not the detection signal exceeds the predetermined threshold. Is determined.

  If the abnormality determination unit 2578 determines that an abnormality has occurred, the command transmission unit 2576 transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 2600 and the abnormality determination unit 2578 determines that an abnormality has occurred. When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred a plurality of times during a predetermined time or a predetermined time, a predetermined warning image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 and, at the same time, a door decoration lamp 2624 described later flashes red. As a result, a player or an attendant of a game hall is made aware of the occurrence of a visual abnormality (injustice), and a predetermined warning sound (siren, warning voice, etc.) is emitted from the speaker 163. So that it can be recognized audibly.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control board 2600 includes a command receiving means 2650 for receiving a control command transmitted from the main control board 1350, and a second accessory body 2402 based on the command received by the command receiving means 2650. Based on the command received by the command receiving unit 2650 and the movable accessory abnormality determination control unit 2653 that performs abnormality determination such as whether or not the movement of the coupled slider 2442 to be coupled has occurred, the ROM 2604 stores the command. Based on the effect pattern selection means 2652 for selecting the effect pattern, the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means 2652, etc., the rear substrate 1552 in the main body, the upper extension inner substrate 1554, the lower extension inner substrate 1556, the rear side Member decoration board 2128, background decoration board 2142, logo decoration board 2162, start port By controlling the light emission drive of the LEDs provided on the knitted decorative board 2630, the accessory prize winning board decorative board 2632, the under-shelf board 2284, etc., the light emitting effect is performed by the light emitting decorative body 2004 or the movable accessory abnormality determination control means 2653. When it is determined that there is a problem with the movement of the connection slider 2442, the movement of the connection slider 2442 is caused by controlling the light emission drive of the LEDs mounted as the group L0 to group L7 on the logo decoration board 2162. The light emission effect control means 2654 for notifying the store clerk or the like of the presence of the event, and the effect display control means for displaying a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal display device 640 based on the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means 2652 2656 and the production pattern selected by the production pattern selection means 2652, etc. And drives the speaker 163 and a, a sound effect control means 2658 for controlling sound effects by such predetermined music and sound effects.

  Further, the peripheral control board 2600 acquires special symbol hold information such as the presence / absence of the special symbol and the number of holds based on the status and mode constituting the control command transmitted from the main control board 1350. Special symbol hold information acquisition means 2660, an accessory prize opening opening information acquisition means 2662 for acquiring opening information of the prize winning opening 1402 by opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1404, and a left / right position detection sensor in the second accessory driving unit 2404 A second accessory main body position information acquisition unit 2666 for acquiring a movement position of the second accessory main body 2402 by 2448, and playing a game on the storage shelf 2264 of the storage unit 2204 based on a detection signal from the storage ball detection sensor 2312. A storage information acquisition unit 2664 for acquiring storage information as to whether or not the ball is in a stored state is further provided.

  Further, the peripheral control board 2600 has a hold effect control means 2573 on the main control board 1350 based on the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means 2652 and the hold information acquired by the special symbol hold information acquisition means 2660. The prize winning opening opening control means 2668 for controlling the winning prize opening opening effect comprising the effect image and the production sound corresponding to the controlled holding effect, and the holding information and the role acquired by the special symbol holding information acquisition means 2660. On the basis of the opening information acquired by the item winning opening opening information acquisition unit 2662, the winning combination opening opening effect continuation unit 2670 for continuing (extending) the winning combination opening opening effect control unit 2668 by the accessory winning opening opening effect control unit 2668. And further.

  Further, on the peripheral control board 2600, the storage plate 2266 is lowered based on the control commands (status and mode) transmitted from the main control board 1350 and the storage information acquired by the storage information acquisition means 2664. The remaining time calculation control means 2655 for calculating the remaining time, the remaining time calculated by the remaining time calculation control means, and the position information of the second accessory body acquired by the second accessory body position information acquisition means 2666 Based on the opening effect changing means 2673 for selecting and changing the effect mode (for example, the opening effect table) of the opening effect comprising the predetermined effect image and the effect sound, and the opening effect selected and changed by the opening effect changing means 2674. Opening effect control means 2672 for controlling the opening effect according to the effect mode. Here, effect pattern selection means 2652, movable accessory abnormality determination control means 2653, light emission effect control means 2654, remaining time calculation control means 2655, effect display control means 2656, storage information acquisition control means 2664, and second accessory body position The information acquisition unit 2666 and the like are performed in a 16 ms steady process in a peripheral control side reset process described later.

  For example, the effect display control means 2656 performs a display command for displaying a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal display device 640 based on the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means 2652 which is performed every 16 ms in the 16 ms steady process. It is generated and transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 640. Further, for example, the movable accessory abnormality determination control means 2653 is performed every 16 ms in the 16 ms steady process, and extracts the left movement completion command or the right movement completion command from the command received by the command reception means 2650. For example, a left movement completion command is extracted and a timer is started to set a predetermined period (in this embodiment, it is set to 5 s. This set time is at least the movement of the connecting slider 2442, that is, the second accessory body. In a state in which the movement of 2402 is not difficult, the reciprocating range of the second accessory body 2402 is equal to or longer than the time spent by the second accessory body 2402 on the forward path or the time spent on the return path. The left movement completion command is extracted again from the command received by the command receiving means 2650, or the right movement completion command is extracted from the command received by the command receiving means 2650 within a predetermined period by, for example, extracting the right movement completion command and starting the timer. Or extract the left movement completion command and start the timer within a predetermined period, for example The right movement completion command is not included in the command received by the communication means 2650, or, for example, the right movement completion command is extracted and the timer is started, and the command received by the command reception means 2650 within a predetermined period is set to the left movement completion command. Is not included, it is determined that some abnormality has occurred in the movement of the connecting slider 2442, and in order to notify the store clerk or the like to that effect, the light emitting effect control means 2654 is informed with the logo decoration board 2162. To control the light emission drive of the LEDs mounted as group L0. Based on the command, the light emission effect control means 2654 emits the LEDs mounted on the logo decoration board 2162 as the group L0, so that the letter “P” of “Pink LADY” emits light. At this time, if the command received by the command receiving means 2650 does not include a command for notifying the abnormality of the first V inlet sensor 2292, the light emission effect control means 2654 turns off the LEDs mounted as the group L1 on the logo decoration board 2162. If the command received by the command receiving means 2650 does not include a command for notifying the abnormality of the second V inlet sensor 2296, the light emission effect control means 2654 turns off the LEDs mounted as the group L2 on the logo decoration board 2162. If the command received by the command receiving means 2650 does not include any other command that reports abnormality, the LEDs mounted on the logo decoration board 2162 as the group L3 to the group L7 are turned off to display “Pink LADY”. "I", Letter "N", the character "K", the letter "L", the letter "A", the character "D" and the letter "Y" is a state of off. As a result, only the letter “P” of “Pink LADY” emits light. At this time, the CPU 2602 of the peripheral control board 2600 turns on the door frame decoration lamp 2624 provided on the door frame 5 so that the hall clerk or the like is not near the pachinko gaming machine 1. The movement of the connecting slider 2442 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, the movement of the second accessory main body connected to the connecting slider 2442 is easily notified to the player.

  As described above, the second slider 2442 is connected to the second slider main body 2402 due to a failure in the second accessory driving unit 2404 including the second motor 2430, the second driven gear 2434, and the like. When the movement of the second accessory body 2402 becomes difficult to move, or the second accessory body 2402 is prevented from moving by using an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a wire, an illegal act is performed to fix the position of the second accessory body 2402. In this case, the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L and the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R arranged at both ends of the reciprocation range of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402 are the main control board. 1350 is no longer input. For example, after the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L is input to the main control board 1350, the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R is not input, or the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R is received. The detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L may not be input after being input. In this state, the main control board 1350 can generate a left movement completion command based on the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L and transmit it to the peripheral control board 2600, but the right position detection sensor 2448R. Since no detection signal is input, the right movement completion command cannot be generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600 indefinitely, or the right movement is completed based on the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R. Even if the command can be generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600, since the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L is not input, the left movement completion command is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600 indefinitely. May not be possible. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 2600 cannot receive the right movement completion command within a predetermined period after receiving the left movement completion command, or within a predetermined period after receiving the right movement completion command. When it is not possible to receive the left movement completion command, it is determined that the movement of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402 is difficult to move, and this is notified to the clerk of the hall. In order to notify, the light emitting effect control means 2654 is instructed to control the light emission driving of the LEDs mounted as the group L0 on the logo decoration board 2162. Accordingly, the fact that there is a problem in the movement of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402 or the movement of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402 is hindered by an illegal act. It is possible to notify hall clerk.

  In addition, the second motor 2430 and the second follower are located at the positions of the left position detection sensor 2448L and the right position detection sensor 2448R arranged at both ends of the reciprocating range of the connection slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402. When a trouble occurs in the second accessory driving unit 2404 including the gear 2434 and the like, and it becomes difficult to move the connecting slider 2442 in the reciprocating movement range of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory main body 2402, or In the case where an improper act of preventing the movement of the second accessory main body 2402 and fixing the position of the second accessory main body 2402 using an improper tool such as a piano wire or a wire is detected from the left position detection sensor 2448L. A signal or a detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R is always input to the main control board 1350. In this state, the main control board 1350 generates a left movement completion command based on the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L and transmits it to the peripheral control board 2600, and then again from the left position detection sensor 2448L. Since the left movement completion command is generated based on the detection signal and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600, that is, the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R is not input, the right movement completion command is generated indefinitely. If it becomes impossible to transmit to the control board 2600, or if a right movement completion command is generated based on the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600, then the right position detection sensor 2448R again. A right movement completion command is generated based on the detection signal from the peripheral control board 2 To send to 00, that is because the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L is not input, or can no longer be transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600 indefinitely to generate the left movement completion command even after. Thereby, the peripheral control board 2600 receives again the left movement completion command within a predetermined period after receiving the left movement completion command, or again within a predetermined period after receiving the right movement completion command. When receiving the right movement completion command, in order to determine that the movement of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402 is difficult to move, and to notify the clerk of the hall to that effect The light emission effect control means 2654 is instructed to control the light emission drive of the LEDs mounted as the group L0 on the logo decoration board 2162. The second slider main body 2402 is connected to the second accessory main body 2402 at the positions of the left position detection sensor 2448L and the right position detection sensor 2448R arranged at both ends of the reciprocating movement range of the connection slider 2442 connected to the second accessory main body 2402. When the movement of the connection slider 2442 becomes difficult to move, the connection slider connected to the second accessory body 2402 in a state where the movement of the connection slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402 is not difficult to move. In the reciprocating movement range of 2442, the peripheral control board 2600 has a left movement completion command or a right movement completion command within a time much shorter than the time spent by the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory main body 2402 on the forward path or the return path. Will be received repeatedly. Therefore, the movement of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402 is hindered by an improper act in a short time after the movement of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402 occurs. Therefore, it is possible to notify the hall clerk and the like that the movement of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402 is difficult to move in a short time.

  Further, the LEDs mounted as the group L0 to the group L7 on the logo decoration board 2162 are assigned in advance for each type of malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in addition to being assigned to emit light according to various effects. For example, the LED mounted as the group L0 on the logo decoration board 2162 emits light when notifying that the movement of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402 is difficult to move, and the logo decoration board. The LED mounted as the group L1 in 2162 emits light when notifying that the first V inlet sensor 2292 is abnormal, and the LED mounted as the group L2 on the logo decoration board 2162 is the second V inlet sensor 2296. Or light is emitted when notifying that it is abnormal. As described above, the light emitting function of the LEDs mounted as the group L0 to the group L7 on the logo decoration board 2162, the function of emitting light according to various effects, and various problems (various abnormalities) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are emitted and notified You can switch to the function you want. Normally, the sales clerk in the hall in operation is in the form of each person in charge looking at an island within a predetermined range for the purpose of providing services such as exchange of dollar boxes at the time of a big hit and looking around fraudulent acts. Therefore, it is desirable to have a configuration in which, for example, a notification is given for about 5 minutes, or a reset is performed when the power is turned on and off so that the store clerk can confirm.

  In the 16 ms steady process in the peripheral control side reset process, which will be described later, the second accessory body position information acquisition unit 2666 that is performed every 16 ms extracts the left movement completion command or the right movement completion command from the command received by the command reception unit 2650. To do. When the second accessory main body position information acquisition unit 2666 extracts, for example, a left movement completion command, the second motor is a 16 ms steady process in the peripheral control side reset process during the movement of the connecting slider 2442 from the left direction to the right direction. Based on the progress of the schedule data defining the driving pattern 2430, the position of the connection slider 2442, that is, the position of the second accessory body 2402 connected to the connection slider 2442 can be grasped. On the other hand, for example, when a right movement completion command is extracted, schedule data that defines the drive pattern of the second motor 2430 is obtained in the 16 ms steady process in the peripheral control side reset process while the connection slider 2442 is moving from the right direction to the left direction. Based on the progress, the position of the connecting slider 2442, that is, the position of the second accessory main body 2402 connected to the connecting slider 2442 can be grasped.

  As described above, the movable accessory abnormality determination control means 2312 determines whether or not the movement of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory main body 2402 is defective, and the left movement completion command and the right movement completion are completed. Commands are used. On the other hand, the second accessory main body position information acquisition unit 2666 uses the left movement completion command and the right movement completion command in order to grasp the position of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory main body 2402. . The contents of the left movement completion command and the right movement completion command that are transmitted to the movable accessory abnormality determination control means 2312 are different from the contents that are transmitted to the second accessory body position information acquisition means 2666. That is, the left movement completion command and the right movement completion command in the present embodiment are configured as multi-function commands in which the contents to be transmitted are switched.

  Next, the peripheral control side reset process and the peripheral control side timer interrupt process of the peripheral control board 2600 will be described. First, when the peripheral control side reset process is started, the CPU 2602 of the peripheral control board 2600 performs an initial setting process as shown in FIG. 115 (step S100). This initial setting processing includes processing for initializing the CPU 2602 of the peripheral control board 2600, processing for setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. Note that interrupts are prohibited during the initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is a value 1 (step S102). This 16 ms elapsed flag T is a flag for measuring 16 ms in peripheral control side timer interrupt processing processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and is set to a value of 1 when 16 ms have elapsed and a value of 0 when 16 ms has not elapsed. . When the 16 ms elapsed flag T has a value of 1 in step S102, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms elapsed flag is set to 0 (step S104), and the 16 ms in-process flag P is set to 1 (step S106). The 16 ms processing flag P is set to a value of 1 when starting 16 ms steady processing, which will be described later, and a value of 0 when ending. Subsequently, a 16 ms steady process is performed (step S108). The 16 ms steady process includes a command analysis process for analyzing a command output from the main control board 1350, an effect pattern selection means 2652 shown in FIG. 113, a movable accessory abnormality determination control means 2653 shown in FIG. 113, the light emission effect control means 2654 shown in FIG. 113, the effect display control means 2656 shown in FIG. 113, the stored information acquisition means 2664 shown in FIG. 113, and the second accessory main body one information acquisition means 2666 shown in FIG. , 16 ms motor scheduler activation processing for setting schedule data defining the drive pattern of the first motor 2230 and the second motor 2430, the rear substrate in the main body 1552, the substrate in the upper extension 1554, the substrate in the lower extension 1556, the rear Side member decorative board 2128, background decorative board 2142, logo decorative board 2162, start-up unit Monitors whether serial output processing for transmitting light emission data to the LED and door frame decoration lamp 2624 provided on the decoration board 2630, the prize winning board decoration board 2632, the under-shelf board 2284, etc., and the 16 ms steady-state processing are performed. Performs watchdog timer processing. Subsequently, the 16 ms processing flag P is set to a value 0 (end of 16 ms steady processing) (step S110), and the process returns to step S102 again, and every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T becomes 1, ie, every 16 ms elapses. Steps S104 to S110 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not 1 (ie, 0) in step S102, that is, when 16 ms has not elapsed, the determination in step S102 is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T becomes 1, ie, 16 ms has elapsed. Repeat.

  Next, when the peripheral control timer interrupt process is started, the CPU 2602 of the peripheral control board 2600 performs the 2 ms timer interrupt process (step S120) as shown in FIG. 116, and then the value 1 is added to the 2 ms update counter UC. Are added (step S122). The 2 ms update counter UC is a counter that counts the number of times this timer interrupt process has been performed. A value 1 of the 2 ms update counter UC corresponds to a time of 2 ms. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the 2 ms update counter UC has a value of 8, that is, 16 ms (= 2 ms update counter UC × 2 ms) (step S124). If 16 ms, the value 1 is set to the 16 ms elapsed flag T (step S126), the 16 ms processing flag P is 0, that is, the 16 ms steady process of step S108 in the peripheral control side reset process shown in FIG. 115 is performed. It is determined whether or not. When the 16 ms processing flag P is 0, that is, when 16 ms steady processing is not being performed, the work area is backed up (step S130), and this routine is terminated. In this work area backup, information processed in the 16 ms steady process of step S108 in the peripheral control side reset process shown in FIG. 115 is copied to a copy area provided in the work area. On the other hand, if 16 ms has not elapsed in step S124 or if no information is set during the 16 ms steady process in step S128, this routine is terminated as it is.

  Then, the game content in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment having the above-described functional configuration will be specifically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the storage unit 381 of the dish unit 300 is transparent when the player rotates the operation handle unit 461 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game ball is started by being driven into the upper part of the game area 605 disposed on the front surface of the game panel 599. The game ball that is driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the left side or the right side of the prize winning unit 1400 and the center frame 1700 depending on the strength of the game. Note that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461, and the game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 599 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  A game ball flowing down the side surface side of the center frame 1700 extends from approximately the center in the vertical direction of the front side member 1500 to the center side in the left and right direction, and a game area between the main body 1502 of the front side member 1500 and the side surface of the center frame 1700 When it passes through the chucker 1510 arranged in 605 and is detected by the passage sensor 1512, the main control board 1350 acquires a normal random number as a result of the normal lottery based on the detection signal. Then, based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1536 in the special symbol display 1530 is displayed in a variable manner (two LEDs are alternately lit and blinking), and for a predetermined time (for example, between 15 seconds and 30 seconds). ) A normal symbol based on a normal random number (ordinary lottery result) acquired after the elapse is stopped (any LED is lit). The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the ordinary random number.

  Specifically, when the acquired normal random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped (only one LED of the normal symbol display 1536 is lit), and the acquired normal random number is “normal”. In the case of a “lost” random number, a stop symbol is displayed with a normal symbol indicating a loss (only one of the other LEDs of the normal symbol indicator 1536 is lit). When a normal symbol suggesting a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 1606 upright to the left and right of the second start port 1604 are reversed in a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds). The game ball is expanded so that the winning probability of the game ball to the second start port 1604 can be increased.

  By the way, in this example, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the passing sensor 1512 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1536 while the normal symbol is changing, the normal symbol that is changing is stopped and the normal random number acquired earlier is displayed. Until the result is confirmed, the ordinary random number (including the ordinary symbol variation pattern) acquired based on the detection signal from the passage sensor 1512 is temporarily stored and the display is suspended. The number of ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of reserves) is displayed on a normal symbol hold display 1538. This normal symbol hold display 1538 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the number of memories by combining the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four Memorize and display. In addition, when the number of storage exceeds four, the normal random number acquired based on the detection signal of the passage sensor 1512 is discarded.

  When the game ball that has flowed down the side surface of the center frame 1700 wins a general winning opening 1520 arranged below the chucker 1510 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2532, the main control board is based on the detection signal. In 1350, a predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 1186, and the payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 in accordance with the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of games. The ball is paid out to the storage unit 381.

  On the other hand, the game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 and have flowed downward from the center frame 1700 win the first start ports 1602 disposed at the left and right ends of the start port unit 1600 and receive the first start port sensor 2534. The main control board 1350 transmits a predetermined payout command to the payout control board 1186 based on the detection signal, and the payout control board 1186 sends the payout motor of the prize ball unit 800 in response to the payout command. By controlling 815, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the storage unit 381. Further, when the game ball wins the second start port 1604 disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the start port unit 1600 and is detected by the second start port sensor 1616, the main control board 1350 is based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 1186, and the payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the award ball unit 800 in accordance with the payout command, so that a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are received. The storage unit 381 is paid out.

  When a game ball is won at the first start port 1602 or the second start port 1604 and detected by the first start port sensor 2534 or the second start port sensor 1616, the main control board 1350 is based on the detection signal. Then, a predetermined first special random number as the first special lottery result and a predetermined second special random number as the second special lottery result are acquired. Based on the acquired first special random number or second special random number, the first special symbol variation pattern selection unit 2558 or the second special symbol variation pattern selection unit 2564 performs a predetermined first special symbol variation pattern or second special symbol. The variation pattern is selected, and the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1532 and the second special symbol display unit 1540 in the special display unit 1530 according to the selected variation pattern. After the display is started, the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the acquired first special random number and the second special random number are stopped and displayed as the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. It has become.

  As the first special lottery result by the start winning at the first starting port 1602, either “first small hit” or “big hit” is drawn at a predetermined probability (for example, “ The first lottery lottery probability is 299/300, and the “big hit” lottery probability is 1/300). When the “first small hit” is drawn, the pair of movable pieces 1404 for closing the prize winning port 1402 in the prize winning unit 1400 and the sub movable piece 1410 outside the predetermined period (for example, 0) (5 seconds to 5 seconds), the game ball can be won once at the prize winning port 1402 by moving. In addition, when a “hit” is drawn, a special advantageous game in which the pair of movable pieces 1404 for closing the prize winning port 1402 in the prize winning unit 1400 and the sub movable piece 1410 outside thereof are movable in a predetermined pattern. A state (eg, a “hit” game) is generated.

  On the other hand, as the second special lottery result by the start winning at the second starting port 1604, either “second small hit” or “big hit” is lottery with a predetermined probability (for example, The lottery probability of “first big hit” is 299/300, and the lottery probability of “big hit” is 1/300). When the “second small hit” is drawn, the pair of movable pieces 1404 for closing the prize winning port 1402 in the prize winning unit 1400 and the sub movable piece 1410 outside the predetermined period (for example, 0) (5 seconds to 5 seconds), the movable opening / closing operation is performed twice, and the winning of the game ball to the prize winning port 1402 becomes possible twice. If the “second small hit” is drawn by the start winning at the second starting opening 1604, the chance to win the winning combination winning prize is higher than the “first small winning” at the first starting opening 1602. It has become. In addition, when a “hit” is drawn, a special advantageous game in which the pair of movable pieces 1404 for closing the prize winning port 1402 in the prize winning unit 1400 and the sub movable piece 1410 outside thereof are movable in a predetermined pattern. A state (eg, a “hit” game) is generated.

  By the way, when a game ball is won at the first start port 1602 and the second start port 1604, the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the first special symbol display 1532 and the second special symbol display 1540. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol cannot be variably displayed during the display or during the “big hit” game as the special advantageous gaming state, the game ball is transferred to the first starting port 1602 and the second starting port 1604. When a winning ball is detected by the first start port sensor 2534 and the second start port sensor 1616, until the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed, the first start port The first special random number or the second special random number acquired based on the detection signal from the sensor 2534 or the second start port sensor 1616 is stored and the display is suspended, and the stored first special random number is stored. Or The number of double special random numbers, and displays in the first special symbol reservation display 1534 and the second special symbol reservation display 1542. The first special symbol hold indicator 1534 and the second special symbol hold indicator 1542 are each composed of two LEDs, and the number of memories (holding number) depends on the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four of each is memorized and displayed. When the number of memories exceeds four, the acquired first special random number or second special random number is discarded. Further, the liquid crystal display device 640 also displays the number of each hold.

  Then, when the game ball is won when the prize winning port 1402 is open and is detected by the bonus prize sensor 1424, the winning ball is received from the prize ball unit 800 based on a payout command from the main control board 1350. A predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls is paid out to the storage unit 381 for one game ball that has won a prize.

  Next, with reference to the flow of the game balls that have won the winning prize winning opening 1402, the movement of the first accessory main body 2206, the storage unit 2204, etc., various effect images, effect sounds, etc. are mainly shown in FIGS. The description will be given with reference. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, in the normal time when it is not the start winning prize or the “big hit” gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG. Music, sound effects, and the like that are displayed on the display device 640 and correspond to the normal effect image are emitted from the speaker 163 as normal effect sound. First, when the holding condition in the first special symbol holding means 2560 and the second special symbol holding means 2566 is canceled in the normal gaming state except the time when the “big hit” game is finished, first, in step S1001. , It is determined whether or not the total number of holds held by the first special symbol holding means 2560 and the second special symbol holding means 2566 is a predetermined number (for example, four) or more, and the holding number is the predetermined number or more. Otherwise, the process proceeds to the next step S1002, where the movable piece 1404 is opened or closed once or twice according to the number of times of opening and closing of the movable piece 1404 related to the start winning that has been released from the hold, and the accessory prize winning opening 1402 is opened. In the open state, the first opening effect is started in the subsequent step S1003. The control in step S1002 and step S1003 is performed by the holding effect control means 2573 on the main control board 1350.

  The first opening effect in step S1003 is acquired by the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means 2652 of the peripheral control board 2600 by the predetermined control command transmitted from the main control board 1350 and the special symbol hold information acquisition means 2660. Based on the stored hold information, it is selected and controlled by the prize winning opening opening effect control means 2668 from the prize winning opening opening effect effect table stored in advance, for example, as shown in FIG. 118 (b). As described above, the first opening effect image in which the character C runs in comparison with the normal effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640, and music different from the music used for the normal effect sound or music with a fast tempo. Is emitted from the speaker 163 as the first opening effect sound, and the player receives a prize for the game ball in the prize winning port 1402 And it is capable to recognize that a capability.

  If the game ball does not win the prize winning port 1402 while the prize winning slot 1402 is ready for winning (step S1004) (NO in step S1005), the process jumps to step S1006. Loss production is performed and the process related to one start winning prize is completed. For example, the loss effect in step S1006 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 such that the tail C1 falls on the head of the character C shown in FIG. 118C, and the character C hits the character C1. The collision sound is emitted from the speaker 163 as production sound, and the player can recognize that the game ball has not won the prize winning opening 1402.

  On the other hand, until the closing time when the prize winning opening 1402 cannot be won elapses (step S1004), the game ball wins (enters) the prize winning prize opening 1402 (when YES in step S1005). Then, the process proceeds to step S1007, the first motor 2230 is driven, and the first accessory body 2206 starts moving up and down while swinging like a seesaw (see FIGS. 107 and 108), and the following steps The second opening effect is started by S1008. The second opening effect in step S1008 is based on the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means 2652 on the peripheral control board 2600 and the hold information acquired by the special symbol hold information acquisition means 2660. It is selected and controlled from the opening effect table by the prize winning opening opening control means 2668. For example, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), the character C runs at a faster speed than the first opening effect image. The second opening effect image (running large) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640, and music and sound effects that are more uptempo than the first opening effect are emitted from the speaker 163 as the second opening effect sound. The game attracts the player's interest in the winning game balls.

  By the way, the game ball that has won the prize winning slot 1402 is sent to the second bonus body 2402 of the movable accessory unit 2004 disposed below the bonus prize winning unit 1400 and behind the gaming panel 599. It has become. The second accessory main body 2402 in the movable accessory unit 2004 is always reciprocated in the left-right direction by the second accessory driving unit 2404 (see FIG. 109), and the entry position of the game ball into the accessory winning hole 1402 In addition, depending on the position of the second accessory body 2402 in the left-right direction, a game ball that has won a prize winning port 1402 can be viewed from either side of the winning ball outlet 2412 arranged on the left and right sides of the second accessory body 2402. The player can be excited by whether it is released or not. In addition, since the second accessory body 2402 always reciprocates in the left-right direction, the movement position of the second accessory body 2402 and the timing at which the accessory winning prize opening 1402 is opened are estimated. The game ball is driven so as to be aimed at the prize winning port 1402 so that the game ball is discharged from the winning ball discharge port 2412 to the first bonus body 2206, so that the game ball can be operated. It has become.

  The game balls that have won the prize winning port 1402 have a guide part 1426 that discharges to the second accessory body 2402 side, a winning ball receiving part 2406 of the second accessory body 2402, a vertical guide path 2408, and the like. Since it is invisible from the side, even if the second actor main body 2402 is located at the approximate center in the left-right direction, until the game ball is guided from the vertical guide path 2408 to the horizontal guide path 2410, It is impossible to recognize which side of the left and right winning ball outlets 2412 is allocated, and the game ball that has won a prize winning port 1402 is assigned to which side of the winning ball outlet 2412. Can be entertained.

  Then, the game ball that has won the winning combination winning port 1402 is discharged from the winning ball releasing port 2412 on either the left or right side of the second accessory main body 2402 to the rolling portion 2210 of the first accessory main body 2206. However, as described above, in the first accessory body 2206, the game ball wins the bonus winning prize 1402 that is released by the starting prize to the first starting opening 1602 or the second starting opening 1604 and wins the winning combination. When detected by the mouth sensor 1424 (YES in step S1005), the two first motors 2230 of the first accessory driving unit 2208 are driven, and the first accessory body 2206 moves up and down while swinging like a seesaw. The game ball is supplied to the rolling portion 2210 of the movable first accessory body 2206 (see FIGS. 107 and 108).

  That is, generally, the game ball released from the winning ball discharge port 2412 of the second accessory body 2402 that reciprocates in the left-right direction is supplied to a higher side than the center of the first accessory body 2206 in the left-right direction. Then, the probability of entering the first V entrance 2002a arranged in the center increases, and conversely, when the power is supplied to the lower side, the probability of entering the first V entrance 2002a decreases. However, depending on the movable state of the first accessory main body 2206 and the timing at which the game ball is supplied, the probability of entering the first V inlet 2002a may become low immediately after being supplied to the higher side. In some cases, the probability of entering the first V inlet 2002a may increase immediately even if supplied to the lower side.

  The winning ball discharge port 2412 of the second accessory main body 2402 is a croon, and the game ball is released after rotating around the winning ball discharge port 2412. Is not released immediately from the winning ball outlet 2412, but is released after staying at the winning ball outlet 2412 to some extent, so that the position and inclination of the first accessory body 2206 change moment by moment, It is possible to entertain and entertain the player with respect to the release of the game ball from the ball discharge port 2412.

  When the game ball released from the winning ball discharge port 2412 of the second accessory main body 2402 is supplied to the rolling portion 2210 of the first accessory main body 2206, the supplied game ball is low. It will roll in the direction. When the game ball supplied to the rolling part 2210 is guided rearward by the groove part 2210a depending on the supply position, the rolling speed, the movable state of the first accessory body 2206, etc., two first discharge ports 2212 or the first V inlet 2002a. When a game ball is received at the first V entrance 2002a, the game ball is released downward from the rear portion of the center of the first accessory body 2206 in the left-right direction. After being captured, it is detected by the first V entrance sensor 2292 (YES in step S1009), thereby confirming that the first V entrance 2002a has entered the ball from the process related to the start winning prize to the process related to the "big hit" game. After the second opening effect is stopped, a special advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game) is generated in which the prize winning opening 1402 can be awarded in a predetermined pattern.

  On the other hand, depending on the position of the game ball supplied to the rolling unit 2210, the speed of the game ball that rolls on the rolling unit 2210, and the like, the game ball is inserted into the groove 2210a disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction of the rolling unit 2210. If the ball is not guided, the game balls are released from the second discharge portions 2214 disposed at the left and right ends of the rolling portion 2210 and are captured by the first lose ball capture portion 2262 disposed below the second discharge portion 2214. Then, it is detected by the first lose mouth sensor 2294 (YES in step S1010), becomes a dead ball and is discharged to the outside of the game board 4, and jumps to step S1006 to perform the above-described lose effect. After that, the processing related to the start winning prize ends.

  By the way, when the game ball guided to the rear side by the groove 2210a of the rolling part 2210 in the first accessory body 2206 enters the first discharge port 2212 and is released below the first accessory body 2206. Thus, the water is supplied onto the storage shelf 2264 of the storage unit 2204 disposed below the first discharge port 2212. The storage plate 2266 arranged at the front end of the storage shelf 2264 is moved to the prize winning port 1402 by moving the movable piece 1406 in the prize winning unit 1400 by starting winning to the first starting port 1602 or the second starting port 1604. When the game ball can be received, the storage plate solenoid 2304 is driven by the main control board 1350 and is positioned in the raised position until a predetermined opening time (for example, 5 to 30 seconds) elapses. The game balls supplied to the storage rack 2264 are blocked by the raised storage plate 2266 and stored on the storage rack 2264.

  The game balls stored in the storage shelf 2264 are detected by the storage ball detection sensor 2312 disposed on the lower side of the storage shelf 2264 (YES in step S1011), so that the storage of the game balls is detected. Then, the process proceeds to step S1012, and an opening effect described later is performed. On the other hand, if storage is not detected by storage ball detection sensor 2312 (NO in step S1011), the process returns to step S1009, and any one of first V inlet sensor 2292, first lose mouth sensor 2294, and storage ball detection sensor 2312 is returned. Until a game ball is detected by the sensor, a loop between step S1009 and step S1011 is performed.

  Although illustration is omitted, if the above-described steps S1009 to S1011 are continuously looped for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that a ball clogging has occurred and the game is stopped, and a notification that the ball clogging has occurred is notified. Is reported from the liquid crystal display device 640 and the speaker 163.

  When the game ball stored on the storage shelf 2264 is detected by the storage ball detection sensor 2312 in step S1011, a predetermined release effect is selected in step S1012 and the release effect selected in the subsequent step S1013 is started. This opening effect is performed by the peripheral control board 2600 and the liquid crystal display control board 2612 that controls the display of the effect image based on the command signal from the peripheral control board 2600. When the above-described predetermined discharge standby time has elapsed, the storage plate solenoid 2304 is driven by the storage control means 2574 of the main control board 1350 so that the storage plate 2266 is lowered. Based on the control command from the main control board 1350, the peripheral control board 2600 receives the received command as an opportunity for the first start opening 1602 or the second start opening 1604 to receive a prize winning opening 1402. When a command that indicates that a game ball can be won is included, the storage plate solenoid 2304 is driven by the storage control means 2574 of the main control board 1350, starting from this point in time, and the storage board 2266 The remaining time until the predetermined release standby time for which is lowered is elapsed is calculated by the remaining time calculation control means 2655. Based on the control command from the main control board 1350, the peripheral control board 2600 detects the received command by the left position detection sensor 2448L in which the detection piece 2442c provided in the connection slider 2442 is arranged at the left end position. A command (6501H) for notifying that the detection has been performed, and a command (6502H) for indicating that the detection piece 2442c provided in the connection slider 2442 is detected by the right position detection sensor 2448R are included. At this time, the timer is reset, the timer is started again, and the current position of the connecting slider 2442 that reciprocates in the reciprocating range described above is determined by counting the timer up. 2666 is specified. Then, the peripheral control board 2600 reciprocates the reciprocating movement range based on the remaining time calculated by the remaining time calculation control unit 2655 and the current position of the connecting slider 2442 specified by the second accessory main body position information acquisition unit 2666. The current position of the moving connecting slider 2442 is the position of the second V inlet 2002b of the second accessory body 2402 connected to the connecting slider 2442, and the second V inlet provided in the storage unit 2204 in the first movable accessory 2200. The estimated time for detecting the gaming ball captured by the second V entrance capturing unit 2268 by the second V entrance sensor 2296 is calculated by matching the position corresponding to the ball capturing unit 2268, and this calculation is performed. An opening effect table corresponding to the expected time of transition to the special advantageous gaming state corresponding to the scheduled detection time is selected, and the selected opening effect table is selected. To change the Le in the open effect change means 2674. The peripheral control board 2600 performs the opening effect by controlling the light emission effect control means 2654, the sound effect control means 2658, and the effect display control means 2656 by the opening effect control means 2672 in accordance with the selected and changed opening effect table. The effect control means 2658 emits an open effect sound from the speaker 163, and the light emission effect control means 2658 emits LEDs provided on the respective substrates 1552, 1554, 1556, 2128, 2142, 2162, 2630, 2632, 2284 with a predetermined light emission color. Is turned on / flashed / turned off, and the effect display control means 2656 displays an open effect image on the liquid crystal display device 640.

  As the opening effect, “the number decreases at intervals of about 1 second so that the time when the storage plate 2266 descends is“ 0 ”seconds”, “the time when the storage plate 2266 descends, , Substantially the same as the end (termination) of a specific phrase or the like of a predetermined music ”,“ when the storage plate 2266 descends, a character to be displayed is determined in a series of actions (for example, choreography such as dance) "When the storage plate 2266 descends, it almost coincides with the end of a phrase consisting of a predetermined phrase", "The period of light emission and pronunciation is delayed toward the time when the storage plate 2266 descends." "What will or will be faster" is prepared in advance.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 118 (e), an effect image and effect sound in which the character C dances with a predetermined choreography while singing a specific phrase in a predetermined music, as shown in FIG. 118 (e). As a specific phrase, for example, the phrase “Oh, I ’m tired of the man of the earth, ah” is used, and the phrase “Ah” is the end of the specific phrase. There are prepared in advance a plurality of different specific phrase start parts (for example, the total time length is 8 types in 1 second increments from 1 second to 8 seconds). Then, from the opening effect in which the length of these times is prepared, the stored ball detection is performed so that the portion of “ah” that is the end of the specific phrase is substantially the same as the timing when the opening time ends (elapses). Based on the storage timing detected by the sensor 2312 and a predetermined opening time, an opening effect with an optimal length is selected, and the storage timing at which the storage of the game ball is detected by the storage ball detection sensor 2312 and the left-right position detection Based on the movement position of the second accessory body 2402 by the sensor 2448, if it is determined that the game ball stored at the time of the opening time elapses is likely to enter the second V receiving port 2002b, the above It changes to the opening production | presentation table which consists of music and a specific phrase which are different from, and an opening production | generation is selected. That is, when there is a high possibility that the stored game ball enters the second V entrance, an opening effect different from the normal opening effect is performed, and for example, a specific phrase is changed. This makes it possible for players to recognize that there is a high possibility of a “big hit” and to enhance their interest.

  Then, after the predetermined opening time has elapsed after the predetermined opening effect is started in step S1013 (YES in step S1014), the storage plate 2266 descends and is stored at approximately the same time when the opening effect ends. The game ball is released (step S1015), and the game ball is discharged from the front end of the storage shelf 2264 to the upper portion of the lower frame portion 2402c having the second V inlet 2002b in the front second main body 2402.

  As described above, since the second accessory main body 2402 always reciprocates in the left-right direction, the second V inlet 2002b disposed in front of the storage shelf 2264 also reciprocates in the left-right direction, When the center of the shelf 2264 in the left-right direction and the second V inlet 2002b substantially coincide with each other, when a game ball is released / released from the storage shelf 2264, the game ball enters the second V inlet 2002b ( (See FIG. 109). When a game ball enters the second V entrance 2002b, the game ball is captured by the second V entrance capture portion 2268 disposed below the second V entrance 2002b and detected by the second V entrance sensor 2296 (in step S1016). YES), the game ball entering the second V entrance 2002b is confirmed, and the process related to the start winning game is switched to the process related to the “hit” game, and the bonus winning port 1402 can be awarded in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game) is generated.

  Accordingly, when the second V inlet 2002b that reciprocates in the left-right direction and the storage shelf 2264 that stores game balls substantially coincide with each other, the storage plate 2266 descends and the game balls stored in the storage shelf 2264 are transferred from the storage shelf 2264. The player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not it is released, and at the same time, when a game ball is released from the storage shelf 2264, a predetermined countdown effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. The countdown effect further increases the player's excitement by raising the player's sense of expectation for the V-entry.

  Even if the game ball cannot enter the first V inlet 2002a in the first accessory body 2206, if the game ball is distributed to the first discharge port 2212 side, it is supplied to the storage shelf 2264. Since the opportunity to enter the second V entrance 2002b can be obtained, it is possible to hold the expectation for the V entry twice with one game ball, making the player more enjoyable In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  On the other hand, when the game ball released / released from the storage shelf 2264 does not enter the second V inlet 2002b (NO in step S1016), that is, the second lose mouth arranged on the left and right of the second V inlet 2002b. 2414 is received by the second lost ball capturing unit 2270 disposed on the rear side of the second V incoming ball capturing unit 2268, and then detected by the second lost mouth sensor 2298 (YES in step S1017) to be a dead ball. As a result, the game board 4 is discharged to the outside and the process proceeds to step S1006 to perform the above-described lose effect, and the process related to the start winning is completed.

  If a game ball is not detected by the second lose mouth sensor 2298 (NO in step S1017), the process returns to step S1016, and the released game ball is detected by the second V inlet sensor 2296 or the second lose mouth sensor 2298. A loop is made between step S1016 and step S1017 until any one is detected, and illustration is omitted. A guidance for notifying the occurrence of a clogged ball is notified from the liquid crystal display device 640 and the speaker 163 while stopping the game.

  In this example, the main control board 1350 wins the prize winning opening 1402 and the number of game balls detected by the prize winning prize sensor 1424, the first V inlet sensor 2292, and the second V inlet sensor 2296. The number of game balls detected by the first lose mouth sensor 2294 and the second lose mouth sensor 2298 is collated, and if the number of game balls does not match as a result of the collation, a prize is awarded. It is determined that ball clogging has occurred in the mouth unit 1400 or the movable accessory unit 2004, and a notification to that effect is made.

  On the other hand, in step S1001 in FIG. 117, if the total number of holds held by the first special symbol hold means 2560 and the second special symbol hold means 2566 is a predetermined number (for example, four) or more, a “hold chance” Then, the process proceeds to step S1018, and the hold effect control means 2573 counts the open / close count K of the movable piece 1404 held by the first special symbol hold means 2560 and the second special symbol hold means 2566. For example, if the number of starting winnings held at the first starting port 1602 is three and the number of starting winnings held at the second starting port 1604 is one, K = 3 × 1 + 1 × 2 = 5. Then, after calculating the continuous opening / closing frequency K of the movable piece 1404 in step S1018, in the subsequent step S1019, the first motor 2230 is driven to start continuous driving of the first accessory body 2206, and swings like a seesaw. However, the first accessory main body 2206 that moves up and down is continuously moved.

  Then, in step S1020 following step S1019, a continuous opening effect is started. This continuous opening effect includes the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means 2652 of the peripheral control board 2600 by the predetermined control command transmitted from the main control board 1350 and the hold information acquired by the special symbol hold information acquisition means 2660. Based on the above, it is selected and controlled by the winning combination winning opening opening effect control means 2668 from the previously stored winning winning opening opening effect control table 2668. For example, as shown in FIG. An effect image substantially similar to the second opening effect image in which C runs greatly is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 as a continuous opening effect image, and relatively up-tempo music is emitted from the speaker 163 as continuous opening effect sound, The player can recognize that the prize winning opening 1402 is continuously opened and closed.

  Subsequently, in step S1021, the movable piece 1404 is driven once to open the prize winning port 1402 for a predetermined time (during a single opening / closing time). And proceeds to step S1023. If a game ball is not detected by the first V inlet sensor 2292 in step S1023, the process proceeds to step S1024. If a game ball is not detected by the second V inlet sensor 2296 in step S1024, the process further proceeds to step S1025. If there is no game ball start prize at the first start port 1602 in S1025, the process proceeds to the next step S1026, and if there is no game ball start prize at the second start port 1604 in step S1026, the process further proceeds to step S1027. In step S1027, if the predetermined one opening / closing time has not elapsed, the process returns to the previous step S1023.

  Then, in step S1023 or step S1024, when a game ball is detected by the first V inlet sensor 2292 or the second V inlet sensor 2296, the holding chance is ended, and the process is switched to the process related to the “hit” game, A special advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game) is generated in which the prize winning port 1402 can be awarded in a predetermined pattern.

  If there is a start winning at the first start port 1602 in step S1025, the process proceeds to step S1028, 1 is added to the previous K value, and the process proceeds to step S1027. If there is a start prize at the second start port in step S1026, the process proceeds to step S1029, 2 is added to the previous K value, and the process proceeds to step S1027. In other words, if there is a start prize during the “holding chance”, the number of opening and closing of the movable piece 1404 corresponding to the starting opening is added, and the “holding chance” is extended and further to the V inlet 2002. The possibility of a game ball entering is increased, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  The processing in steps S1023 to S1029 is looped until one opening / closing time elapses in step S1027. When the opening / closing time elapses, the movable piece 1404 is moved and the accessory winning award 1402 is opened. The game is in a state where no winning is possible, and the process proceeds to the next step S1030. In this step S1030, it is determined whether or not the value of K is 0. If the value of K is not 0, the process returns to step S1021, and the prize winning port 1402 is again in a state where it can be won. That is, until the value of K becomes 0, the process loops between step S1021 to step S1030, and the prize winning port 1402 can be continuously awarded K times, and during that time, the performance is continuously performed. The outing has been done for a long time.

  In step S1030, if the value of K is 0, the process proceeds to step S1031, the continuous driving of the first accessory body 2206 is stopped, and then the process proceeds to step S1006, where the loss effect is performed and the holding chance is reached. That is, the processing related to is terminated. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, when the number of reserves related to the start winning becomes equal to or larger than the predetermined number, the movable piece 1404 can be continuously opened and closed to continuously win the prize winning port 1402. It has a “holding chance” and can enhance the interest of the player.

  Note that, in the “holding chance” from step S1018 to step S1031, the storage plate 2266 in the storage unit 2204 is always lowered, so that the game ball is not stored.

  By the way, in the “big hit” game described above, the main control board 1350 opens and closes the pair of movable pieces 1404 of the prize winning unit 1400 and raises the sub movable piece 1410 outside thereof. When a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins a prize winning port 1402, the movable piece is satisfied. A pattern for stopping the opening / closing operation of 1404 and the sub movable piece 1410 (one pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times. The number of rounds in this “big hit” game is determined by the first special lottery result (first special random number) or the second special lottery result ( 2nd special random number), the first special symbol indicating the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result or the second special symbol is the first special symbol indicator 1532 or the second special random number. The number of rounds selected is displayed on the round display 1544 at the same time as being displayed on the two special symbol display 1540.

  In addition, when starting winning prizes to the first starting opening 1602 and the second starting opening 1604 and the winning combination winning opening 1402 can be won, the above-mentioned round number is displayed on the round indicator 1544, so that a larger number of rounds is displayed. As a result, a sense of expectation for entering the V entrance 2002 can be enhanced, and the player can enter the game ball aiming at the prize winning port 1402 in order to enter the V. Can be further enhanced.

  By the way, in this example, three types of rounds of 3 rounds (3R), 8 rounds (8R), and 15 rounds (15R) are prepared as the number of rounds. A special advantageous gaming state is generated.

  Further, during the “hit” game, the main control board 1350 causes the first V inlet sensor 2292 and the second V inlet sensor 2296 of the first V inlet 2002a and the second V inlet 2002b in the movable accessory unit 2004 to be V It does not function as an entrance sensor, and even if a game ball enters the V entrance 2002 during a “hit” game, it does not become a “hit”. During the “hit” game, the first V entrance sensor 2292 and the second V entrance sensor 2296 function as a lose mouth sensor, and the number of game balls won in the winning feature winning opening 1402; It is used to check the number of game balls discharged from the movable accessory unit 2004. Further, during the “hit” game, the storage plate 2266 is in a lowered state, whereas the first accessory body 2206 of the first movable accessory 2200 moves up and down while continuously swinging. So that the movement of the first accessory body 2206 can be enjoyed and the movement of the game ball rolling on the rolling part 2210 of the first accessory body 2206 can be enjoyed. It has become.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, after the “big hit” game is over, if the processing related to the start winning prize is held by the first special symbol holding means 2560 or the second special symbol holding means 2566, The opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1404 related to the start winning, which is held continuously with the game, is continuously opened and closed, and the effect display control means 2656 and the sound effect control means 2658 are used for the opening effect image and the performance that are continuous with the “big hit” game. A continuous opening effect is provided to guide the player to the sound output. The game processing (continuous opening effect) by holding after the “big hit” game will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  First, when the “big hit” game process is finished in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the start winning is held by the first special symbol holding means 2560 or the second special symbol holding means 2566, and the starting win is held. If not, the normal game process is performed without performing the continuous opening effect. On the other hand, if the start winning is held, the process proceeds to the next step S1102, and the continuous opening effect (for example, “encore chance”) substantially the same as the “holding chance” described above is started. In this step S1102, after the total number K of opening and closing of the movable piece 1404 held by the first special symbol holding means 2560 and the second special symbol holding means 2566 is totaled by the holding effect control means 2573, in the next step S1103, The first motor 2230 is driven to start continuous driving of the first accessory body 2206, and following the “big hit” game, the first accessory body 2206 moves up and down while swinging like a seesaw continuously. To be done.

  In step S1104 following step S1103, the continuous opening effect is started. This continuous opening effect is substantially the same as the effect (for example, the final round effect) guided by the liquid crystal display device 640 and the speaker 163 during the final round in the “big hit” game. For example, if a final round effect consisting of a production image and production sound in which a plurality of characters call “encore” together with applause is guided in the final round of the “big hit” game, a continuous opening production that is substantially the same as the final round production. However, based on the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means 2652 of the peripheral control board 2600 by the predetermined control command transmitted from the main control board 1350 and the hold information acquired by the special symbol hold information acquisition means 2660. The prize winning opening opening control means 2668 is selected from the prize winning opening opening production table stored in advance and controlled. This continuous opening effect allows the player to feel that the “hit” game is still continuing, and to recognize that the prize winning opening 1402 still opens and closes. .

  Subsequently, in step S1105, the movable piece 1404 is driven once to open the prize winning port 1402 for a predetermined time (during a single opening and closing time), and in the next step 1106, the value K is set to 1 from the previous K value. Is subtracted and the process proceeds to step S1107. If a game ball is not detected by the first V inlet sensor 2292 in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108. If a game ball is not detected by the second V inlet sensor 2296 in step S1108, the process further proceeds to step S1109. In S1109, if there is no game ball start winning in the first start port 1602, the process proceeds to the next step S1110, and if there is no game ball start winning in the second start port 1604 in this step S1110, the process further proceeds to step S1111. If a predetermined opening / closing time has not elapsed in step S1111, the process returns to step S1107.

  When a game ball is detected by the first V inlet sensor 2292 or the second V inlet sensor 2296 in step S1107 or step S1108, the continuous opening effect is ended, and the process is switched to the process related to the “hit” game. Then, the special winning game state (“big hit” game) is generated in which the prize winning port 1402 can win in a predetermined pattern.

  If there is a start winning at the first start port 1602 in step S1109, the process proceeds to step S1112 where 1 is added to the previous K value and the process proceeds to step S1111. If there is a start prize at the second start port in step S1110, the process proceeds to step S1113, 2 is added to the previous K value, and the process proceeds to step S1111. That is, if there is a start prize during the continuous opening effect, the open / close count of the movable piece 1404 corresponding to the start opening is added, and the continuous opening effect is extended, and the game ball is further moved to the V entrance 2002. The possibility of entering the ball is increased, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  The processing from step S1107 to step S1113 loops until one opening / closing time elapses in step S1111. When the opening / closing time elapses, the movable piece 1404 is moved and the accessory prize winning opening 1402 is opened. The winning state becomes impossible and the process proceeds to the next step S1114. In this step S1114, it is determined whether or not the value of K is 0. If the value of K is not 0, the process returns to step S1105, and the prize winning port 1402 is again in a state where it can be won. That is, until the value of K becomes 0, the process loops between step S1105 and step S1113, and the prize winning opening 1402 can be awarded K times consecutively, and during that time, the performance continues. The outing has been done for a long time.

  In step S1114, if the value of K is 0, the process proceeds to step S1115, the continuous driving of the first accessory body 2206 is stopped, and then the process proceeds to step S1116, where the continuous opening effect is stopped and continued. The process related to the opening effect (“encore chance”) ends. During the continuous opening effect, the storage plate 2266 in the storage unit 2204 is always in a lowered state, so that the game ball is not stored.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, if a game ball starts and wins to the 1st starting port 1602 or the 2nd starting port 1604, according to the acquired 1st special random number or 2nd special random number (1st special lottery result or 2nd In addition to the special display 1530 first special symbol display 1532 and the second special symbol display 1540 variably displayed according to the special lottery result, the liquid crystal display device 640 also includes the first special random number (first special symbol display). The lottery effect image according to the lottery result) and the second special random number (second special lottery result) can be displayed. Specifically, on the liquid crystal display device 640, the display of variation of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols are displayed (for example, three rows), and then sequentially stopped. When all the symbol sequences are finally stopped and displayed, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed is displayed. In addition, since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first special symbol display 1532 and the second special symbol display 1540, the player generally uses the liquid crystal display device 640. Pay attention to the displayed symbol.

  In addition, if the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 does not win any of the general prize opening 1520, the first start opening 1602, the second start opening 1604, and the prize winning opening 1402, the game area 605 Is provided at the lower end of the center in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 606 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins any of the general winning port 1520, the first starting port 1602, the second starting port 1604, and the accessory winning port 1402, the winning game ball is returned to the gaming area 605. Without being detected by the all winning opening winning number detection sensor 2536, the game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear side.

  Further, in this example, when an object that generates a magnetic force such as a magnet is brought close to the V inlet 2000 and detected by the magnetic sensor 2302, an anomaly is performed in the abnormality determination unit 2578 of the main control board 1350. It is determined that the game is stopped, the game is stopped, and the cheating warning indicator 2005 is lit to issue a warning. Further, in the main control board 1350, until the game ball is won and discharged to the outside of the movable accessory unit 2004 after the game ball wins the first starting port 1602 and is opened. When the detection signal from the vibration sensor 2538 can be received and the vibration sensor 2538 detects vibration during that time, it is determined by the abnormality determination means 2578 that the cheating is being performed, the game is stopped, and the cheating warning display The device 2005 is turned on to issue a warning.

  If it is determined by the main control board 1350 that a fraudulent act is being performed, not only the fraud warning indicator 2005, but also a predetermined time has elapsed since the fraud warning indicator 2005 was turned on, or within a predetermined time. If the abnormality determination means 2578 determines that an abnormality has occurred a plurality of times, the fact is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 and a warning sound or warning sound is emitted from the speaker 163. Various LEDs provided in the decorative body 2100 emit red light. Accordingly, by delaying the warning by the liquid crystal display device 640 or the like, the player who has performed the illegal act or the like is delayed to notice that the illegal act or the like has been detected, and in the meantime, the staff of the game hall or the like warns of the illegal act. It is possible to surely secure a player who has noticed or rushed to the light emission of the display device 2005 and has performed an illegal act, and can increase the deterrence against the illegal act.

  If it is determined by the abnormality determination means 2578 that an illegal act is being performed (abnormality has occurred), a game is stopped by the game stop means 2580 of the main control board 1350 together with a warning by the illegal action warning indicator 2005 or the like. (Game ball driving and game ball payout) are stopped. When the game is stopped based on the determination by the abnormality determination means 2578, the game is not resumed unless a predetermined reset operation is performed by a staff member of the game hall.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment enters the prize winning port 1402, and the game ball released from the first discharge port 2212 of the first accessory body 2206 is stored in the storage unit 2204. It is supplied onto the storage shelf 2264 and temporarily stored by the rising storage plate 2266, so that the storage timing of the game balls in the storage unit 2204 and the bonus winning port 1402 can be received. When the game ball stored in the storage unit 2204 is released based on the elapse of the release time starting from the point of time, a specific phrase of predetermined music is given to the player as an release effect that guides the release timing. Since it is guided, the opening timing can be perceived sensuously by the end (end) of the specific phrase, and the opening timing of the game ball can be easily understood. To interest it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 1 capable that can be inhibited from reduction.

  In addition, since the predetermined music is used as an opening effect that guides the opening timing of the stored game balls, the opening effect is compared with the case where the countdown (opening effect) is performed with numbers and lines. Since it is difficult to remember the start point (it is difficult to understand), it is difficult to compare with the start point of the previous opening production, and the length of the opening production is the number of game balls to the winning prize winning opening 1402 that can be received. It is possible to make it difficult to notice that it is divided according to the reception timing, the storage timing by the storage unit 2204, etc., and to prevent the entertainment interest of the game from deteriorating by enjoying the opening effect of the game ball without a sense of incongruity Can do.

  Furthermore, as described above, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the start point of the release effect that guides the release timing of the stored game balls, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being easily attached to the specific start point. It is possible to prevent the player from making a mistake or misunderstanding that the game ball is likely to be accepted into the second V entrance 2002b when the opening performance is at a specific start time. It is possible to entertain the production and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, as an opening effect for guiding the opening timing of the stored game balls, the end of a specific phrase in the predetermined music is made to coincide, and the opening effect is generated depending on the timing of receiving the game balls at the prize winning port 1402 and the like. Even when the times are different, the game ball stored by the storage unit 2204 is always released at the same place (end) of the specific phrase, so that the release timing of the game ball can be easily understood.

  Furthermore, since predetermined music is used as an opening effect for releasing the stored game balls, the player can be entertained by the melody or rhythm of the music. Further, since the opening timing is audibly recognized, the first start port 1602, the second start port 1604, the prize winning port 1402 and the like are visually aimed until the stored game balls are released. The game ball can be continuously operated, and at the time of release, the game balls released can be enjoyed while paying attention to the stored game balls. Since the game ball can be received in the first start port 1602 and the like, even if the released game ball is not received in the second V entrance 2002b, the first start port 1602 in the stage of opening is produced. By receiving the game ball in, etc., the prize winning opening 1402 can be received directly, and the opportunity will come, so that the opening stage can be enjoyed again at an early stage, and the interest of the player is maintained. Rukoto can.

  Further, since the second accessory main body 2402 always reciprocates in the left-right direction by the second accessory driving unit 2404, the acceptance probability that the game ball is accepted into the second V inlet 2002b periodically changes, and the second Whether the game ball is released from the storage unit 2204 when the probability of acceptance at the V entrance 2002b is high or not, the player can be excited and excited to increase the expectation for opening, and the second actor main body 2402 When the acceptance probability to the second V entrance 2002b increases based on the movement and the predetermined time for releasing the game ball, the opening effect changing means 2673 changes the predetermined music or specific phrase to a different music or phrase. When the stored game balls are released due to changes in music or the like in the opening performance, they are accepted into the second V entrance 2002b. Possibility is high can be recognized by the player, and to increase the expectation for development of particularly advantageous game state by a change in such music interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the probability of acceptance at the second V entrance 2002b increases, music and phrases in the opening effect change, so that when the game ball received in the prize winning port 1402 is stored in the storage unit 2204, the opening effect The player's expectation can be increased depending on whether or not the music or phrase changes, and the interest of the player can be enhanced by changing the music or the like of the opening effect with respect to the normal time. Even if the music or the like of the opening effect does not change, the released game ball may be accepted into the second V entrance 2002b, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the game balls stored in the storage unit 2204 are released when a predetermined opening time has elapsed since the winning combination winning port 1402 can be received by receiving the game balls to the first start port 1602 and the second start port 1604. As a result, the starting time of the opening time is set to the time when the game ball is received in the prize winning port 1402 or the time when the game ball is stored in the storage unit 2204. The time during which the ball is stored in the storage unit 2204 can be shortened, the waiting time of the player can be shortened, and the occurrence of irritation and scorching can be suppressed, and the prize winning port 1402 is received. By releasing the game ball from the storage unit 2204 until the game ball of the storage unit 2204 is released, the release timing of the game ball from the storage unit 2204 is changed intentionally. And it is possible to prevent the feel distrust such as, interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first accessory driving unit 2208 prevents the first outlet 2212 and the second outlet 2214 of the first accessory body 2206 from overlapping each other in plan view. After being moved, each first V-entry ball catching portion 2260 and first lost ball catching portion 2262 of the storage unit 2204 are located at lower positions corresponding to the movable ranges of the respective first discharge ports 2212 and second discharge ports 2214 and the like. Since the storage shelves 2264 are respectively arranged, the game balls dropped from the first discharge ports 2212 and the like can be reliably captured and detected, and the movement trajectory of each first discharge port 2212 and the like can be detected. In a range where they do not overlap with each other in a plan view, the first accessory body 2206 can be complicatedly moved, and the movement of the first accessory body 2206 strongly attracts the player's interest and is useful for games. That interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the game balls dropped from the first discharge ports 2212 and the second discharge ports 2214 of the first accessory body 2206, and the second V inlets 2002b and the second loser ports 2414 of the second accessory body 2402 are used. Each dropped V game ball is associated with each first discharge port 2212 or the like of the storage unit 2204 disposed below, and each second V ball catching part 2260 and first lose ball catching part 2262 etc. Each first V main body 2206 and second main body 2402 can detect and detect each of the first V main body 2206 and the second main body 2402 by detecting each of the second V incoming ball capturing sections 2268 and second lost ball capturing sections 2270 corresponding to the entrance 2002b and the like. Since it is possible to detect whether a game ball has been received at the V inlet 2002a and the first discharge port 2212, the second V inlet 2002b, or the second loser port 2414, the plurality of first V inlets 2002a, Exit 2 The movement of the first accessory main body 2206 having 12 and the second discharge port 2214 is complicated, or the second accessory main body 2402 having a plurality of second V inlets 2002b and second loser outlets 2414 is moved in the horizontal direction. Even if it is moved back and forth, it is possible to detect which of the first V inlet 2002a and the first outlet 2212, etc., the second V inlet 2002b and the second loser outlet 2414 has received a game ball with a simple configuration. Thus, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is complicated, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost and occurrence of defects.

  In addition, in the first lose ball capturing unit 2262 and the storage rack 2264 other than the first V entrance capturing unit 2260 corresponding to the first V entrance 2002a in the first accessory main body 2206, the bottom is the first V entrance capturing unit. Since the side away from 2260 is inclined so as to be lowered, even if a game ball dropped from the first accessory body 2206 bounces at the bottom of the first lose ball capturing unit 2262 or the storage shelf 2264, the first V entry It is possible to bounce to the opposite side of the catching portion 2260, and it is possible to prevent the bounced game ball from being caught by the first V entrance catching portion 2260 and to play the game at the first V entrance 2002a. Although the ball has not been accepted, the game unit is mistakenly captured by the first V-entry capture unit 2260 in the storage unit 2204 and a special advantageous game state ("big hit" game) occurs, and the player is distrusted. The or've given, it is possible that the burden of the gaming hall side to install a pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reliably prevented from or to increase.

  Further, a low repulsion member (impact absorbing sheet) is provided at the bottom of the first V ball catching portion 2260 and the first lose ball catching portion 2262, and the game ball dropped from the first accessory body 2206 is placed at the bottom. By contacting the low repulsion member, the kinetic energy of the game ball is absorbed by the low repulsion member, and it is possible to suppress the rebound and bounce of the game ball, so that the game dropped from the first accessory body 2206 It becomes possible to prevent the ball from bouncing and being captured by another capturing portion, and the first V inlet 2002a, the first discharge port 2212, and the second discharge port 2214 received in the first accessory body 2206. Game balls can be reliably captured by the first V-entrance ball catching unit 2260, the storage shelf 2264, and the first lose ball catching unit 2262, and the game result different from the accepted entrance is prevented. It can be interest in the game and distrust against the pachinko game machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the first V-entrance ball catching portion 2260 and the first lose ball catching portion 2262 can be partitioned by the protruding piece 2300, the game ball dropped on one catching portion bounces or rolls at the catching portion. The first V inlet 2002a, the first discharge port 2212, and the second that received the game ball in the first accessory body 2206 can be prevented. The game balls can be reliably captured by the first V-entry ball capturing section 2260, the storage shelf 2264, and the first lose ball capturing section 2262 corresponding to the discharge port 2214.

  Furthermore, by causing the first accessory body 2206 to perform complicated movement, the game balls dropped from the first discharge port 2212 and the second discharge port 2214 of the first accessory body 2206 are moved downward due to gravity. In addition to the motion vector, motion vectors in various directions according to the movement of the first accessory body 2206 are also given, and the first V-entrance capturing unit 2260, the storage shelf 2264, and the first lose ball that capture the game ball are captured. Even if there is a possibility that the game ball may bounce in various directions in the capture unit 2262, as described above, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from bouncing to other capture units. The movement of the first accessory body 2206 can be a complex movement without causing the movement of the first accessory body 2206 to be more enjoyable.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determination means 2578 when predetermined magnetism or vibration is detected by the magnetic sensor 2302 or the vibration sensor 2538 due to cheating or mischief during the game. Then, the cheating warning indicator 2005 capable of emitting light toward the front side emits light in a predetermined manner. However, the cheating warning indicator 2005 is compared with a conventional pachinko gaming machine that issues a warning sound or the like. Since the player simply emits light, it is difficult for the player to notice that the cheating warning indicator 2005 emits light, and it is possible to prevent the player from leaving the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the attendant of the game hall or the like displays the cheating warning indicator 2005. Since it is possible to easily recognize the occurrence of fraud etc. by paying attention to the light emission, the staff member recognizes the light emission of the fraud warning indicator 2005. And in before the player who made the fraud and the like can be escaped can be reliably secured, it is possible to increase the deterrent to fraud and mischief and the like.

  If a magnetic sensor 2302 or a vibration sensor 2538 is provided, and a predetermined magnetism or vibration is detected by the magnetic sensor 2302 or the vibration sensor 2538 during the game, and the abnormality determination means 2578 determines that an abnormality has occurred, a fraud warning is given. By causing the display 2005 to emit light in a predetermined manner or displaying a predetermined warning image on the liquid crystal display device 640, it is possible to make a player or an attendant of a game hall recognize the occurrence of an abnormality (injustice), It is possible to prevent illegal acts such as using or swinging or hitting the pachinko gaming machine 1 to allow the game ball to be received into the V entrance 2002. The increase in burden can be reduced.

  In addition, the vibration sensor 2538 is separated from the main control board 1350 and can be moved at a position away from the side on which the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4 is pivotally supported as a position where vibration due to fraud can be detected more accurately. Compared with the case where the vibration sensor 2538 is attached to the door frame 5, it is attached to the rear surface of the back box 621 that supports the accessory unit 2004. Since it is possible to reliably detect the impacting vibration, it becomes possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormality by more accurately detecting the vibration caused by shaking or hitting the V entrance 2002 due to fraud. It is possible to reduce the false detection of alarms by detecting vibrations that do not affect the system and to reduce false detections of abnormal occurrences. Game can be interest in the game and prevented from being interrupted be suppressed. Further, since the vibration sensor 2538 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 621, the maintenance of the vibration sensor 2538 can be easily performed from the rear side of the game board 4.

  Further, when a game ball is received at the prize winning port 1402, a detection signal from the vibration sensor 2538 is received, and an abnormality is generated only by vibration (unauthorized action) for receiving the game ball at the V entrance 2002. Since the determination is made, it is possible to reliably determine the fraud and recognize the occurrence of the fraud. In other words, the detection signal from the vibration sensor 2538 is not accepted unless the game ball is received at the winning prize winning opening 1402, and therefore, when the game ball is not likely to be received at the V entrance 2002, the player Even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 vibrates for some reason, such as shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 even though there is no intention of cheating due to the feelings of uplifting, etc. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the abnormality determination, and to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

  Further, since the fraud warning indicator 2005 is arranged in the upper right corner of the game area 605 and the cheating warning indicator 2005 can be made inconspicuous by the player, the fraud warning is given by fraud. Even if the display 2005 emits light, it is difficult for a player who has committed fraud or the like to notice it, and it is possible to continue the game without escaping from the pachinko machine 1, during which the staff of the game hall can rush Therefore, it is possible to reliably secure a player who has committed an illegal act.

  Furthermore, since a fraud warning indicator 2005 that emits light when it is determined that an abnormality such as a fraud has occurred, is arranged on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 599, a fraud warning warning is displayed to the player. When the device 2005 does not emit light, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the existence of the fraud warning indicator 2005 that informs the occurrence of an abnormality such as a fraud. It is difficult for a player who has performed an illegal act to continue to play without escaping from the pachinko machine 1, and in the meantime it is possible for a staff member of the game hall to rush to ensure that the player who has performed the illegal action Can be ensured, and the deterrence against fraud can be further enhanced.

  Further, when the fraud warning indicator 2005 does not emit light, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the fraud warning indicator 2005 that informs the player of the occurrence of an abnormality such as fraud. The presence of the warning indicator 2005 can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, intimidating, and the like, and can prevent the interest in the game from being lowered. In addition, when an illegal act or the like is performed, the light emitted from the illegal action warning display 2005 can be surely recognized by a staff member of the game hall through the transparent game panel 599.

  In the movable accessory unit 2004, the first movable accessory 2200 and the second movable accessory 2400 are provided with a V inlet 2002, first and second discharge ports 2212 and 2214, and a second loser port 2414. Since the second accessory body 2206, 2402 is movable, when vibration is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movement of each accessory body 2206, 2402 and the game balls on each accessory body 2206, 2402 are moved. In the storage unit 2204 disposed between the first movable accessory 2200 and the second movable accessory 2400, the movement is easily changed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shaken or hit when the storage plate 2266 is lowered. If the vibration is applied, the release timing of the game balls released from the storage shelf 2264 may be shifted. However, since the vibration sensor 2538 and the like are provided as described above, the fraud warning display device 2005 is caused to emit light by detecting vibration caused by the fraud. By displaying a warning image on 640, the occurrence of cheating can be recognized by a player or an attendant of the game hall, etc., and the cheating can be prevented and the cheating is performed. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall can be reduced.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a transparent storage shelf 2264 with respect to a plurality of three-dimensionally curved lower members 2218 arranged below the rolling portion 2210 in the first accessory body 2206. Since the light from the LED mounted on the lower shelf substrate 2284 arranged on the lower side is irradiated, the surface of the lower member 2218 is illuminated and decorated by the irradiated light, and the irradiated light is By reflecting to the player side by the curved lower member 2218, it is possible to make a light emitting decoration as if a light source is provided in the lower member 2218, and the first accessory body 2206 becomes conspicuous and the first The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the accessory body 2206, and light is irradiated from the lower side of the lower member 2218, so that the rolling portion of the first accessory body 2206 is irradiated. It is possible to prevent the game ball rolling around 210 from becoming a silhouette and to prevent the game ball from being difficult to see, making it easy to see the game ball in the first accessory body 2206 together with the first accessory body 2206 And it can suppress that a player's interest falls.

  In addition, the lower member 2218 of the first accessory main body 2206 is irradiated with light from below, so that the player can see the light reflected by the lower member 2218. Compared to the case where a light source is arranged on the back side of a main body of an accessory such as a rotating body as in a pachinko gaming machine of this type and light is emitted from the back side to the front side, the light emitting decoration of the lower member 2218 The dazzling can be reduced, and the three-dimensional shape of the lower member 2218, the game ball that rolls on the rolling portion 2210 of the first accessory body 2206, and the like can be prevented from becoming unsightly. It is possible to entertain the shape and movement of the single-act main body 2206, the game ball, etc., and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, since the plurality of LEDs that emit light in the form of dots are provided on the shelf bottom substrate 2284, the light is reflected at a plurality of positions on the surface of the three-dimensionally curved lower member 2218 so as to correspond to the positions where the LEDs are arranged. In other words, it is possible to embody a gorgeous light emitting decoration in which the lower member 2218 is provided with a plurality of light sources, and the first accessory body 2206 is excellent even if the first accessory body 2206 is not provided with an LED. The first accessory body 2206 can be decorated with a simple structure regardless of the movable manner of the first accessory body, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Further, since the curved lower member 2218 of the first accessory body 2206 is transparent, not only the light from the LED of the under-shelf substrate 2284 is reflected by the surface of the lower member 2218 but also enters the lower member 2218. Reflecting on the surface on the opposite side or the like, the illusion that light is emitted inside the lower member 2218 can be made to express a light emitting decoration with depth (depth), and the player's interest is strongly attracted. The first accessory body 2206 can be used.

  Further, since the surface of the first accessory driving unit 2208 disposed on the rear side of the first accessory main body 2206 is dark, the first accessory driving unit 2208 becomes dark and becomes inconspicuous. Even if the object main body 2206 is indirectly decorated with the LED of the under shelf board 2284, the first accessory main body 2206 can be relatively brightened. The first actor main body 2206 can be made more conspicuous and can attract the player's interest strongly, and the first actor main body 2206 and the like can be more enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating. be able to.

  Further, since the under shelf board 2284 is arranged below the transparent storage shelf 2264, it becomes possible to make the under shelf board 2284 inconspicuous from the player side, and the LED of the under shelf board 2284 makes the first role. It is possible to make it difficult to notice that the lower member 2218 of the object main body 2206 is decorated with light emission, and the first object main body 2206 is made to have an illusion as if it is provided with light emitting means. It is possible to entertain the luminous decoration of 2206 and to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the under shelf board 2284 is arranged below the transparent storage shelf 2264, the game balls supplied to the storage shelf 2264 are brightly illuminated from the lower side, and the game flows through the storage shelf 2264. The ball can be easily seen, the game ball circulating on the storage shelf 2264 can be enjoyed, and the game ball received from the storage shelf 2264 to the second V inlet 2002b or the second loser outlet 2414 on the downstream side. As a result, it is possible to make the game easier to see and to increase the expectation for the second V entrance 2002b, and to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered.

  Moreover, since the irradiation position of the light irradiated from LED of the under shelf board | substrate 2284 will change to various positions because the 1st accessory main body 2206 moves up and down, rocking | fluctuating, the 1st accessory main body 2206 will change. The lower member 2218 can be provided with a variety of light-emitting decorations, and it is possible to entertain the light-emitting decorations of the first actor main body 2206 and prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. Because the movement of the main body of the accessory in the conventional pachinko machine (for example, rotation of the rotating body, seesaw-like movement of the seesaw member, etc.) such that the object body moves up and down while swinging is completely different. Thus, the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the movement, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be selected as a pachinko gaming machine to play by increasing appeal to the player.

  Further, the V inlet 2002 and the like are arranged not only on the downstream side of the storage shelf 2264 but also on the rolling portion 2210 of the first accessory body 2206 and are not received by the first V inlet 2002a of the first accessory body 2206. Since the game balls are supplied to the storage shelf 2264, the player can determine whether or not the game balls received in the prize winning port 1402 are first received by the first bonus body 2206 into the first V entrance 2002a. Even if the game balls are not received by the first V inlet 2002a by the first action body 2206, the first game object 2206 is supplied to the storage shelf 2264 arranged below, and downstream of the storage shelf 2264. The player can be thrilled again by whether or not it is accepted at the second V entrance 2002b arranged at the second entrance, and the opportunity to accept the game ball at the V entrance 2002 is first. To entertain the player by visiting the downstream side and the twice of the character object body 2206 and the storage shelf 2264 it is possible to further increase the interest in.

  Further, since the liquid crystal display device 640 is disposed at a position so as not to overlap the lower member 2218 of the first accessory body 2206 in the front-rear direction, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 passes through the transparent lower member 2218. By being visible, it is possible to prevent the shape of the lower member 2218 from becoming unclear or to prevent the light emitting decoration of the lower member 2218 from being obscured by the LED of the under-shelf substrate 2284 so that the lower member 2218 can be clearly seen. Thus, it is possible to reliably exhibit the desired decoration effect by the first accessory body 2206 and to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, light from the LED mounted on the rear substrate 1552 in the main body portion of the front side member 1500 supported by the gaming panel 599 is reflected by the wide decorative portion 2122 of the rear side member 2120. Since the second accessory body 2402 is irradiated, the second accessory body 2402 is illuminated and decorated, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the second accessory body 2402. In addition, the light is irradiated from the side surface side of the second accessory body 2402 so that the game balls flowing through the vertical guide path 2408 and the horizontal guide path 2410 of the second accessory body 2402 are not silhouetted. It is possible to prevent the ball from becoming difficult to see, and to make it easy to see the game ball in the second accessory main body 2402 together with the second accessory main body 2402 and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. Can.

  Further, since the second accessory main body 2402 is provided with side surfaces (inclined surfaces) inclined in the front-rear direction, the light reflected from the rear side member 2120 is applied to the side surfaces of the second accessory main body 2402. It is reflected to the player side, and the illusion can be made as if the second accessory body 2402 is provided with light emitting means such as an LED, and the second accessory body 2402 is provided with the light emitting means. The second accessory main body 2402 can be surely decorated with light emission even without it, and the second accessory main body 2402 can be decorated with light emission with a simple configuration regardless of the movable manner of the second accessory main body 2402. Can be prevented from increasing.

  Furthermore, since the second accessory main body 2402 is provided with at least a part having translucency and a side surface (inclined surface) inclined in the front-rear direction, light is irradiated through the rear side member 2120. The side surface itself can be easily seen by the player, allowing the player to enjoy the surface decoration of the second accessory body 2402 and light from the translucent part into the second accessory body 2402. It is possible to cause an illusion that light is emitted also from the inside by entering, making it possible to develop a deep luminescent decoration, and it is possible to make an accessory body that attracts the player's attention strongly.

  In addition, since the second accessory body 2402 always reciprocates in the left-right direction, the irradiation position of the light irradiated through the rear side member 2120 changes as the second accessory body 2402 moves, The dual decoration main body 2402 can be made to have a variety of light-emitting decorations (lighting decorations), which can attract the player's interest more strongly, and the second accessory main body 2402 itself can be enjoyed. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the light from the rear substrate 1552 in the main body portion of the front side member 1500 is reflected by the wide decorative portion 2122 of the rear side member 2120 so that the second accessory main body 2402 is illuminated and decorated (illumination decoration). Since the rear side member 2120 can be illuminated by the LED on the rear substrate 1552 in the main body of the member 1500, the rear side member 2120 can be prevented from being darkened and the rear side member 2120 does not have a light emitting means. The second accessory main body 2402 can be irradiated with light, and the desired decoration effect by the rear side member 2120 can be reliably exhibited to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating, and the rear side member 2120. It is not necessary to separately provide light emitting means for illuminating the game machine, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suppressed. Door can be.

  Further, since the second accessory body 2402 is provided with an LED mounted on the background decoration substrate 2412 that irradiates light from the rear side to the front side with respect to the second accessory body 2402, The dual body 2402 can be illuminated (illuminated) not only from the side but also from the rear, and the player's interest can be more strongly attracted by more diverse illuminations. It is possible to entertain the second accessory main body 2402 itself and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Further, depending on the position where the second accessory main body 2402 moves, the light from the LED of the background decoration board 2412 is directly irradiated to the player side, so that the light directly enters the player's field of view. It is possible to expect an effect that makes the player dazzled by light and enhances the interest, and the change in the light emitting decoration mode of the second actor main body 2402 increases, and the decoration effect of the second actor main body 2402 is enhanced. The player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  Further, since the plating layer having a metallic luster is provided on the surface of the wide decorative portion 2122 of the rear side member 2120, the reflectance of light at the rear side member 2120 can be increased by this plating layer, The second accessory body 2402 can be brightly decorated with light emission, and the second accessory body 2402 can be made more conspicuous, and the rear side member 2120 can be gracefully decorated with a plating layer to decorate with the rear side member 2120. The effect can be further enhanced, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

  Further, since the second accessory main body 2402 has a frame shape, when light from the LED of the rear substrate 1552 in the main body portion is irradiated through the rear side member 2120, the frame along the shape of the second accessory main body 2402. The frame-shaped second accessory main body 2402 decorated with light emission is reciprocated in the left-right direction, so that the player's interest can be more strongly attracted. Attention is paid to 2402, and the entertainment for the game is reduced by making the second decoration body 2402 luminous decoration, the movement of the second action body 2402 and the movement of the game ball in the second action body 2402, etc. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 is received by the first start port 1602 by the player performing a driving operation. In addition, it is possible to receive a game ball in the prize winning port 1402, and when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 when the prize winning port 1402 becomes acceptable, the game ball is received in the bonus prize winning port 1402. A number of game balls are paid out, and the received game balls are sent to the movable accessory unit 2004 arranged on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599. In the movable accessory unit 2004, the upper frame in the second accessory main body 2402 formed in a frame shape of the second movable accessory 2400 in which the game ball received in the accessory winning prize opening 1402 reciprocates in the left-right direction. Received by the winning ball receiving portion 2406 of the portion 2402a and guided downward by one of the vertical guiding paths 2408 in the left and right side frame portions 2402b, and then framed by the horizontal guiding path 2410 from the middle of the side frame portion 2402b in the vertical direction. The game ball which is guided to the winning ball discharge port 2412 composed of the crune arranged at the approximate center of the inside and is discharged from the winning ball discharge port 2412 is the rolling portion of the first accessory main body 2206 in the first movable accessory 2200. 2210 on. The first accessory body 2206 moves up and down while swinging, and the game ball on the rolling part 2210 rolls in the left and right direction according to the movement, and the first V inlet 2002a or When the game ball is received in either the first discharge port 2212 or the second discharge port 2214 and the game ball is received in the first V inlet 2002a, a special advantageous game state (for example, a “hit” game) occurs, and the game ball is When it is received in one discharge port 2212, it is stored on the storage shelf 2264 by the storage plate 2266 that is supplied to the storage shelf 2264 of the storage unit 2204 disposed below and is rising, and the storage plate 2266 of the storage unit 2204 is lowered. Then, the game balls stored in the storage rack 2264 are released to the lower frame portion 2402c of the second accessory body 2402 that reciprocates in the left-right direction, and the second accessory body 2402 is released. Received in one of the second V inlet 2002b or the second loss port 2414 disposed in the lower frame portion 2402C. When the game ball is received at the second V entrance 2002a, a special advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) can be played, and the player is entertained by the occurrence of the special advantageous gaming state. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating. At this time, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the game ball is received at the first V entrance 2002a in the first movable accessory 2200. When a game ball is not received at the first V inlet 2002a but is received at the first discharge port 2212, the game ball is supplied to the next second movable accessory 2400. Even in 2400, the player can be thrilled by whether or not the game ball is accepted at the second V entrance 2002b, and there are two opportunities (chances) to be accepted at the V entrance 2002, so the first movable Even if the winning combination 2200 is not received at the first V entrance 2002a, there is a chance that the next second movable accessory 2400 can be received at the second V entrance 2002b. It is possible to maintain a high expectation for the occurrence of a special advantageous gaming state by increasing the number of opportunities to be entered, and to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player, as well as the final second movable object It is possible to entertain the player up to 2400 and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the first combination body 2206 of the first movable combination 2200 arranged in the movable combination unit 2004 moves so as to move up and down while swinging, and the second combination of the second movable combination 2400. Since the object main body 2402 reciprocates in the left-right direction, the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the movement of the first accessory main body 2206 and the second accessory main body 2402, and the first accessory main body 2206 and second The movement of the accessory main body 2402 can be enjoyed, and it can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. Further, the first accessory main body 2206 and the second accessory main body 2402 are moved, so that the first V inlet 2002a, the second V inlet 2002b, and the like are also moved. Since the movement of the game sphere accepted to the second V entrance 2002b and the like also changes, the movement of the game sphere along with the first accessory body 2206 and the second accessory body 2402 is also enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the appearance and atmosphere in the game area 605 can be changed by the movement of the first accessory body 2206 and the second accessory body 2402 provided in the movable accessory unit 2004, the visual impact is strengthened. It is possible to characterize the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and make it stand out, and the appealing power to the player becomes higher than other pachinko gaming machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and played. This pachinko gaming machine 1 can be selected as the pachinko gaming machine, and it is possible to entertain the above-described game in the present pachinko gaming machine 1 and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Also, the game balls received at the first V entrance 2002a are not supplied to the next second movable accessory 2400 so that the game balls received at the first V entrance 2002a of the first moveable accessory 2200 are not supplied to the subsequent second moveable accessory 2400. Since it is discharged out of the pachinko gaming machine 1 so as not to be involved in the game, it is compared with the case where the game ball received at the first V inlet 2002a is also supplied to the next second movable accessory 2400. Thus, the winning relationship by one game ball can be easily understood, the expectation for each game ball can be prevented from becoming thin, and the interest for the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  Furthermore, since the first accessory body 2206, the storage unit 2204, and the lower frame portion 2402c of the second accessory body 2402 are arranged in the vertical direction, the first V inlet 2002a and the second V inlet 2002b are in the horizontal direction. The player's eyes are positioned at the approximate center in the left-right direction of the game area 605 so that the entire game area 605 can easily enter the field of view. 1402 and the like can be recognized, and even if the game ball in the movable accessory unit 2004 is finally received into the second loser port 2414 and becomes “lost”, it is possible to receive the accessory prize winning port 1402 immediately. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required for accepting the prize winning port 1402 by allowing the player to perform a game ball driving operation aiming at the first starting port 1602 and the like, and the player is frustrated. And Like to reduce the feel Ri interest in the game and can be inhibited from reduction.

  Further, the storage unit 2204 is arranged between the first movable accessory 2200 and the second movable accessory 2400, and the game ball received in the first discharge port 2212 of the first movable accessory 2200 is It is possible to prevent the ball from being immediately sent to the second movable accessory 2400, and while the game ball is being stored in the storage unit 2204, other game balls, the first start opening 1602, and the prize for winning a bonus item are stored. Since interest can be directed to the mouth 1402 and the like, the interruption time of the game ball driving operation aiming at the first start opening 1602 and the prize winning opening 1402 and the like can be reduced as much as possible. , It is possible to prevent the opportunity between the winning prize winning opening 1402 from becoming longer and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, the game balls stored in the storage unit 2204 are released to the second V inlet 2002b and the second loser outlet 2414 in the second accessory main body 2402 of the second movable accessory 2400 that reciprocates in the left-right direction. Therefore, depending on whether or not the game ball is released from the storage unit 2204 at the timing when the acceptance probability to the second V entrance 2002b is the highest, the player can be thrilled and excited and the expectation of the player can be increased. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

  Furthermore, since the movable accessory unit 2004 is provided with two movable accessories, the first movable accessory 2200 and the second movable accessory 2400, compared with the case where three or more movable actors are provided. In addition, the size of each moveable accessory can be made relatively large or the range of movement can be made more conspicuous, attracting the player's interest and distinguishing it from other pachinko machines. It is possible to reduce the interest of the game by making the movement of the movable accessories 2200 and 2400 more enjoyable. In addition, since the movable accessory unit 2004 is provided with two movable accessories of the first movable accessory 2200 and the second movable accessory 2400, the game ball received in the accessory winning prize opening 1402 is the second. It is possible to suppress the time until the winning is confirmed in the movable accessory 2400, and the game ball driving operation is interrupted by the circulation of the game ball in the movable accessory unit 2004. It is possible to make the game ball as short as possible, and it is possible to entertain the game ball driving operation and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 is received by the first start port 1602 by the player performing a driving operation. In addition, it is possible to receive a game ball in the prize winning port 1402, and when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 when the prize winning port 1402 becomes acceptable, the game ball is received in the bonus prize winning port 1402. A number of game balls are paid out, and after being guided to the rear side of the game panel 599 by the guide unit 1426 so that the received game balls are not visible to the player, the game balls are discharged from different positions of the discharge part of a predetermined width. Sorted to different positions. The upper part of the second accessory body 2402 formed in the frame shape of the second movable accessory 2400 in which the game ball released from the guide portion 1426 is disposed on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599 and reciprocates in the left-right direction. The side frame portion 2402b is received by the winning ball receiving portion 2406 of the frame portion 2402a and guided downward by any one of the vertical guide paths 2408 in the left and right side frame portions 2402b according to the position released from the guide portion 1426. The game ball released from the winning ball discharge port 2412 is extended in the left-right direction by being guided from the middle of the vertical direction to the winning ball discharge port 2412 composed of a croon disposed at the approximate center in the frame by the horizontal guide path 2410. The first V inlet 2002a received by the rolling part 2210 of the first accessory body 2206 and provided at different positions in the left-right direction in the rolling part 2210, the first It will be received by either the discharge port 2212 or the second discharge port 2214, and if it is received by the first V inlet 2002a, a special advantageous gaming state (for example, “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player will occur. It is possible to play a game, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating due to the occurrence of a special advantageous gaming state. At this time, since the second accessory main body 2402 always reciprocates in the left-right direction, the winning ball release port 2412 of the second accessory main body 2402 that increases the probability of being accepted into the first V inlet 2002a, that is, the vertical The taxiway 2408 and the lateral taxiway 2410 are changing every moment, and the game ball received in the prize winning port 1402 is distributed to the side of the taxiway 2408, 2410 by the guide part 1426. The excitement can be enhanced by exciting the game balls, and the fun of game balls can be enjoyed to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

  In addition, since the game ball distribution in the guide unit 1426 of the winning prize winning unit 1400 is not visible to the player, it is possible to determine at which stage the game ball has been distributed to which side of the guide path 2408, 2410 at an early stage. It is possible to prevent it from being understood, and it is possible to suppress the interest from being lowered by being understood quickly, and it is possible to expect an effect that can increase the sense of expectation by irritating the player.

  Furthermore, as the second accessory body 2402 moves, the acceptance probability to the first V entrance 2002a in each guide path 2408, 2410 changes, and the game ball is distributed to any guide path 2408, 2410. However, since there is a high possibility of being accepted into the first V entrance 2002a, it is possible to make the player pay attention to any of the guide paths 2408 and 2410 substantially uniformly. It is possible to entertain the movement of the guided game ball, and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Moreover, since the acceptance probability to the 1st V entrance 2002a in each guide path 2408 and 2410 changes because the 2nd accessory main body 2402 always reciprocates, the movement of the 2nd accessory main body 2402 and the 1st V The first start port 1602 and the winning combination can be received so that the gaming ball is received at the prize winning port 1402 at a timing when the gaming ball is highly likely to be received at the first V entrance 2002a due to a change in the acceptance probability at the entrance 2002a. It is possible to perform a game ball driving operation aiming at the prize winning opening 1402 and the like, and it is possible to entertain the game ball driving operation and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the width of the discharge portion in the guide portion 1426 of the prize winning unit 1400 is 2.5 to 4 times the outer shape of the game ball, guidance of the game ball guided by the guide portion 1426 is performed. Depending on the speed, guidance direction (movement vector), etc., it is possible to make sure that the position at which the game ball is actually released is different, and to release the game ball from the guide 1426 to a different position, The above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the cover portion 1422 of the accessory winning award unit 1400 prevents the gaming ball from being received from right above the accessory winning award opening 1402 into the accessory winning award opening 1402, and the guiding ball 1404a of the movable piece 1404 holds the game ball. Since the winning combination winning port 1402 is guided from the left and right directions so that it can be received by the winning combination winning port 1402, a movement vector in the left and right direction can be given to the game ball received in the winning combination winning port 1402. According to the movement vector, the guide ball 1426 can be caused to flutter by hitting the game balls against the left and right side walls, and according to the situation such as the speed and direction of the game balls received into the prize winning port 1426, the guide block 1426. Can be released to different positions, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Rukoto can.

  Further, when the other ends of the guide surfaces 1404a of the pair of movable pieces 1404 are away from each other, the bonus winning port 1402 is opened. That is, when the pair of movable pieces 1404 are expanded so as to expand upward, the prize winning port 1402 can be awarded, so that the prize winning unit substantially similar to the conventional prize winning port provided with the electric tulip is provided. 1400, which can prevent the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine from feeling uncomfortable, and allows the player to play with the pachinko machine 1 without feeling uncomfortable. It can suppress that interest falls.

  In addition, the game ball can be rolled in the left-right direction at the rolling portion 2210 of the first accessory body 2206 that receives the game ball released from the discharge port 2412 of the second movable accessory 2400. That is, the rolling portion 2210 extends in the left-right direction and the first V inlet 2002a, the first discharge port 2212, and the second discharge port 2214 are arranged at different positions in the left-right direction. The first V inlet 2002a, the first outlet 2212, and the second outlet 2214 are easier to see than when the one V inlet 2002a, the first outlet 2212, and the second outlet 2214 are arranged in the front-rear direction. It becomes easy to understand which of the first V inlet 2002a, the first outlet 2212, and the second outlet 2214 has received the game ball, and the first V inlet 2002a, the first outlet 2212, and the second outlet It is possible to entertain the reception of the game ball to the exit 2214 and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the rolling ball 2210 of the first accessory body 2206 rolls the game ball in the left-right direction, the game ball rolls compared to the case where the ball is rolled in the front-rear direction. Various distances can be imparted to the game ball by increasing the distance, and it is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball and suppress the player's interest from decreasing. Further, since the game ball is swung with respect to the first V inlet 2002a, the first discharge port 2212, and the second discharge port 2214, the game ball is received with respect to the first V inlet 2002a. By such movement, the player can be harassed and the expectation for the occurrence of the special advantageous gaming state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  Further, the game ball is guided along the frame of the second accessory main body 2402 formed in a frame shape, and the game ball received in the accessory prize winning port 1402 is distributed on the left side by the distribution at the guide portion 1426. Since the different winning ball discharge port 2412 is discharged through either the side frame portion 2402b or the right side frame portion 2402b, the game ball is directed to any of the guide paths 2408, 2410, that is, to the first V inlet 2002a. It is possible to clearly recognize whether the route has been assigned to the guide paths 2408 and 2410 having a high acceptance probability, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, in the second accessory main body 2402, the lower ends of the pair of side frame portions 2402b are connected by the lower frame portion 2402c, so that the second accessory main body 2402 may be connected to the upper frame portion 2402a and the side frame. Since it can be formed in a frame shape by the portion 2402b and the lower frame portion 2402c, the rigidity of the second accessory body 2402 is increased and the game ball is guided by the guide paths 2408 and 2410, whereby the second accessory body 2402 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted or the second accessory main body 2402 is moved in a predetermined direction by the second accessory driving unit 2404 to prevent the second accessory main body 2402 from being inadvertently shaken. Can be surely discharged from the winning ball outlet 2412 to a desired position, preventing the player from feeling distrust and anxiety. And interest in the game and can be inhibited from reduction.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 is received by the first start port 1602 by the player performing a driving operation. In addition, it is possible to receive a game ball in the prize winning port 1402, and when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 when the prize winning port 1402 becomes acceptable, the game ball is received in the bonus prize winning port 1402. A number of game balls are paid out, and the received second game balls are arranged on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599 and are formed in a frame shape of the second movable combination 2400 that reciprocates in the left-right direction. The side frame portion 2402 is received by the winning ball receiving portion 2406 of the upper frame portion 2402a in the main body 2402 and guided downward by one of the vertical guide paths 2408 in the left and right side frame portions 2402b. The game ball that is guided from the middle of the vertical direction to the winning ball discharge port 2412 made of a crune disposed substantially in the center of the frame by the horizontal guide path 2410 is stored in the storage unit 2204. It is stored on the storage shelf 2264 by the storage plate 2266 that is supplied to the shelf 2264 and is rising. Then, when the game ball is stored in the storage shelf 2264, an effect image that counts down the timing when the storage plate 2266 descends after the opening time has elapsed since the bonus winning port 1402 can be received is the effect display control means. The game ball displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 that can be viewed through the frame of the second accessory main body 2402 by 2656, and the storage plate 2266 descends and is stored by completing the opening time with the end of the effect image. Is received in either the second V inlet 2002b or the second loser outlet 2414 disposed in the lower frame portion 2402c of the second accessory main body 2402 that reciprocates in the left-right direction. At this time, when a game ball is received at the second V entrance 2002b, it is possible to play a game in which a special advantageous game state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player is generated. The occurrence of the state can entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating. In addition, when a game ball is released from the storage shelf 2266, a countdown effect image that counts down is displayed by the effect display control means 2656. Therefore, the timing at which the storage plate 2266 descends, that is, the release timing is recognized. It is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the storage shelf 2264 and the second V entrance 2002b and overlooking the moment when the game ball released from the storage shelf 2264 is received by the second V entrance 2002b. In addition, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation for the release of the game ball by the countdown effect image, and to suppress the excitement to the game by making the player excited and excited.

  In addition, since the timing at which the storage plate 2266 is lowered is guided by the effect display control means 2656, if attention is paid to the storage shelf 2264, the second movable accessory 2400, etc. when the storage plate 2266 is lowered, the game is played to the second V entrance 2002b. The moment when the ball is accepted can be seen, and the interest in the first starting port 1602 and the winning feature winning port 1402 is reduced, and the time during which the game ball driving operation is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible. It becomes possible, and even if the game ball received in the prize winning opening 1402 is not accepted from the storage shelf 2264 to the second V entrance 2002b, the prize winning opening 1402 can be received immediately. Even after the game ball is received at 1402, the game ball driving operation aiming at the first start port 1602 or the prize winning port 1402 can be continued. Interest in the technique can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, by guiding the timing at which the storage plate 2266 descends by the effect display control means 2656, as described above, after the game ball is received at the prize winning port 1402, the first start port 1602 is continuously aimed at. Since the game ball can be driven, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being continuously consumed and an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed.

  In addition, the presentation display control means 2656 guides the discharge timing from the storage shelf 2264, and the second accessory main body 2402 of the second movable accessory 2400 having the second V inlet 2002b and the second loser outlet 2414 is always left and right. Since the game ball is reciprocated in the direction, the player is excited and excited by whether or not the game ball is released from the storage shelf 2264 at the movement timing at which the game ball is received at the second V entrance 2002b. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  By the way, when the game ball received in the prize winning hole 1402 for some reason is not stored in the storage shelf 2264 of the storage unit 2204, the effect display control means 2656 guides the timing at which the storage plate 2266 descends. Even if the player pays attention to the storage shelf 2264, the second V entrance 2002b of the second movable accessory 2400, etc. by the guidance of the effect display control means 2656, the game ball is not released from the storage shelf 2264, and is disappointed or distrustful. There is a risk that the interest in games will be reduced. However, according to this embodiment, when the storage ball detection sensor 2312 detects the storage of the game ball, the effect display control means 2656 guides the timing at which the storage plate 2266 descends, Even if a game ball is received, it is not guided by the effect display control means 2656 unless it is stored in the storage shelf 2264, so that it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the storage shelf 2264 and the like even though the game ball is not released. It is possible to prevent discouragement and distrust and prevent the interest in games from deteriorating.

  Further, since the storage unit 2204, the second movable accessory 2400, and the like are arranged on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599 that partitions the rear end of the game area 605, the storage unit 2204, the second movable accessory 2400, and the like are arranged. This makes it possible to prevent the area in which the game balls circulate on the front surface of the game panel 599 from becoming narrow, and by allowing the game spheres to circulate in a wider area within the game area 605, various movements can be made to the game balls. Can be provided, and the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. In addition, since the storage unit 2204, the second movable accessory 2400, and the like are arranged on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599, the storage unit 2204 or It becomes possible to increase the size of the second movable accessory 2400, and by characterizing the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the large storage unit 2204, the second movable accessory 2400, etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 having an impact can be given to the player. The appeal power can be enhanced, and the possibility that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is selected as a pachinko gaming machine to be differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines can be increased.

  Further, in response to the reception of the game ball at the first start port 1602, the storage plate 2266 of the storage unit 2204 is lowered to lower the second movable combination when a predetermined opening time has elapsed since the winning combination winning port 1402 can be received. Since the game ball is released to the object 2400 side, the starting point of the opening time is the time when the game ball is received in the prize winning port 1402 or the time when the game ball is stored in the storage shelf 2264 Compared to the case where the game ball is stored in the storage shelf 2264, the waiting time of the player can be shortened to suppress the occurrence of irritation, impatience, etc. Can be suppressed.

  Also, the starting point of the opening time is the time when the bonus winning port 1402 becomes acceptable, and the gaming ball is stored in the storage unit 2204 according to the timing at which the gaming ball is accepted into the bonus winning port 1402 that has become acceptable. Since the time stored in the shelf 2264 changes, the countdown effect image of the effect display control means 2656 guided based on the opening time also changes. By displaying, it is possible to make the player enjoy the guidance itself by the effect display control means 2656, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to reduce the interest in the game.

  In addition, since the storage plate solenoid 2304 that raises and lowers the storage plate 2266 of the storage unit 2204, the slide member 2306, the crank member 2308, and the like are arranged below the storage shelf 2264, they are visible to the player and look bad. Can be prevented. Further, the storage plate 2266 is moved up and down by the storage plate position sensor 2310, and the storage plate 2266 can be raised and lowered after grasping the actual position of the storage plate 2266. With the storage plate 2266, game balls can be stored in the storage rack 2264 or game balls stored in the storage rack 2264 can be released, and the above-described effects can be achieved.

  Furthermore, since the game balls received in the winning prize winning opening 1402 flow from the second accessory body 2402 to the storage unit 2204 and from the storage unit 2204 to the second accessory body 2402 again, It is possible to entertain the movement of the game balls that circulate through the dual role main body 2402 and the storage unit 2204, and to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, after the game ball received in the winning combination winning port 1402 is guided by the vertical guiding path 2408 and the horizontal guiding path 2410 of the second accessory main body 2402 that is constantly reciprocating in the left-right direction, the winning ball discharge port 2412 is obtained. To the storage unit 2204, and the position of the winning ball discharge port 2412 changes depending on the movement position of the second accessory body 2402, and is released to various positions of the storage shelf 2264. Therefore, depending on the release position of the game balls released to the storage rack 2264, the time until the game balls are stored on the storage rack 2264 by the storage plate 2266 varies. In other words, even if the timing at which the game ball is received at the winning prize winning opening 1402 is the same, if the moving timing of the second accessory main body 2402 is different, the timing stored in the storage shelf 2264 is also different, and the effect display control is performed. Since the guidance by the means 2656 also changes, it is possible to guide the lowering timing of the storage plate 2266 in more various patterns, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the game due to difficulty in getting tired.

  In addition, a frame-shaped space is formed between the upper frame portion 2402a and the horizontal guide path 2410 for the second accessory body 2402 of the second movable accessory 2400, and the horizontal guide path 2410 and the lower frame section 2402c Since the storage unit 2204 is arranged between the two, the second accessory main body 2402 can be made large, and the same effects as the above-described effects can be achieved. In addition, the second accessory body 2402 can be conspicuous to attract the player's attention.

  Further, as the second accessory main body 2402 increases in size, the path of the game ball from the accessory winning prize opening 1402 to the second V inlet 2002b provided in the lower frame portion 2402c of the second accessory main body 2402 becomes longer. Thus, even if the time until the winning losing is confirmed by the winning of a prize for the game ball is long, the game ball is temporarily stored in the storage shelf 2264 of the storage unit 2204 and then stored in the effect display control means 2656 Since the release timing of the game ball is guided, it is possible to continue the game ball driving operation aiming at the first start port 1602 and the prize winning port 1402 until the game ball is released from the storage shelf 2264. , Less interest in the game by reducing the time until the next chance (chance to accept the prize winnings 1402 and chance to accept the second V entrance 2002b) It can be suppressed to.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 by the player's operation is received in the first start port 1602, the pair of movable pieces 1404 are expanded to serve as an accessory. The game ball can be received in the winning opening 1402, and at this time, when the game ball driven into the game area 605 is received in the winning combination winning opening 1402, the received gaming ball is transferred to the second movable accessory 2400. After being guided by the longitudinal guiding path 2408 and the lateral guiding path 2410 of the second accessory body 2402 that reciprocates in the left-right direction, the first movable accessory is discharged from the winning ball discharge port 2412 to the first movable accessory 2200. When the game is distributed to the first V inlet 2002a in 2200, a game in which a special advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit” game) is generated can be played. In addition to a predetermined number of game balls being paid out by accepting game balls to the prize winning port 1402, it is highly possible that more game balls will be paid out due to the occurrence of a special advantageous game state, and the player can enjoy the game. You can enhance your interest. When the winning combination winning opening 1402 becomes acceptable, the game ball is received into the winning combination winning opening 1402 at a timing that is highly likely to be distributed to the first V entrance 2002a depending on the movement position of the second accessory main body 2402. In addition, it is possible to entertain by performing a driving operation aiming at the prize winning opening 1402, and at this time, the second movable accessory is provided by an arc-shaped decoration as identification means provided in the prize winning prize unit 1400. Since the movable range of 2400 can be easily recognized and the position of the movable second accessory body 2402 can be grasped, it becomes easy to take the timing to hit the game ball into the accessory winning port 1402, and the player's interest in the game Can be suppressed.

  Moreover, since the arc-shaped decoration is provided as an identification means for identifying the movable range of the second movable accessory 2400, the movable accessory is not arranged in the center accessory as in the conventional pachinko gaming machine. Also, the movable range of the second movable accessory 2400 can be recognized by the player. That is, since the conventional center accessory can be abolished, the movable range of the second movable accessory 2400 can be arbitrarily selected without being caught by the center accessory, and the second movable accessory 2400 can be moved. The range can be broadened to make the movement of the second movable accessory 2400 enjoyable, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the movement of the second movable accessory 2400. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the prize winning unit 1400 including the prize winning port 1402 is provided with an arc-shaped decoration as an identification means for identifying the movable range of the second movable accessory 2400, a pair of movable pieces The prize winning opening 1402 opened and closed by 1404 can be made as close as possible to the identification means, and when the player pays attention to the prize winning opening 1402, a part of the second movable accessory 2400 movable together with the identification means Entering the field of view, it is possible to match the opening / closing timing of the prize winning port 1402 and the movable timing (movement timing) of the second movable accessory 2400 with almost no movement of the line of sight. This makes it possible to entertain a game ball driving operation and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since the prize winning port 1402 and the identification means can be made as close as possible, if the attention is paid to the prize winning prize opening 1402, one of the second movable accessories 2400 can be moved together with the identification means without moving the line of sight. The eye movement for opening / closing of the prize winning opening 1402 and the movement timing of the second movable accessory 2400 can be reduced as much as possible, and eye fatigue can be reduced early. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the game and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, when the arc-shaped side frame portion 2402b of the second accessory main body 2402 that reciprocates substantially coincides with the arc-shaped decoration formed on the flange portion 1418 and the front decoration portion 1420 in the accessory winning prize opening unit 1400, It is possible to recognize that the dual accessory main body 2402 has reached the movable end, and it is possible to grasp the movement position of the second accessory main body 2402 by the arc-shaped deviation of each other. An identification unit that recognizes the movable range and the movement timing of the second accessory main body 2402 to achieve the above-described effects can be realized.

  In addition, since a plurality of substantially concentric circular arcs centered on the approximate center of the game area 605 are formed in the accessory winning award unit 1400 and the second accessory main body 2402, the appearance and The appearance of the dual-effector main body 2402 can be unified, and the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game board 4) can be improved to prevent the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  In addition, the second accessory main body 2402 of the second movable accessory 2400 is formed in a frame shape so that the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be seen from the player side through the inside of the frame. The dual-purpose main body 2402 becomes larger, and the second movable accessory 2400 can be made more conspicuous by the large second-purpose main body 2402. However, since the second accessory body 2402 can easily enter the field of view and the movable range can be recognized by the identification means, it is easy to take the driving timing according to the reciprocating movement of the second accessory body 2402. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by delighting the operation to enter the prize winning port 1402.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is arranged between a transparent gaming panel 599 that forms a rear end of a gaming area 605 into which a gaming ball is to be placed and a liquid crystal display device 640 disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 599. A second movable accessory 2400 in which a frame-like second accessory main body 2402 capable of visually recognizing the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 is moved in the left-right direction by the second accessory driving unit 2404 is disposed. That is, since the large second movable accessory 2400 is arranged such that the center accessory itself in the conventional pachinko gaming machine moves in the left-right direction, the large accessory that was not movable in the past can move. Thus, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In addition, since the second movable accessory 2400 is arranged on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599 that partitions the game area 605, the game area where the game balls are actually distributed even if the second movable accessory 2400 is enlarged. 605 does not become narrow, it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game balls that are distributed, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  In addition, the design of the game board 4 can be greatly changed by moving the large second movable accessory 2400 in the game area 605 of the game board 4, and this change can strongly attract the player's interest. In addition, since the movement of the second movable accessory 2400 can be recognized even from a distance to increase the appeal to the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be selected as a pachinko gaming machine to play, It is possible to entertain the game by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, when a game ball is received at the first start port 1602 in the game area 605, the pair of movable pieces 1604 are expanded to allow the game ball to be awarded to the prize winning port 1402, and the prize winning port is obtained. When the game ball is received at 1402, it is supplied to the second accessory body 2402 of the second movable accessory 2400 and guided by the guide paths 2408 and 2410. Not only the movement of the accessory 2400 but also the movement of the game ball circulating in the second movable accessory 2400 can be enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered. Further, when the game balls released from the winning ball discharge port 2412 of the second movable accessory 2400 are distributed to the first V inlet 2002a in the first movable accessory 2200, the player is advantageous by the special advantageous game state generating means. Since a special advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) occurs, whether or not the game ball released from the second movable accessory 2400 to the first movable accessory 2200 is distributed to the first V inlet 2002a. Thus, it is possible to raise the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of a special advantageous gaming state by thrilling and thrilling the player, and to prevent the player from having fun and reducing the interest in the game.

  In addition, since the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be seen through the frame of the second accessory body 2402 formed in a frame shape, the display screen is as if the second accessory body 2402 is movable. It is possible to make an illusion as if it is moving, and it is possible to make the pachinko gaming machine 1 have a different sensation from the conventional pachinko gaming machine. it can.

  Further, since the large and frame-like second movable accessory 2400 is arranged on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 599, the three-dimensional second accessory main body 2402 in the second movable accessory 2400 can be used to make a pachinko gaming machine. It is possible to characterize one model, and it can give an impression that looks different from the pattern or pattern drawn on the front of the game board like a conventional pachinko machine, In addition to being able to achieve differentiation, it is possible to increase the possibility of selecting the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a pachinko gaming machine that strongly attracts the player's interest and plays.

  In addition, since the large frame-shaped second accessory body 2402 is always movable in the left-right direction, the player's interest can be always attracted to the second movable accessory 2400, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to expect an effect that the present pachinko gaming machine 1 can be selected as a pachinko gaming machine to be played. In addition, since the second movable accessory 2400 is always movable, the timing of the game ball winning timing to the bonus winning port 1402 and the timing of guiding the game ball guided by the second accessory main body 2402 are taken. It is possible to make it easier to play the game ball so that the game ball is received at the winning prize winning opening 1402 at a desired timing, and it is possible to entertain the drive operation and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. can do.

  Furthermore, since the size of the second movable accessory 2400 in the vertical and horizontal directions is 2/3 to 1/3 of the size of the game area 605, the second movable accessory 2400 has a conspicuous size. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and to reliably achieve the above-described effects.

  In addition, the winning ball receiving unit 2406 of the upper frame portion 2402a of the second accessory body 2402 can distribute the game balls from the bonus winning port 1402 to either the left or right, so Depending on whether the game ball is distributed to the left or right side in the winning ball receiving unit 2406, it is possible to attract the player's interest and to focus on the game ball circulating in the second movable accessory 2400, It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball in the second movable combination 2400 and to prevent the interest from deteriorating. Further, since the game ball is released from the middle of the second movable accessory 2400 in the vertical direction by the lateral guide path 2410 and the winning ball discharge port 2412, the game ball is released from the lower frame portion 2402c of the second movable accessory 2400. Can be made relatively high from the winning ball discharge port 2412 to the lower end of the game area 605, and the game ball is moved to the discharge destination of the winning ball discharge port 2412. It becomes possible to arrange the first movable combination 2200 to be divided, and further various movements can be given to the game ball released from the second movable combination 2400, and the movement of the game medium is more enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

  In addition, since the game balls that circulate through the lateral guiding path 2410 and the winning ball discharge port 2412 of the second accessory body 2402 can be visually recognized by the player, the winning combination winning port 1402 is won and the second movable accessory 2400 is awarded. The game ball received inward can be seen guided through the lateral guide path 2410, and it is possible to recognize when the game ball is released from the winning ball discharge port 2412. Or distrust can be prevented, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Further, the winning ball discharge port 2412 of the second accessory body 2402 is a croon, and the game ball released from the second accessory body 2402 is turned downward at the winning ball discharge port 2412 and then released downward. In addition to being able to entertain the movement of the game ball, the game ball stays there for a predetermined time as the game ball turns, and by temporarily delaying the flow of the game ball, On the other hand, it is possible to expect the effect that the expectation for the first movable accessory 2200 on the downstream side can be matured and the expectation can be further enhanced, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game. Can do.

  In addition, since the second movable accessory 2400 is movable in the left-right direction, and the release position for releasing the game ball also changes depending on the movable position, the first movable accessory disposed downstream of the winning ball discharge port 2412. The player's expectation can also be enhanced by whether or not the game ball is released at a position that is likely to be distributed to the first V entrance 2002a in 2200. In other words, the movement of the second movable accessory 2400 and the release timing of the game ball can make the player throbbing, attracting the player's interest to the second movable accessory 2400, and the second It is possible to entertain the movement of the game balls in the movable combination 2400 and the second movable combination 2400 and to suppress the interest in the game from being lowered.

  Further, the second motor 2430 of the second movable accessory 2400 is rotationally driven to rotate the driving pulley 2436, and the belt 2440 wound around the driving pulley 2436 and the driven pulley 2438 is rotated by the rotation of the driving pulley 2436. Accordingly, the second accessory body 2402 can be moved in the left-right direction via the connecting slider 2442 fixed to the belt 2440, and the second movable accessory 2400 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized. can do.

  Further, since the slide position of the connection slider 2442 is detected by the pair of left and right position detection sensors 2448, the rotation direction of the second motor 2430 is switched based on the detection of the detection piece 2442c. The slider 2442 can be accurately folded back at a desired position, and the reciprocating movement of the connecting slider 2442, that is, the second accessory main body 2402, can be moved uniformly without unevenness. By reciprocating 2402, the second movable accessory 2400 that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be realized.

  In addition, since the second movable accessory 2400 is provided in the box-shaped back box 621, at least dust or dust can be prevented from entering the back box 621 from the rear side of the game board 4. And, when dust or the like adheres to the movable part of the second movable accessory 2400, the second movable accessory 2400 is prevented from moving favorably, thereby preventing the game from being interrupted. It is possible to prevent a player's interest in games from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball driven into the game area 605 by the player is received in the first start port 1602, a predetermined first special random number is acquired and acquired. The game ball received in the winning combination winning port 1402 in which the winning of the game ball can be made according to one special random number is supplied to the rolling part 2210 of the first winning combination body 2206 in the first movable combination 2200. Then, after rolling on the rolling part 2210, it is distributed to any one of the first V inlet 2002a, the first discharge port 2212, and the second discharge port 2214 as distribution ports. And if it distributes to the 1st V entrance 2002a, it can play a game which a "big hit" game advantageous to a player generate | occur | produces. At that time, the first accessory body 2206 for distributing the game balls moves up and down while swinging compared to the one that simply rotates or swings like a conventional pachinko gaming machine. Make complex movements. More specifically, when each support pin 2240 is revolved with a predetermined revolution angle phase difference (about 90 degrees), the height of the other support pin 2240 is increased or decreased with respect to one support pin 2240. In other words, when the heights of the pair of support pins 2240 are alternately switched, the first accessory body 2206 swings in a seesaw shape. In addition, one support pin 2240 is inserted into the support hole 2220 of the first accessory body 2206, and when the one support pin 2240 revolves, the support hole 2220 of the first accessory body 2206 also revolves. Since the support hole 2220 moves circumferentially in the up / down / left / right direction, the first accessory body 2206 also moves up / down. Thus, since the pair of support pins 2240 revolve, the first accessory body can move up and down while swinging like a seesaw. It is possible to recognize that the object 2200 moves completely different from the previous movement, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the player from being strongly attracted and to reduce the interest in the game.

  In addition, since the first movable object body 2206 of the first movable accessory 2200 moves up and down while swinging, it moves completely different from the movement of the movable accessory in the conventional pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be selected as a pachinko gaming machine to play by enhancing the appeal to the player and increasing the appeal of the player.

  In addition, since the first accessory body 2206 having the rolling portion 2210 in which the game ball can roll moves up and down while swinging, the game ball supplied to the rolling portion 2210 is moved to the first accessory body 2206. The rolling speed of the game ball that rolls on the rolling portion 2210 is high due to the vertical movement of the first accessory body 2206 when rolling in the left-right direction. It is possible to give various movements to the game sphere by becoming slow or slow, and to be able to focus on the movement of the game sphere and to entertain the movement, thereby suppressing the interest in the game from being reduced. Can do.

  Furthermore, as described above, the first accessory main body 2206 moves up and down while swinging, so that various movements can be given to the game balls supplied on the rolling unit 2210. Depending on whether or not the game ball rolling is distributed to the first V entrance 2002a, the player can be thrilled and excited by the movement of the first accessory body 2206 together with the movement of the game ball. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation of the game and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the first accessory driving unit 2208 can move the first accessory body 2206 up and down while only swinging the first accessory body 2206 by supporting the first accessory body 2206 with the pair of support pins 2240. Compared with the case where the accessory body is moved up and down together with the swinging part after the accessory body is swung by the first action drive unit, the load on the support pin 2240 can be reduced. 2208 can be prevented from increasing in size, the degree of freedom of arrangement on the game board 4 can be increased, and the first movable accessory 2200 can be arranged at a more effective position. It is possible to entertain the movement of 2200 and to suppress the interest of the game from decreasing.

  Furthermore, since the revolution radius of the left and right support pins 2240 that are separated in the substantially horizontal direction is substantially the same radius, the first role is compared with the case where the revolution radius and the vertical position of the revolution center are made different. The vertical dimension of the object driving unit 2208 can be made relatively small, and the first accessory driving unit 2208 can be downsized. Accordingly, since the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first movable combination 2200 is improved, it is possible to arrange the first movable combination 2200 at a more effective position, and the effects described in detail can be reliably achieved. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a player's game falls.

  In addition, since the support pin 2240 is revolved by rotating the rotating body 2236 by the first motor 2230, the support pin 2240 can be revolved at a substantially constant speed, and the movement of the first accessory body 2206 As a result, the game ball on the rolling portion 2210 can be rolled well, and the movement of the first accessory body 2206 is enjoyed along with the game ball movement, so that the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed. Further, the first motor 2230 revolves the support pin 2240, and the revolving speed of the support pin 2240 can be easily changed as compared with the case where a solenoid is used. The movement of the first actor body 2206 can be easily changed by speeding up or slowing down the movement of the first actor body 2206. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the movement of the first accessory body 2206 can be changed, the movement of the game ball rolling on the rolling part 2210 also changes by changing the movement of the first accessory body 2206. Various movements can be imparted to the game ball, and the movement of the game ball can be more enjoyed to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the rotating body 2236 on which the support pin 2240 is revolved is rotated by the first motor 2230 via the first drive gear 2232 and the first driven gear 2234, so that the axis of the rotating body 2236 is rotated. The position where the first motor 2230 is disposed can be decentered, and the first motor 2230 can be disposed at a good position without being affected by the size of the first motor 2230, the revolution radius of the support pin 2240, etc. It is possible to surely embody the first movable accessory 2200 that exhibits the above-described effects, and to prevent the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  Further, the rotation of the first motor 2230 is transmitted to the rotating body 2236 by meshing the first driving gear 2232 and the first driven gear 2234, and the rotating body 2236 is rotated using a pair of pulleys and a belt. Compared to the case of the above, the transmission loss due to slippage between the pulley and the belt, the elongation of the belt, etc. can be reduced as much as possible, and the rotation of the first motor 2230 can be reliably transmitted to the rotating body 2236. In addition, it is possible to reduce as much as possible the occurrence of movement variation between products and movement variation due to secular change, and the movement of the first movable accessory 2200 differs depending on the pachinko gaming machine 1 (product). To prevent the player from feeling distrust and to prevent malfunction during the game, and to suppress the interest in the game from deteriorating It can be.

  Further, since the support pin 2240 inserted into the long hole 2222 of the first accessory body 2206 slides inside the long hole 2222 via the roller member 2250, the sliding resistance within the long hole 2222. Can be made as small as possible, the support pin 2240 can be slid well within the elongated hole 2222 of the first accessory body 2206, and the first accessory body 2206 can be moved favorably. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating by delighting the movement of the main body 2206.

  In addition, a rotation detection sensor 2248 capable of detecting the revolution position of the pair of support pins 2240 is provided, and the revolution detection sensor 2248 detects the revolution position of the support pin 2240 and performs feedback control, thereby supporting pin 2240. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reproducibility of the movement of the first accessory body 2206 that moves up and down while swinging, and the movement of the first accessory body 2206 is different from the originally intended movement. The player's interest in the game is reduced by preventing the first actor main body 2206 from moving unintentionally and making the player feel untrustworthy. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is inserted and disposed in the opening 599e of the game panel 599 when the game ball driven into the game area 605 is received into the general winning opening 1520 of the receiving member 1514. After being guided in a predetermined direction along the panel surface by the guide path portion 1524, it is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 599 from the discharge portion 1526 of the receiving member 1514. Since the space on the back side of the game panel 599 is not divided, the space on the back side of the game panel 599 can be made as large as possible as a single space. The movable accessory unit 2004, the decorative body 2100, and the like can be arranged without any problem. Can be interest in the game attracts a strong interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, a guide path 1524 for guiding the received game ball is inserted and arranged in the opening 599e of the game panel 599, and the protrusion amount of the receiving member 1514 on the rear surface of the game panel 599 is made as much as possible. Since the number can be reduced, the movable accessory unit 2004 can be arranged without any problem so that the rear side of the general winning opening 1520 is also within the installation range. That is, since a large movable accessory unit 2004 having a wide movable range can be disposed on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 599, the pachinko gaming machine 1 having an impression different from that of the conventional pachinko gaming machine is obtained. It is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, since the game ball received in the general winning opening 1520 is guided along the panel surface of the game panel 599 by the guide path portion 1524 and then discharged to the rear side of the game panel 599, the liquid crystal display device 640 is provided. It is also possible to arrange the general winning opening 1520 on the front side of the game, and the general winning opening 1520 can be arranged at an arbitrary position in the gaming area 605, so that the general winning opening 1520 in the gaming area 605, etc. The layout can be diversified, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained. Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can enjoy the movement of the game ball is less boring and has an interest in gaming. It can suppress that it falls.

  Further, since the predetermined decorative body 2100, the movable accessory unit 2004, and the like are arranged on the rear side of the gaming panel 599 as a transparent plate, the conventional pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the front of the gaming panel 599 is decorated and In comparison, it becomes possible to move the player's line of sight to the decorative body 2100 or the like that is farther from the player side than the front of the game panel 599. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Also, at first glance, since the decorative body 2100 and the like arranged on the rear side of the game panel 599 can be seen, the pressure feeling as in the conventional pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced, and a gaming board surface with a sense of depth can be obtained. As a pachinko gaming machine 1 with a high visual sense of opening, it is possible to expect the effect of relieving the stress of the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the stress.

  Furthermore, since the decorative body 2100 and the like are arranged on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599, it is possible to prevent the game balls circulating on the front side from becoming difficult to see compared to the case where a moving image is displayed. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game balls circulating in the game area 605 and to characterize the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the decorative body 2100 or the like, and to increase the appeal to the player and play This pachinko gaming machine 1 can be selected as a pachinko gaming machine.

  Further, since the front side of the opening 599e is closed by the opaque flange portion 1528 of the receiving member 1514, it is possible to block the appearance of the cloudy inner peripheral end surface of the opening 599e in the game panel 599 from the player side, It can be set as the pachinko gaming machine 1 which can prevent the designability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being lowered and attract the player's interest. In addition, the opaque flange portion 1528 can prevent the guide path portion 1524 from being seen from the player side, thereby preventing the player from seeing a game ball that is not related to the game flowing through the guide path portion 1524. It is possible to prevent the interest of the music from deteriorating.

  Further, since the gap (groove) formed between the opening 599e and the guide path portion 1524 can be closed by the flange portion 1528, the game ball flowing in the game area 605 does not move unexpectedly due to the gap. It is possible to prevent the player from getting irritated or distrusted by the unexpected movement of the game ball, thereby suppressing the interest in the game from being lowered.

  Further, the game ball received in the general winning opening 1520 is guided to the outer periphery of the game panel 599 along the panel surface of the game panel 599 by the guide path portion 1524, that is, near the outer periphery of the game area 605 and then the game panel 599. Since the game ball is discharged to the rear side, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being discharged at an intermediate portion in the game area 605 and to make the rear side of the game panel 599 usable as widely as possible. Thus, a larger decorative body 2100, a movable accessory unit 2004 having a wide movable range, and the like can be arranged to be differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines 1, and the player can be differentiated by the provided decorative body 2100 stages. It is possible to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced by attracting the interest of the game.

  In addition, since the effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 according to the game state, it is possible to entertain not only the movement of the game ball but also the effect by the effect image, making the game difficult to get tired and less interest in the game. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be viewed through the transparent game panel 599, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 and the game area 605 in which game balls are distributed are made independent of each other. It is possible to display a larger effect image without narrowing the game area 605, to entertain the player with a more powerful effect image, and to play a game ball in the game area 605 It is possible to fully enjoy the movement of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, the decoration body 2100 and the like can be easily supported at a predetermined position simply by attaching the back box 621 provided with the decoration body 2100 and the like to the rear side of the panel holder 600, and the assembly of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is simplified. be able to. Further, since the decorative body 2100 and the like are provided in the box-shaped back box 621, at least dust and dust can be prevented from entering the back box 621 from the rear side of the game board 4. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to dirt or malfunction caused by dust or the like adhering to the decorative body 2100, the movable accessory unit 2004, or the like. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

  Further, since the liquid crystal display device 640 is supported on the rear side of the box-shaped back box 621, the back box is placed between the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 and the rear surface of the transparent gaming panel 599. A wide space having substantially the same depth as the depth of 621 (the depth in the front-rear direction) can be formed on the rear side of the game panel 599. Since the decorative body 2100 and the movable accessory unit 2004 are arranged in this wide space, the three-dimensional decorative body 2100 and the movable accessory unit 2004 having a depth can be arranged. This pachinko machine can be selected as a pachinko machine to be differentiated from the pachinko gaming machine 1 and played, and this pachinko gaming machine 1 can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. .

  Further, since the liquid crystal display device 640 is supported on the rear side of the back box 621, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 is disposed on the rear side of the game board surface by a predetermined distance (the distance of the depth of the back box 621). Will be. In other words, since the liquid crystal display device 640 is disposed at a position farther away from the player than the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the focal distance for the effect image is likely to be longer, and the occurrence of eye fatigue is suppressed and the player's It can suppress that interest falls.

  Furthermore, since the depth of the game board installation recess 510 can be increased, the depth from the panel holder 600, that is, the depth of the back box 621 (the depth of the back box) can be increased. As a result, the decorative body 2100 and the like can be reliably arranged on the rear side of the game panel 599, and a larger decorative body 2100 and a movable accessory unit 2004 having a wide movable range can be arranged. It is possible to provide a game board 4 with an apparently different appearance from a typical game board, and this game board 4 strongly attracts the player's interest and gives a sense of expectation to the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 It can be set as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can suppress the interest from being lowered.

  When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 1520 or the like, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out from the winning ball unit 800 (payout unit), so that the game ball is received in the general winning opening 1520 or the like for the player. Thus, the driving operation aiming at the general winning opening 1520 or the like can be performed. Further, when the player pays attention to the general prize opening 1520 and the like at that time, the decorative body 2100 arranged on the rear side of the general prize opening 1520 enters the field of view. Since there is no flow path member to be used, the decorative body 2100 on the rear side can be visually recognized in a good state, and a desired decoration effect effect by the decorative body 2100 can be surely exerted to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. can do.

  The present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the abnormality determination unit 2578 determines that an abnormality has occurred, the fraud warning indicator 2005 is caused to emit light, and an abnormality occurs a plurality of times after a predetermined time has elapsed or within a predetermined time. When it is determined, a warning image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 and a full-scale warning is given. However, the warning image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 at the same time as the fraud warning indicator 2005 emits light. You may make it display.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the hitting ball launching device 650, the first starting port 1602, the second starting port 1604, the winning combination winning unit 1400, the movable accessory unit 2004, the stored ball detecting sensor 2312, the main A control board 1350 and a peripheral control board 2600 are provided. The hitting ball launcher 650 can hit a game ball toward a game area 605 formed on the game board 4. The first start port 1602 and the second start port 1604 are provided in the game area 605 so that game balls launched by the hit ball launching device 650 can enter. The prize winning unit 1400 can receive the game ball launched by the hitting ball launcher 650 by opening and closing the movable piece 1404. The movable accessory unit 2004 includes at least a second movable accessory 2400. The second movable accessory 2400 is arranged below the accessory winning award unit 1400. The second accessory provided with the second V entrance 2002b, which is a specific prize opening that allows the game balls received by the prize winning unit 1400 to enter the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1404. A main body 2402 is provided. The second accessory body 2402 can move in the left-right direction. The storage ball detection sensor 2312 receives a game ball received by the prize winning unit 1400 by the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1404 of the prize winning unit 1400 at the second V inlet 2002b provided in the second prize main body 2402. The game ball received by the prize winning unit 1400 can be detected before entering the ball. The main control board 1350 opens and closes the movable piece 1404 of the bonus winning unit 1400 when the game ball launched by the ball launcher 650 enters the first start port 1602 or the second start port 1604. In addition to the control, the game balls received by the prize winning unit 1400 by the opening and closing operation of the movable piece 1404 are further provided in the second accessory body 2402 of the second movable accessory 2400 in the movable accessory unit 2004. The transition to a special advantageous gaming state in which a special benefit is given to the player is triggered when the player enters the second V entrance 2002b. The peripheral control board 2600 controls various effects by the logo decoration member 2160 and the like based on various commands from the main control board 1350.

  The second movable accessory 2400 of the movable accessory unit 2004 further includes a second accessory driving unit 2404. The second accessory driving unit 2404 is disposed on the rear side of the upper frame portion 2402a of the second accessory main body 2402, and moves and drives the second accessory main body 2402 in the left-right direction. The second accessory driving unit 2404 is fixed to a second motor 2430 that is an electric drive source for a movable accessory arranged so that the rotation axis faces in the front-rear direction, and the rotation shaft of the second motor 2430. The second drive gear 2432, the second driven gear 2434 that meshes with the second drive gear 2432, the drive pulley 2436 that rotates with the second driven gear 3434, and a predetermined distance away from the drive pulley 2436 in the left-right direction. Driven pulley 2438, a belt 2440 wound around the drive pulley 2436 and the driven pulley 2438, and a connecting slider fixed to a predetermined position of the belt 2440 and connected to the rear portion of the upper frame portion 2402a of the second accessory main body 2402. 2442 and a guide shaft 2444 for guiding the connecting slider 2442 in the left-right direction. The second accessory driving unit 2404 supports the driven pulley 2438 in a rotatable manner, and urges the driven pulley 2438 in a direction away from the driving pulley 2436 to apply a predetermined tension to the belt 2440. A pair of left and right position detection sensors 2448 that are arranged a predetermined distance apart in the left and right direction and can detect the position of the connecting slider 2442 in the left and right direction, a second motor 2430, a second driven gear 2434, a drive pulley 2436, and a tension applying mechanism 2446, a guide shaft 2444, a left / right position detection sensor 2448 and the like, and a base member 2450 formed by bending a metal plate. The left / right position detection sensor 2448 includes a left position detection sensor 2448L that detects the left end position of the connection slider 2442, and a right position detection sensor 2448R that detects the right end position of the connection slider 2442. The connecting slider 2442 in the second accessory driving unit 2404 extends in the left-right direction and has a shaft insertion portion 2442a through which the guide shaft 2444 can be inserted. The roller 2442b is made to be capable of rolling, and the roller 2442b rolls on the guide shaft 2444 so that the connecting slider 2442 is smoothly guided in the left-right direction. The connecting slider 2442 includes a detection piece 2442c that protrudes rearward from the approximate center in the left-right direction and can be detected by the left-right position detection sensor 2448. The detection piece 2442c is separated from each other in the left-right direction. By being detected by the detection sensor 2448, the left and right moving end positions of the connecting slider 2442 can be detected. When the detection piece 2442c of the connection slider 2442 disposed between the pair of left and right position detection sensors 2448 is detected by the pair of left and right position detection sensors 2448, the second motor 2430 is configured such that the second motor 2430 is reversed. 2442, that is, the second accessory body 2402 reciprocates in the left-right direction. Note that the distance at which the left position detection sensor 2448L and the right position detection sensor 2448R are disposed, in which the detection piece 2442c of the connection slider 2442 is separated in the left-right direction, is defined as the reciprocation range of the connection slider 2442, that is, the second accessory main body. The second accessory main body 2402 can reciprocate as a reciprocating range of 2402.

  The main control board 1350 drives the second motor 2430 to drive the second motor 2430 based on the detection signal from the left and right position detection sensor 2448, that is, the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L and the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R. Second accessory drive control means 2575 is provided for reciprocating the connecting slider 2442 connected to the accessory body 2402 in the left-right direction. As a result, the second accessory body 2402 coupled to the coupling slider 2442 can reciprocate repeatedly within the reciprocating range. Further, the main control board 1350 notifies that the detection piece 2442c provided on the connection slider 2442 is detected by the left position detection sensor 2448L provided at the left end position based on the control signal from the second accessory drive control means 2575. When the control signal is input, a left movement completion command is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600, while the detection piece 2442c provided on the connection slider 2442 is detected by the right position detection sensor 2448R provided at the right end position. When a control signal for transmitting is transmitted, a right movement completion command is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600.

  The peripheral control board 2600 includes a command receiving unit 2650 that receives a control command transmitted from the main control board 1350, and a command received by the command receiving unit 2650 includes a left movement completion command or a right movement completion command. The second accessory main body position information acquisition means 2666 for grasping the position of the connection slider 2442 connected to the second accessory main body 2402 based on the fact that the second accessory main body position information acquisition means 2666 is connected. Based on the position of the slider 2442 and the detection signal of the holding ball detection sensor 2312, an aspect of the effect is selected and the liquid crystal display device 640 that is the effect device is controlled to execute the selected effect mode. Anomaly determination is made, such as whether or not there is a problem in the movement of the effect changing means 2673 and the connecting slider 2442. When the moving accessory abnormality determination control means 2653 and the movable accessory abnormality determination control means 2653 determine that there is a problem in the movement of the connecting slider 2442, the logo decoration board 2162 includes groups L0 to L7. And a light emission effect control means 2654 for notifying a hall clerk or the like that there is a problem in the movement of the connecting slider 2442 by controlling the light emission drive of the LED. The movable accessory abnormality determination control means 2653 is performed in a 16 ms steady process in the peripheral control side reset process. For example, a left movement completion command is extracted and a timer is started to start a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 5s is set, and the set time is at least a reciprocating movement of the second accessory body 2402 in a state where the movement of the connecting slider 2442, that is, the movement of the second accessory body 2402 is not difficult. The range is equal to or more than the time spent by the second accessory main body 2402 on the outward path or the time spent on the return path.) The command received by the command receiving means 2650 does not include the right movement completion command, The movement completion command is extracted and the timer is started to complete the left movement to the command received by the command receiving means 2650 within a predetermined period. If no command is included, it is determined that some abnormality has occurred in the movement of the connecting slider 2442, and in order to notify the store clerk or the like to that effect, the light emitting effect control means 2654 is informed with the logo decoration board. 2162 is instructed to control the light emission drive of the LEDs mounted as the group L0. Based on the command, the light emission effect control means 2654 emits the LEDs mounted on the logo decoration board 2162 as the group L0, so that the letter “P” of “Pink LADY” emits light.

  As described above, the game balls received by the prize winning unit 1400 by the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1404 of the prize winning unit 1400 enter the second V inlet 2002b provided in the second bonus body 2402. In the meantime, when detected by the storage ball detection sensor 2312, a detection signal from the storage ball detection sensor 2312 and a connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory main body 2402 that reciprocates in the reciprocating movement range. 118 is selected based on the position of the display, and the selected display mode is controlled by the liquid crystal display device 640, and the one shown in FIG. 118 (d) and FIG. 118 (e) is executed. It has become so. That is, the aspect of the selected effect is drawn on the liquid crystal display device 640. As a result, the timing at which the game balls received in the prize winning unit 1400 are distributed to the second V entrance 2002b provided in the second prize body 2402, that is, the game balls that have entered the prize winning unit 1400. Can suggest to the player the timing of entering the second V entrance 2002b provided in the second accessory body 2402. In addition, the second slider driving unit 2404 including the second motor 2430, the second driven gear 2434, and the like has a problem, and the movement of the connecting slider 2442 is within the reciprocating range of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402. When it becomes difficult to move, the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L or the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R arranged at both ends of the reciprocation range of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402 The detection signal is not input to the main control board 1350. For example, after the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L is input to the main control board 1350, the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R is not input, or the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R is received. The detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L may not be input after being input. In this state, the main control board 1350 can generate a left movement completion command based on the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L and transmit it to the peripheral control board 2600, but the right position detection sensor 2448R. Since no detection signal is input, the right movement completion command cannot be generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600 indefinitely, or the right movement is completed based on the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R. Even if the command can be generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600, since the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L is not input, the left movement completion command is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600 indefinitely. May not be possible. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 2600 cannot receive the right movement completion command within a predetermined period after receiving the left movement completion command, or within a predetermined period after receiving the right movement completion command. When it is not possible to receive the left movement completion command, it is determined that the movement of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402 is difficult to move, and this is notified to the clerk of the hall. In order to notify, the light emitting effect control means 2654 is instructed to control the light emission driving of the LEDs mounted as the group L0 on the logo decoration board 2162. Accordingly, it is possible to notify a hall clerk or the like that there is a problem in the movement of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the hitting ball launching device 650, the first starting port 1602, the second starting port 1604, the bonus winning unit 1400, the movable accessory unit 2004, the main control board 1350, the peripheral control board 2600. It has. The hitting ball launcher 650 can hit a game ball toward a game area 605 formed on the game board 4. The first start port 1602 and the second start port 1604 are provided in the game area 605 so that game balls launched by the hit ball launching device 650 can enter. The prize winning unit 1400 can receive the game ball launched by the hitting ball launcher 650 by opening and closing the movable piece 1404. The movable accessory unit 2004 includes at least a second movable accessory 2400. The second movable accessory 2400 is arranged below the accessory winning award unit 1400. The second accessory provided with the second V entrance 2002b, which is a specific prize opening that allows the game balls received by the prize winning unit 1400 to enter the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1404. A main body 2402 is provided. The second accessory body 2402 can move in the left-right direction. The main control board 1350 opens and closes the movable piece 1404 of the bonus winning unit 1400 when the game ball launched by the ball launcher 650 enters the first start port 1602 or the second start port 1604. In addition to the control, the game balls received by the prize winning unit 1400 by the opening and closing operation of the movable piece 1404 are further provided in the second accessory body 2402 of the second movable accessory 2400 in the movable accessory unit 2004. The transition to a special advantageous gaming state in which a special benefit is given to the player is triggered when the player enters the second V entrance 2002b. The peripheral control board 2600 controls various effects by the logo decoration member 2160 and the like based on various commands from the main control board 1350.

  The second movable accessory 2400 of the movable accessory unit 2004 further includes a second accessory driving unit 2404. The second accessory driving unit 2404 is disposed on the rear side of the upper frame portion 2402a of the second accessory main body 2402, and moves and drives the second accessory main body 2402 in the left-right direction. The second accessory driving unit 2404 is fixed to a second motor 2430 that is an electric drive source for a movable accessory arranged so that the rotation axis faces in the front-rear direction, and the rotation shaft of the second motor 2430. The second drive gear 2432, the second driven gear 2434 that meshes with the second drive gear 2432, the drive pulley 2436 that rotates with the second driven gear 3434, and a predetermined distance away from the drive pulley 2436 in the left-right direction. Driven pulley 2438, a belt 2440 wound around the drive pulley 2436 and the driven pulley 2438, and a connecting slider fixed to a predetermined position of the belt 2440 and connected to the rear portion of the upper frame portion 2402a of the second accessory main body 2402. 2442 and a guide shaft 2444 for guiding the connecting slider 2442 in the left-right direction. The second accessory driving unit 2404 supports the driven pulley 2438 in a rotatable manner, and urges the driven pulley 2438 in a direction away from the driving pulley 2436 to apply a predetermined tension to the belt 2440. A pair of left and right position detection sensors 2448 that are arranged a predetermined distance apart in the left and right direction and can detect the position of the connecting slider 2442 in the left and right direction, a second motor 2430, a second driven gear 2434, a drive pulley 2436, and a tension applying mechanism 2446, a guide shaft 2444, a left / right position detection sensor 2448 and the like, and a base member 2450 formed by bending a metal plate. The left / right position detection sensor 2448 includes a left position detection sensor 2448L that detects the left end position of the connection slider 2442, and a right position detection sensor 2448R that detects the right end position of the connection slider 2442. The connecting slider 2442 in the second accessory driving unit 2404 extends in the left-right direction and has a shaft insertion portion 2442a through which the guide shaft 2444 can be inserted. The roller 2442b is made to be capable of rolling, and the roller 2442b rolls on the guide shaft 2444 so that the connecting slider 2442 is smoothly guided in the left-right direction. The connecting slider 2442 includes a detection piece 2442c that protrudes rearward from the approximate center in the left-right direction and can be detected by the left-right position detection sensor 2448. The detection piece 2442c is separated from each other in the left-right direction. By being detected by the detection sensor 2448, the left and right moving end positions of the connecting slider 2442 can be detected. When the detection piece 2442c of the connection slider 2442 disposed between the pair of left and right position detection sensors 2448 is detected by the pair of left and right position detection sensors 2448, the second motor 2430 is configured such that the second motor 2430 is reversed. 2442, that is, the second accessory body 2402 reciprocates in the left-right direction. Note that the distance at which the left position detection sensor 2448L and the right position detection sensor 2448R are disposed, in which the detection piece 2442c of the connection slider 2442 is separated in the left-right direction, is defined as the reciprocation range of the connection slider 2442, that is, the second accessory main body. The second accessory main body 2402 can reciprocate as a reciprocating range of 2402.

  The storage unit 2204 is disposed below the first accessory body 2206 in the first accessory unit 2202, and can enter the first V inlet 2002a and capture the game ball released downward from the first accessory body 2206. The first V-entry catching portion 2260 and the first V-entry catching portion 2260 disposed on the left and right sides of the first V-entry catching portion 2260 can catch the game ball released downward from the second discharge port 2214 of the first accessory body 2206. The first lost ball capturing portion 2262, and the game that is disposed in front of the first lost ball capturing portion 2262 and the first V incoming ball capturing portion 2260 and is discharged from the first discharge port 2212 of the first accessory body 2206. A storage shelf 2264 that is configured to be able to capture a ball and that is formed so that the center side in the left-right direction and the front side in the front-rear direction are lowered, and that is capable of storing the captured game ball, and is disposed at the front end of the storage shelf 2264 Or and a reservoir plate 2266 a game ball to the reservoir rack 2264 allows or retention disabling retention by falling.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the drive mechanism of the storage plate 2266 in the storage unit 2204 is an electrical drive source for storage having a plunger that is disposed on the lower side of the storage shelf 2264 and can be moved backward and forward. Storage plate solenoid 2304, slide member 2306 slidable in the front-rear direction by storage plate solenoid 2304, and crank in which storage plate 2266 formed at the front end moves in the up-down direction when slide member 2306 slides in the front-rear direction. A member 2308 and a storage plate position sensor 2310 capable of detecting the movement position of the storage plate 2266 in the crank member 2308 are provided.

  The slide member 2306 extends from the rear side of the storage plate solenoid 2304 to the left and right sides of the storage plate solenoid 2304 toward the front side, and vertically extends to the distal ends of the pair of projection pieces 2306a. And a detection piece 2306c that protrudes outward in the left-right direction from one protruding piece and can be detected by the storage plate position sensor 2310. Further, the crank member 2308 includes a horizontal hook 2308a extending from the left and right ends of the storage plate 2266 to the rear side, a hanging hook 2308b extending downward from the rear end of the horizontal hook 2308a, and a left and right from the lower part of the hanging hook 2308b. A pin 2308c that protrudes outward in the direction and is slidably inserted into the elongated hole 2306b of the slide member 2306, and protrudes inward in the left-right direction from the rear end of the horizontal flange 2308a and is pivotally supported by a predetermined member. And a rotation shaft 2308d.

  The storage plate 2266 is driven by the storage plate solenoid 2304 so that the slide member 2306 slides in the front-rear direction, and the pin 2308c of the crank member 2308 inserted into the elongated hole 2306b moves in the front-rear direction, whereby the crank member 2308 Rotates around the rotation shaft 2308d, and thus the storage plate 2266 formed at the tip of the crank member 2308 moves in the vertical direction, and the storage plate 2266 moves up to store the storage shelf 2264. Thus, the game ball can be stored and the storage plate 2266 is lowered, so that the game ball cannot be stored in the storage shelf 2264 and the game ball is discharged forward from the storage shelf 2264. In this example, the storage plate 2266 is biased to a lowered position by a spring (not shown), and the storage plate 2266 is raised by driving the storage plate solenoid 2304. In this example, the storage plate position sensor 2310 detects the slide position of the detection piece 2306c of the slide member 2306, so that the vertical position of the storage plate 2266 can be detected.

  The storage unit 2204 further includes a storage ball detection sensor 2312 that detects whether or not a game ball is stored in the storage shelf 2264 above the storage plate solenoid 2304 and below the storage shelf 2264. Yes.

  The main control board 1350 drives the second motor 2430 to drive the second motor 2430 based on the detection signal from the left and right position detection sensor 2448, that is, the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L and the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R. Second accessory drive control means 2575 is provided for reciprocating the connecting slider 2442 connected to the accessory body 2402 in the left-right direction. As a result, the second accessory body 2402 coupled to the coupling slider 2442 can reciprocate repeatedly within the reciprocating range. In addition, the main control board 1350 determines whether or not game balls are temporarily stored in the storage rack 2264 when the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1404 of the prize winning unit 1400 is started and a predetermined release waiting time has elapsed. Regardless, storage control means 2574 for driving and controlling the storage plate solenoid 2304 is provided. Thus, when the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1404 of the prize winning unit 1400 is started and a predetermined discharge waiting time has elapsed, the storage plate solenoid 2304 is always driven and controlled. When game balls are temporarily stored in the storage rack 2264, the game balls temporarily stored in the storage rack 2264 are released by driving and controlling the storage plate solenoid 2304. Further, at least the time set as the “predetermined waiting time for release” is that at least the game ball received by the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1404 of the prize winning unit 1400 is temporarily stored in the storage shelf 2264. It is more than the shortest possible time. Further, the main control board 1350 notifies that the detection piece 2442c provided on the connection slider 2442 is detected by the left position detection sensor 2448L provided at the left end position based on the control signal from the second accessory drive control means 2575. When the control signal is input, a left movement completion command is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600, while the detection piece 2442c provided on the connection slider 2442 is detected by the right position detection sensor 2448R provided at the right end position. When a control signal for transmitting is transmitted, a right movement completion command is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600.

  Peripheral control board 2600 is based on a detection signal from storage ball detection sensor 2312, storage information acquisition means 2664 for determining whether or not game balls are temporarily stored in storage shelf 2264, and main control Based on the command receiving means 2650 for receiving a control command transmitted from the board 1350, and the command received by the command receiving means 2650 includes a left movement completion command or a right movement completion command. The second accessory main body position information acquisition means 2666 for grasping the position of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory main body 2402, which reciprocates repeatedly in the reciprocating movement range, and the storage shelf 2264 by the storage information acquisition means 2664 play a game Storage information on whether or not the sphere is stored and connection by the second accessory main body position information acquisition means 2666 Based on the position of the rider 2442, when the game balls are temporarily stored in the storage shelf 2264, it is notified that the game balls temporarily stored in the storage shelf 2264 are released. FIG. 118 (e) Is selected, and the liquid crystal display device 640 is controlled to execute the selected release effect, or when the game ball is not temporarily stored in the storage shelf 2264, the release effect is performed. A non-opening effect changing means 2673 for selecting a non-opening effect mode to indicate that the non-opening effect mode shown in FIG. 118D is selected by controlling the effect device, and receiving a command. Based on the command received by the means 2650, a movable accessory abnormality determination control means 2653 for making an abnormality determination such as whether or not there is a problem in the movement of the connecting slider 2442; By controlling the light emission drive of the LEDs provided as the group L0 to the group L7 on the logo decoration board 2162 when it is determined by the movable accessory abnormality determination control means 2653 that the movement of the connecting slider 2442 is defective. And a light emission effect control means 2654 for notifying a hall clerk or the like that a problem has occurred in the movement of the connecting slider 2442. The movable accessory abnormality determination control means 2653 is performed in a 16 ms steady process in the peripheral control side reset process. For example, a left movement completion command is extracted and a timer is started to start a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 5s is set, and the set time is at least a reciprocating movement of the second accessory body 2402 in a state where the movement of the connecting slider 2442, that is, the movement of the second accessory body 2402 is not difficult. The range is equal to or more than the time spent by the second accessory main body 2402 on the outward path or the time spent on the return path.) The command received by the command receiving means 2650 does not include the right movement completion command, The movement completion command is extracted and the timer is started to complete the left movement to the command received by the command receiving means 2650 within a predetermined period. If no command is included, it is determined that some abnormality has occurred in the movement of the connecting slider 2442, and in order to notify the store clerk or the like to that effect, the light emitting effect control means 2654 is informed with the logo decoration board. 2162 is instructed to control the light emission drive of the LEDs mounted as the group L0. Based on the command, the light emission effect control means 2654 emits the LEDs mounted on the logo decoration board 2162 as the group L0, so that the letter “P” of “Pink LADY” emits light.

  As described above, based on the storage information indicating whether or not the game balls are stored in the storage rack 2264 by the storage information acquisition unit 2664 and the position of the connecting slider 2442 by the second accessory main body position information acquisition unit 2666. Then, either the opening effect mode or the non-opening effect mode is selected, and the selected effect mode is controlled by the liquid crystal display device 640, and the opening effect mode or diagram shown in FIG. The mode of the non-opening effect shown in 118 (d) is executed. That is, the selected opening effect mode or non-opening effect mode is drawn on the liquid crystal display device 640. As a result, the timing at which the game balls received in the prize winning unit 1400 are distributed to the second V entrance 2002b provided in the second prize body 2402, that is, the game balls that have entered the prize winning unit 1400. Can suggest to the player the timing of entering the second V entrance 2002b provided in the second accessory body 2402. In addition, the second slider driving unit 2404 including the second motor 2430, the second driven gear 2434, and the like has a problem, and the movement of the connecting slider 2442 is within the reciprocating range of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402. When it becomes difficult to move, the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L or the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R arranged at both ends of the reciprocation range of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402 The detection signal is not input to the main control board 1350. For example, after the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L is input to the main control board 1350, the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R is not input, or the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R is received. The detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L may not be input after being input. In this state, the main control board 1350 can generate a left movement completion command based on the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L and transmit it to the peripheral control board 2600, but the right position detection sensor 2448R. Since no detection signal is input, the right movement completion command cannot be generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600 indefinitely, or the right movement is completed based on the detection signal from the right position detection sensor 2448R. Even if the command can be generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600, since the detection signal from the left position detection sensor 2448L is not input, the left movement completion command is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 2600 indefinitely. May not be possible. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 2600 cannot receive the right movement completion command within a predetermined period after receiving the left movement completion command, or within a predetermined period after receiving the right movement completion command. When it is not possible to receive the left movement completion command, it is determined that the movement of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402 is difficult to move, and this is notified to the clerk of the hall. In order to notify, the light emitting effect control means 2654 is instructed to control the light emission driving of the LEDs mounted as the group L0 on the logo decoration board 2162. Accordingly, it is possible to notify a hall clerk or the like that there is a problem in the movement of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory body 2402.

  In addition, the movable accessory abnormality determination control means 2312 issues a left movement completion command and a right movement completion command in order to determine whether or not there is a problem in the movement of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory main body 2402. Used. On the other hand, the second accessory main body position information acquisition unit 2666 uses the left movement completion command and the right movement completion command in order to grasp the position of the connecting slider 2442 connected to the second accessory main body 2402. . The contents of the left movement completion command and the right movement completion command that are transmitted to the movable accessory abnormality determination control means 2312 are different from the contents that are transmitted to the second accessory body position information acquisition means 2666. That is, the left movement completion command and the right movement completion command in the present embodiment are configured as multi-function commands in which the contents to be transmitted are switched.

[Other main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 3000 as the board storage box according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 120 to 148. The main control board box 3000 shown in FIGS. 120 to 148 is slightly different in shape from the main control board box 624 shown in FIG. 78 and the like, and has a fraud prevention function than the main control board box 624 shown in FIG. 78 and the like. Shows other things that have been enhanced. As a matter of course, the function of the main control board 1350 as a control board housed inside is the same as that of the main control board box 624 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 120, the main control board box 3000 houses a main control board 1350 as a control board that is arranged on the back side of the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3 and controls the main operation of the game. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, a housing-shaped base body 3101 provided with a side wall portion 3112 that forms a storage opening 3110 of the main control board 1350, and a side wall portion 3112 of the base body 3101. And a cover body 3102 having a housing shape that covers the storage opening 3110.

  The base body 3101 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate, and is formed in a casing shape having a rectangular bottom surface 3111 and a side wall portion 3112 erected along the outer periphery of the bottom surface 3111. Yes. As shown in FIG. 123, the outer side portion of the pair of side wall portions 3112 on the long side of the base body 3101 has a predetermined distance from the side wall portion 3112 (the outer wall portion 3201 of the cover body 3102 between the side wall portion 3112). A plurality of outer wall pieces 3113 are arranged side by side through slits 3113a at intervals of a degree of internal fitting) (see FIG. 127).

  On the outside of the side wall 3112 at one side end (one short side) in the longitudinal direction of the base body 3101, two right and left sealing portions 3114 are formed to project. In the sealing portion 3114, sealing holes 3115 for sealing the cover body 3102 to the base body 3101 with a sealing tool made up of a one-way screw 3103 and an anchor rivet 3104 are drilled in two places on the left and right. On the left and right sides of the two sealing holes 3115, a spare for storing a spare sealing cap 3105 in the main control board box 3000 with the base body 3101 and the cover body 3102 sealed. A cap storage portion 3116 is formed. The sealing cap 3105 is a cap member for covering the sealing portion of the base body 3101 and the cover body 3102 with the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104 from above. When the main control board box 3000 in a sealed state is unsealed and the main control board 1350 is inspected on the outer wall portion of the sealing portion 3114, the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104 are cut by a cutting means such as a nipper. Cut portions 3124 for cutting the sealing portion are formed in three places (see FIG. 130B). On the other hand, the side wall portion 3112 at the other side end (the other short side) in the longitudinal direction of the base body 3101 is formed lower than the side wall portion 3112 at the other side, and the outside of the side wall portion 3112 formed at the lower side. In addition, an engagement piece 3117 is formed so as to extend upward (see FIG. 130A). In the engagement piece 3117, engagement recesses 3118 for locking the engagement protrusions 3209 of the cover body 3102 to the base body 3101 are formed at three locations on the left, middle, and right.

  A part of one long side of the base body 3101 is provided with two screw fixing bosses 3119 each having a mounting hole 3120 drilled in place of the outer wall piece 3113. A sticking outer surface portion 3121 (base-side sticking outer surface portion) is erected in a flat shape so as to cover the outside. The affixing outer surface portion 3121 constitutes an affixing surface of an IC tag seal seal 3107 that is affixed across both the base body 3101 and the cover body 3102 in a sealed state of the base body 3101 and the cover body 3102. Sealing seal covers 3108 for covering the IC tag sealing seal 3107 are attached to the main control board box 3000 (the base body 3101 and the cover body 3102 in a sealed state) on both left and right ends of the sticking outer surface portion 3121, respectively. Slide engagement convex portions 3121b and locking projections 3121a are formed. The locking projection 3121a is formed to project from the lower end of the slide engagement convex portion 3121b.

  A positioning projection 3122 for positioning the main control board 1350 housed in the main control board box 3000 is provided at the center of the bottom surface 3111 of the base body 3101, and the engagement piece 3117 is provided. A plurality of support protrusions 3123 for supporting the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1350 from below are provided at a predetermined interval at a connecting portion with the side wall portions 3112 on the three sides excluding the side wall portion 3112.

  Like the base body 3101, the cover body 3102 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate, and faces downward along the outer periphery excluding the rectangular upper surface 3200 and the other short side of the upper surface 3200. It is formed in a casing shape having an outer wall portion 3201 standing upright. As shown in FIG. 124, the outer side of the outer wall portion 3201 at one side end (one short side) in the longitudinal direction of the cover body 3102 individually corresponds to the two sealing portions 3114 provided in the base body 3101. Two sealing portions 3202 are formed to project. The sealing portion 3202 has sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204 for sealing the cover body 3102 to the base body 3101 (sealing hole 3115 of the sealing portion 3114) with the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104. Has been. The sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204 are respectively drilled at positions corresponding to the two sealing holes 3115 provided in the sealing portion 3114, and the sealing tool insertion hole 3203 located outside thereof is At the time of initial shipment, the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104 are sealed. On the other hand, the sealing tool insertion hole 3204 located on the inner side is a hole for resealing the main control board box 3000 which has been unsealed along with the inspection of the main control board 1350, and is re-sealed at the time of initial shipment. A spare one-way screw 3103 for sealing and an anchor rivet 3104 are inserted in a latched state. Details of the sealing portions 3202 and 3114 of the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101 will be described later.

  The outer wall portion of the sealing portion 3202 can be easily opened (the operation of cutting the sealing portion of the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104) by the cutting means when inspecting the main control substrate 1350. Therefore, the notch 3205 is formed at a position corresponding to each of the three notches 3124 formed in the sealing portion 3114 of the base body 3101 (see FIG. 130B). Further, as shown in FIG. 125, three unsealing projections 3206 that form a regular triangle shape in a top view are provided on the surface side of the cover body 3102 in the sealing portion 3202. Each of the three unsealing projections 3206 is provided in a state where one vertex of an equilateral triangle is opposed to each notch portion 3205 at a portion located on an extension line of the three notch portions 3205, Sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204 serving as sealing portions of the anchor rivets 3104 are located between the unsealing protrusions 3206. The unsealing projection 3206 serves as a cutting portion for unsealing the main control board box 3000 when inspecting the main control board 1350, and the inside is formed in a hollow shape to facilitate cutting by the cutting means. (See FIG. 137 (B)). Also, on the surface of the cover body 3102 in the vicinity of the sealing portion 3202, first and second instruction portions 3207 and 3208 for instructing the sealing order of the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104 are engraved. Yes. The first instruction portion 3207 is made of a stamped letter “1” stamped on a portion located on the extension line of the sealing tool insertion hole 3203, and is a portion sealed with a one-way screw 3103 and an anchor rivet 3104 at the time of initial shipment. Indicates that The second instructing portion 3208 is formed of a stamped character “2” stamped on a portion located on the extension line of the sealing tool insertion hole 3204, and is unsealed along with the inspection of the main control board 1350. 3000 is a portion for sealing again after inspection.

  At the other end (the other short side) in the longitudinal direction of the cover body 3102, three engagement protrusions that individually engage with the three engagement recesses 3118 of the engagement piece 3117 provided on the base body 3101. 3209 is formed. As shown in FIG. 126, the engaging protrusion 3209 has a tip portion formed in a hook shape, and the hook-shaped tip portion is fitted in the engaging recess 3118. As a result, the cover body 3102 engages with the engagement protrusion 3209 with the sealing portions 3114 and 3202 as the open ends with respect to the base body 3101 in a state where the sealing of the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104 is released. It can be rotated around the engaging portion with the recess 3118.

  The inner wall portion 3210 is provided at a predetermined interval from the outer wall portion 3201 (an interval at which the outer wall portion 3112 of the base body 3101 is fitted inside the outer wall portion 3201) on the inner portion of the outer wall portion 3201 of the cover body 3102. Is erected. The inner wall portion 3210 is fitted into the side wall portion 3112 of the base body 3101 in a state where the cover body 3102 is assembled to the base body 3101. In other words, the side wall 3112 of the base body 3101 is fitted between the outer wall 3201 and the inner wall 3210 of the cover body 3102.

  A part of the outer wall 3201 and the upper surface 3200 on one long side of the cover body 3102 has a pasting outer surface part 3211 (cover side pasting outer surface part) at a position corresponding to the pasting outer surface part 3121 provided on the base body 3101. Is formed. The affixing outer surface part 3211 includes an upper wall part that is recessed in a step shape from the upper surface 3200, and a side wall part whose outer peripheral surface is flush with the affixing outer surface part 3121 in the assembled state of the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101. In the upper wall portion, two screw fixing bosses 3119 (mounting holes 3120) provided in the base body 3101 and mounting holes 3212 are formed at positions corresponding to the individual screws. In the assembled state of the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101, the lower end surface 3211 a of the side wall portion of the pasting outer surface portion 3211 is in contact with the upper end surface 3121 c of the pasting outer surface portion 3121, and the contacting portion is the base body 3101 and the cover. It becomes the joint of each sticking outer surface part 3121,3211 used as the sticking surface of the IC tag sealing seal | sticker 3107 in the body 3102 (refer FIG. 141).

  On the upper surface 3200 of the cover body 3102, a storage convex portion for avoiding interference with an electronic component (CPU or the like) mounted on the surface (mounting surface 3021) of the main control board 1350 stored in the main control board box 3000. 3213 slightly protrudes from the upper surface 3200 and is formed in a stepped shape. The upper surface 3200 is provided with a number of heat radiation holes 3214 for releasing heat generated from the main control board 1350 to the outside of the main control board box 3000, and a stamp 3109a serving as a proof of shipment of the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a sticking recess 3216 for sticking a model name sticker 3109b clearly indicating the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are formed.

A connector opening 3217 for exposing various connectors 3022 (see FIG. 122) mounted on the mounting surface 3021 of the main control board 1350 to the outside is formed in a portion of the upper surface 3200 where the storage convex portion 3213 is not projected. ing. Further, on the inner side surface portion of the upper surface 3200 of the cover body 3102, screw fixing bosses 3218 protrude from the corner portion of the cover body 3102 and the substantially middle portion of the long side. An attachment hole 3219 is formed in the screw fixing boss 3218, and the main control board 1350 is attached to the cover body 3102 with the screw 3106 from below through the attachment hole 3219. 122, a ROM 3023 is mounted as an electronic component on the mounting surface 3021 of the main control board 1350, and a protective ROM cover 3024 is attached to the outer periphery of the ROM 3023. A reading opening 3024 a for reading a QR code (registered trademark) provided on the IC surface of the ROM 3023 from the outside through the transparent cover body 3102 is formed on the upper surface of the ROM cover 3024. Further, the main control board 1350 includes an attachment hole 3025 for attaching the main control board 1350 to the screw fixing boss 3218 (attachment hole 3219) of the cover body 3102 with a screw 3106, and a positioning projection 3122 provided on the base body 3101. A positioning hole 3026 for positioning the main control board 1350 in the main control board box 3000 is formed by engagement with.

  Next, the shapes of the sealing portion 3202 of the cover body 3102 and the sealing portion 3114 of the base body 3101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, the sealing portion 3114 provided in the base body 3101 has a concave cross-sectional shape in which the upper portion has an upper surface opening that fits the sealing portion 3202 of the cover body 3102 as a whole. An internal fitting portion 3130 is formed. The lower wall of the inner fitting portion 3130 has the above-described sealing holes 3115 formed in substantially the same diameter as a later-described trunk portion 3104b constituting the anchor rivet 3104 and inserted through the trunk portion 3104b at two left and right positions. It is installed. A caulking portion 3132 is formed below the sealing hole 3115 so as to communicate with the sealing hole 3115 and to have a diameter larger than the circular diameter of the sealing hole 3115. It has been.

  The bottom wall portion 3133 serving as the bottom wall surface of the caulking portion 3132 is a lower end of a later-described pin portion 3103e constituting the one-way screw 3103 when the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101 are sealed by the anchor rivet 3104 and the one-way screw 3103. It is arranged at a position where there is almost no gap between them. Specifically, the gap between the bottom wall portion 3133 and the lower end of the pin portion 3103e is such that the pin portion 3103e cut by the torsion of the torsion portion 3103d described later is pushed from above by an illegal action, and the lower end of the pin portion 3103e is Even when it abuts against the bottom wall portion 3133, the pin portion 3103e does not fall out from a barrel tip portion 3104c (to be described later) constituting the anchor rivet 3104 (to the extent that the holding state of the pin portion 3103e by the barrel tip portion 3104c is not released). It is a gap.

  On the other hand, in the upper part of the sealing portion 3202 provided in the cover body 3102, the aforementioned sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204 for inserting the sealing tools of the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104 are formed. Each of the sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204 is formed to have substantially the same diametrical dimension as a later-described head portion 3104a constituting the anchor rivet 3104, and has a shape that passes through the head portion 3104a. , 3204 and a positioning projection 3105d (see FIG. 133), which will be described later, formed on the sealing cap 3105, on the upper part of the opposing side wall (specifically, two side walls facing the cover body 3102 along the short side direction). The positioning groove portion 3221 for positioning the sealing cap 3105 with respect to the sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204 is provided by the engagement.

  Further, in the lower part of the opposing side walls of the sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204 other than the opposing side wall provided with the positioning groove portion 3221 (specifically, two side walls opposing the long side direction of the cover body 3102). Are provided with locking groove portions 3222 for locking the sealing cap 3105 to the sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204 by engagement with an engaging piece 3105c described later formed on the sealing cap 3105.

  Below the sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204, a circle diameter is formed in communication with each of the sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204 and has a diameter smaller than the diameter of the sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204. An insertion hole 3223 that is dimensioned and has a circular diameter substantially the same as that of the trunk portion 3104b of the anchor rivet 3104 is provided to pass through the trunk portion 3104b. The insertion hole 3223 is formed to have the same diameter as the sealing hole 3115 formed in the sealing portion 3114 of the base body 3101, and comes into contact communication with the base body 3101 and the cover body 3102 in a combined state. Yes.

  Next, a one-way screw 3103 and an anchor rivet 3104 as a sealing tool for sealing the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101, and a sealing cap 3105 for covering a sealing portion by the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104, This will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the anchor rivet 3104 includes a head 3104a (rivet head) formed into a large-diameter square shape, and a body portion 3104b formed into a smaller-diameter cylindrical shape. The nut rivet-shaped anchor rivet has a general rivet outer shape and a cylindrical hollow portion with a female screw (not shown) formed at the center of the body portion 3104b. This anchor rivet 3104 is molded from aluminum or other highly ductile metal material, and the shape and outer diameter of the head 3104a are sealing tool insertion holes 3203 formed in the sealing portion 3202 of the cover body 3102. The shape and size can be just inserted into the 3204 and cannot be inserted into the insertion hole 3223. On the other hand, the shape and the outer diameter of the trunk portion 3104b are formed in a shape and size that can be just inserted into the insertion hole 3223. In addition, the head 3104a of the anchor rivet 3104 is formed in a rectangular prism shape, and consideration is given to preventing inadvertent rotation at the mounting site.

  Further, the tip portion of the trunk portion 3104b of the anchor rivet 3104 (hereinafter referred to as the trunk tip portion 3104c) is formed to be slightly thick so as to swell inside the hollow portion. The inner diameter of the hollow portion is narrower than other portions. The trunk portion 3104b of the anchor rivet 3104 can pass through the insertion hole 3223 of the sealing portion 3202 and the sealing hole 3115 of the sealing portion 3114, and will be described later at positions passing through these holes 3223 and 3115. In this way, the body tip 3104c is formed to have a length that can spread outward.

  In the hollow portion of the anchor rivet 3104 described above, a one-way screw 3103 formed with a male screw corresponding to the female screw of the hollow portion is attached. The one-way screw 3103 includes a large-diameter head portion 3103a (screw head portion), a small-diameter male screw portion 3103c, a torsion portion 3103d, and a pin portion 3103e, which are generally plated. It is molded integrally with iron material.

  The outer diameter of the head portion 3103a is a size that can be inserted into the sealing member insertion holes 3203 and 3204 of the sealing portion 3202 and cannot enter the hollow portion of the trunk portion 3104b of the anchor rivet 3104. Yes. In addition, a one-way cut groove 3103b is formed on the upper surface of the head 3103a to engage the tip of a tool such as a driver. The one-way cut groove 3103b is a groove that has a wall surface perpendicular to the rotation direction in the screwing direction, but has an inclined surface along the rotation direction in the opposite direction. For this reason, when the one-way screw 3103 is to be screwed with a screwdriver, a rotational force is applied to the vertical wall surface when rotating in the fastening direction, but when rotating in the loosening direction, the screw is brought into contact with the inclined surface in the axial direction. It will push back, and the necessary rotational force cannot be transmitted. That is, in this embodiment, the screw member according to the present invention is constituted by a one-way screw 3103 in which a one-way cut groove 3103b is formed in the head 3103a. As a result, even if the one-way screw 3103 screwed into the anchor rivet 3104 is rotated in the direction opposite to the screwing direction and loosened, the rotational force cannot be transmitted in the loosening direction. Can not. Therefore, the one-way screw 3103 screwed into the anchor rivet 3104 cannot be removed, and when an unjust tool is used to remove the screw member, the trace remains and the fraud can be easily detected. In the embodiment, the one-way kerf 3103b has a shape corresponding to a minus driver. However, the shape is not limited to this, and the one-way groove 3103b may be formed in a shape corresponding to another tool such as a plus driver.

  The male screw portion 3103c is integrally formed below the head portion 3103a, and a male screw that is screwed with a female screw formed in the hollow portion of the anchor rivet 3104 is formed on the outer peripheral portion thereof. The pin portion 3103e is formed in a columnar shape that is integrally continuous with the male screw portion 3103c via a twisted portion 3103d. The twisted portion 3103d is formed in a thin taper shape that can be twisted by the rotational force when the one-way screw 3103 is screwed to cut the pin portion 3103e below the male screw portion 3103c.

  The length dimension of the male screw portion 3103c is set to a dimension that cannot reach the trunk tip portion 3104c of the anchor rivet 3104 even when the one-way screw 3103 is screwed into the anchor rivet 3104. Further, the length dimension of the pin portion 3103e that is continuous with the male screw portion 3103c via the torsion portion 3103d is such that the barrel tip portion 3104c is spread outward while the one-way screw 3103 is screwed into the anchor rivet 3104. The pin part 3103e cut | disconnected by the twisting of the cutting part 3103d is set to the dimension which can be hold | maintained by the trunk | drum front-end | tip part 3104c spread outward.

  The sealing cap 3105 is formed in a concave cross-sectional shape with an opening at the bottom, and forms a top wall 3105a having a top wall surface and substantially conforming to the shape and size of the sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204. Two insertion portions 3105b that extend downward from the top plate portion 3105a and elastically deform, an engagement piece 3105c that is provided at the distal end of the insertion portion 3105b and has an outward-facing shape, and an insertion portion 3105b And a positioning protrusion 3105d that protrudes along the vertical direction on the opposite side wall other than the opposite side wall provided. When the sealing cap 3105 is inserted into the sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204, the positioning protrusion 3105 d engages with the positioning groove portion 3221 provided in the sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204, and the sealing tool insertion hole The sealing cap 3105 is positioned with respect to 3203 and 3204. When the sealing cap 3105 is inserted into the sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204, the engagement piece 3105c is locked to the locking groove 3222 provided in the sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204, and the sealing cap 3105c is locked. 3105 is held in the sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204 to prevent the sealing cap 3105 from being inadvertently dropped. Further, the top surface of the top plate portion 3105a forms a dome-shaped curved surface, and even when a wire-like foreign material is screwed into the sealing tool insertion holes 3203 and 3204 as an illegal act, the wire-like foreign material Stop trapping and prevent fraud. Note that a green cap is used for the sealing cap 3105 that is inserted into the sealing tool insertion hole 3203 at the time of initial shipment and covers the sealing portion by the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104. On the other hand, a red sealing cap 3105 having a different color is accommodated in the spare cap storage part 3116 as a spare.

  Next, an IC tag sealing seal 3107 attached over both the application outer surface portion 3121 of the base body 3101 and the application outer surface portion 3211 of the cover body 3102 will be described with reference to FIG. The IC tag seal seal 3107 includes a substantially rectangular base sheet 3107a. An adhesive layer (not shown) to which an adhesive is applied is formed on the back surface of the base sheet 3107a, and an IC chip with an antenna 3107b is attached to a part of the adhesive layer.

  The base sheet 3107a is configured as a solvent-colored paper having flexibility, has moderate brittleness, and reactivity to solvents and heat. Therefore, when a solvent (toluene, methyl ethyl ketone, ethyl acetate, N hexane, etc.) is applied to peel off the IC tag seal seal 3107, the base sheet 3107a changes color accordingly. Similarly, when heat (for example, heat of 50 ° C. or higher) is applied to the IC tag seal 3107 to reduce the adhesive strength of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the base sheet 3107a is discolored. Therefore, when a solvent is applied or heat is applied to illegally peel off the IC tag sealing seal 3107 from the sticking outer surface portions 3121 and 3211 of the main control board box 3000, the fraudulent act is caused by the discoloration of the base sheet 3107a. Can leave traces of.

  The IC chip with antenna 3107b includes an IC chip 3107c formed as an integrated circuit having a control unit and a memory area, and a long antenna unit 3107d. The IC chip 3107c is arranged near the center of the antenna portion 3107d, and ID information as identification data is stored in the memory area. The antenna portion 3107d is formed of a thin metal layer such as aluminum, and the thickness thereof is thinner than the thickness of the IC chip 3107c. The antenna portion 3107d is manufactured as an antenna pattern so that the resonance frequency is a constant frequency such as 2.45 GHz.

  The ID information of the IC chip 3107c is configured to be called by the control unit and transmitted from the antenna unit 3107d, and the ID information transmitted from the antenna unit 3107d is formed as a reader / writer. (Reading means) can receive and read. Specifically, the scanner is called by a weak radio wave having the above frequency, and an induction electromagnetic field is formed by this radio wave. When the scanner is brought close to the antenna unit 3107d to such an extent that the antenna unit 3107d is located in the induction electromagnetic field, an electromotive force is generated by electromagnetic induction in the antenna unit 3107d. In the IC chip 3107c, using this electromotive force as a power source, the ID information stored in the memory area can be called by the control unit and transmitted from the antenna unit 3107d. The ID information thus transmitted is received by the scanner. Can be read.

  The antenna portion 3107d is disposed obliquely from one corner side of the base sheet 3107a to the diagonal corner side thereof. In other words, the long antenna portion 3107d is provided such that its longitudinal direction intersects with all the side directions of the base sheet 3107a. For this reason, the antenna part 3107d is arranged over each sticking outer surface part 3121, 3211 by sticking the IC tag seal sticker 3107 across each sticking outer face part 3121, 3211.

  In addition, a large number of antenna cuts (not shown) are formed at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction of the antenna portion 3107d. As a result, when the antenna portion 3107d tries to peel off the IC tag seal seal 3107 arranged across the pasting outer surface portions 3121 and 3211, the force to peel off the IC tag seal seal 3107 will cause the antenna notch to cut. By concentrating on the end portion, the base sheet 3107a is broken through the antenna cut, and the antenna portion 3107d is divided accordingly. Accordingly, since the ID information is not transmitted from the divided antenna unit 3107d, the ID information cannot be read by the scanner. For this reason, even if the IC tag sealing seal 3107 once peeled off is pasted cleanly on the pasting outer surface portions 3121 and 3211, the fraud can be easily detected.

  The surface of the base sheet 3107a is provided with an anti-counterfeit ink application part 3107e, a model number 3107f of the IC tag seal seal 3107, a serial number 3107g of the IC tag seal seal 3107, a trade name 3107h of the IC chip 3107c, and “ A note 3107i, j of “unopening” is printed. The ink application unit 3107e is applied with special ink that is activated by specific ultraviolet light and returns visible light. For this reason, when the IC tag seal seal 3107 is color-copied to create a counterfeit product, the ink application part 3107e changes to another color, so that the counterfeit can be easily found. The serial number 3107g is not a chip ID (ID information of the IC chip 3107c) but a number managed in association with the chip ID. If the chip ID cannot be read for some reason, this serial number The chip ID can be known from 3107g. It should be noted that the management number displayed on the certificate sheet 3109a and the model name displayed on the model name sticker 3109b may be printed on the surface of the base sheet 3107a, thereby preventing fraud with respect to these specific information at the same time.

  Also, the alternate long and short dash line drawn slightly above the horizontal center line of the base sheet 3107a shown in FIG. 134 explains the planned folding position when the IC tag sealing seal 3107 is pasted across the pasting outer surface portions 3121 and 3211. The line 3107k shown for reference. Then, on the upper wall portion of the pasting outer surface portion 3211 that is the upper surface side of the main control board box 3000, there are an ink application portion 3107e, a model number 3107f, a serial number 3107g, and a trademark name 3107h above the line 3107k indicating the planned bending position The main display will be arranged. That is, the IC tag seal seal 3107 of this embodiment includes an unauthorized information display unit capable of displaying an unauthorized trace such as the ink application unit 3107e, a model number 3107f, and a serial number above the line 3107k indicating the planned bending position. A specific identification information display section (specific information display section) comprising a seal identification information display section for displaying information relating to identification of the IC tag seal sticker 3107 such as a number 3107g and a trade name 3107h. The display unit (ink application unit 3107e, model number 3107f, serial number 3107g, and trade name 3107h) is placed on the upper wall surface side of the main control board box 3000 with the IC tag sealing seal 3107 attached to the main control board box 3000. They are arranged in a concentrated manner (see FIG. 122). For this reason, in the main control board box 3000 arranged on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, from the position facing the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the identification is concentrated on the upper side of the main control board box 3000. The information display part (ink application part 3107e, model number 3107f, serial number 3107g, and trade name 3107h) is displayed in alignment with the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can be easily seen (see FIG. 120). The confirmation work of the IC tag seal seal 3107 can be easily performed.

  Note that, according to the pasting configuration of the IC tag seal seal 3107 in this embodiment, the pasting portion (the top wall portion and the side wall portion of the pasting outer surface portion 3211 and the pasting outer surface portion 3121) to which the IC tag seal seal 3107 is pasted is the main control. Since it does not protrude from the side surface portion of the board box 3000, the main control board box 3000 can be easily attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 without causing damage or damage to the IC tag sealing seal 3107. Further, since the protruding portion (attachment portion of the IC tag seal seal) cannot be partially fixed by being sandwiched with an unauthorized tool, it is avoided to form a gap in the side wall portion by fixing the protruding portion. In other words, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act on the main control board 1350 in the main control board box 3000 by forming a gap in the side surface portion.

  Next, a seal seal cover 3108 that covers the IC tag seal seal 3107 will be described with reference to FIG. The seal seal cover 3108 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate, and as shown in FIG. 135, the upper wall portion (strictly speaking, the cover outer surface portion 3211 on the upper surface side of the main control board box 3000). An upper surface covering portion 3108a covering an IC tag sealing seal 3107 portion attached to the upper wall portion of the sticking outer surface portion 3211 of the body 3102; A side surface covering portion 3108b that covers the outer surface portion 3121 (strictly speaking, the side wall portion of the sticking outer surface portion 3211 of the base body 3101 and the portion of the IC tag seal seal 3107 attached to the sticking outer surface portion 3121). As seen, it is formed in a “L” shape.

  Engagement protrusions 3108c for attaching the sealing seal cover 3108 to the main control board box 3000 are formed inwardly at both end portions of the side surface covering portion 3108b. On the lower end side of the engagement protrusion 3108c, an engagement hole 3108d that engages with a locking projection 3121a provided on the sticking outer surface 3121 is formed. On the inner wall portion of the engagement protrusion 3108c, a slide engagement groove 3108e that engages with the slide engagement protrusion 3121b provided on the sticking outer surface 3121 is provided along the longitudinal direction of the engagement protrusion 3108c. Yes. The slide engagement groove 3108e is slidably engaged with the slide engagement convex portion 3121b, and the IC tag sealing seal 3107 in which the inner wall surface of the side surface covering portion 3108b is affixed to each of the affixing outer surface portions 3121 and 3211. It is formed at a position where a slight gap 3108g (see FIG. 142) can be formed without interference.

  On the other hand, contact protrusions 3108f are provided so as to protrude from both end portions of the upper surface covering portion 3108a. The contact protrusion 3108f is formed in a concave shape when the seal seal cover 3108 is attached to the main control board box 3000 (the engagement hole 3108d is engaged with the engagement protrusion 3121a on the sticking outer surface 312a side). By contacting the outer peripheral side wall portion of the pasting outer surface portion 3211, the inner wall surface of the upper surface covering portion 3108a has a slight gap 3108g (without interference with the IC tag sealing seal 3107 stuck to the upper wall portion of the pasting outer surface portion 3211). 141). That is, the seal seal cover 3108 is attached to the IC tag seal seal 3107 in which the inner wall surfaces of the upper surface covering portion 3108a and the side surface covering portion 3108b are adhered to the pasting outer surface portions 3121 and 3211 in a state of being attached to the main control board box 3000. A slight gap 3108g that does not interfere is formed.

  The procedure for housing the main control board 1350 in the main control board box 3000 in the configuration of the main control board box 3000 described above will be described. First, with the mounting surface 3021 facing the inner wall of the upper surface 3200 of the cover body 3102, the main control board 1350 is fixed to the cover body 3102 with screws 3106. At this time, each connector 3022 mounted on the main control board 1350 is individually exposed to the outside through the connector opening 3217. At this time, there is almost no gap between the connector 3022 and the connector opening 3217, and foreign matter cannot be inserted from between the connector 3022 and the connector opening 3217. Next, from the state in which the engagement protrusion 3209 of the cover body 3102 is engaged with the engagement recess 3118 of the base body 3101, the solder surface of the main control board 1350 secured to the cover body 3102 with screws 3106 is covered with the base body 3101. Thus, main control board 1350 is stored in main control board box 3000. That is, the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101 are assembled using the short side of the cover body 3102 on which the engagement protrusion 3209 is formed as a fulcrum. At this time, the main control board 1350 fixed to the cover body 3102 with screws 3106 is positioned in the main control board box 3000 by the positioning holes 3026 engaging with the positioning protrusions 3122 on the base body 3101 side, The back surface (solder surface) side is supported and accommodated by a support protrusion 3123 on the base body 3101 side.

  Next, the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101 are connected to each other by screwing the one-way screw 3103 with a fastening means such as a flat-blade screwdriver in the sealing tool insertion hole 3203 indicated by the first instruction portion 3207 which is a stamped character “1”. The main control board 1350 is sealed in the main control board box 3000.

  Here, a sealing method of the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101 using the anchor rivet 3104 and the one-way screw 3103 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), a one-way screw 3103 is inserted into the hollow portion of the anchor rivet 3104 and screwed in advance (however, it should not be screwed up to the barrel tip 3104c). Is inserted into the sealing tool insertion hole 3203 in the sealing portion 3202 of the cover body 3102. At this time, the trunk tip portion 3104c of the anchor rivet 3104 having substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the insertion hole 3223 and the sealing hole 3115 comes into contact with the inner wall portion of the insertion hole 3223 and the sealing hole 3115, so that a so-called temporary press-fitted state is obtained. Kept. As a result, even if the main control board box 3000 (cover body 3102) is turned over in this state, the anchor rivet 3104 and the one-way screw 3103 are not dropped from the sealing tool insertion hole 3203.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (B), a minus screwdriver is inserted into the anchor rivet 3104 and the one-way cut groove 3103b of the head 3103a of the one-way screw 3103 in the temporarily press-fitted state, thereby further pushing back into the sealing portion 3202 The insertion hole 3223 and the sealing hole 3115 of the sealing part 3114 are penetrated at a stretch. At this time, the head 3104a of the anchor rivet 3104 cannot enter the insertion hole 3223 of the sealing portion 3202, and as a result, the upper part of the wall surface constituting the insertion hole 3223 is the lower part of the protruding part of the head 3104a of the anchor rivet 3104. The pushing of the anchor rivet 3104 and the one-way screw 3103 is completed at a position where the anchor rivet 3104 and the one-way screw 3103 are in contact with each other (position shown in FIG. 136 (B)). Then, at this position, as shown in FIG. 136 (C), the one-way screw 3103 is tightened with a flat-blade screwdriver. Here, the hollow portion of the trunk tip 3104c of the anchor rivet 3104 is narrow. Therefore, when the one-way screw 3103 is further tightened (screwed) and the tip portion (pin portion 3103e) of the one-way screw 3103 advances to the portion, the trunk tip portion 3104c of the anchor rivet 3104 is The one-way screw 3103 that has progressed is pressed and spread by the pin portion 3103e. As a result, the trunk tip 3104c of the anchor rivet 3104 that penetrates the caulking portion 3132 below the sealing hole 3115 is expanded outward from the penetrating position.

  Thereafter, in a state where the one-way screw 3103 is completely tightened, as shown in FIG. 136 (D), the pin portion 3103e is cut by the twisted portion 3103d being twisted by the rotational force when the one-way screw 3103 is screwed. As a result, the cut pin portion 3103e is held by the barrel tip portion 3104c that spreads outward. Thereby, the caulking of the anchor rivet 3104 is completed, and the sealing of the cover body 3102 to the base body 3101 is completed. Then, after the caulking is completed, as shown in FIG. 136E, the sealing cap 3105 is inserted into the sealing tool insertion hole 3203, and the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104 are shielded from the outside. In addition, an ultraviolet curing agent is injected into the sealing tool insertion hole 3203 in which the sealing cap 3105 is inserted from above. As a result, a minute gap between the sealing cap 3105 and the sealing tool insertion hole 3203 is closed, and the sealing cap 3105 is prevented from being easily pulled out from the sealing tool insertion hole 3203 with any unauthorized tool. It has become.

  In addition, in a state where the anchor rivet 3104 has been caulked by holding the cut pin portion 3103e by the body tip portion 3104c, the lower end of the pin portion 3103e is a bottom wall portion 3133 that is a bottom wall surface of the caulking portion 3132. It is arranged at a position where there is almost no gap between them. For this reason, even if the one-way screw 3103 in which the sealing cap 3105 and the pin portion 3103e have been cut by fraud can be extracted from the sealing tool insertion hole 3203, it is not threaded and the barrel tip portion 3104c. It is difficult to pull out the pin portion 3103e held by the sealing tool insertion hole 3203. However, even if the pin portion 3103e is pushed in, the lower end abuts against the bottom wall portion 3133. 3104c cannot be removed (cannot release the holding state of the pin portion 3103e by the barrel tip 3104c), and the sealing state of the cover body 3102 to the base body 3101 cannot be released.

  Next, a method for unsealing the main control board box 3000 for a valid reason such as inspection of the ROM 3023 of the main control board 1350 and maintenance will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 137. In addition, the sealing part of the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101 in the main control board box 3000 is provided in two pairs of left and right sides on one short side as described above, and when the main control board box 3000 is unsealed. However, in the following description, only the method of unsealing one sealing portion will be described for the sake of convenience. At this time, the sealing seal cover 3108 is once removed from the main control board box 3000, and the main control board box 3000 is in a state where the IC tag sealing seal 3107 that secures the sealing state of the main control board box 3000 is broken. Is unsealed.

  131 (A) and 131 (B), the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104 are used in the sealing tool insertion hole 3203 indicated by the first indication portion 3207 which is a stamped character “1”. After sealing, the sealing portion of the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101 into which the sealing cap 3105 is inserted and the ultraviolet curing agent is injected above is cut. Specifically, first, of the three unsealing projections 3206 provided on the sealing portion 3202 of the cover body 3102, the two unsealing projections 3206 that are close to the sealing tool insertion hole 3203 are arranged at the base (FIG. 131 (A ) And a cutting means such as a nipper from a triangular broken line portion of the unsealing projection 3206 shown in FIG. As a result, the hollow unsealing projection 3206 is cut, and two triangular holes are opened in the vicinity of the sealing tool insertion hole 3203.

  Thereafter, the nipper blade edge is inserted along a line connecting each apex portion on the opposite side of two adjacent triangular holes (holes that become the cutting traces of the unsealing projection 3206) (FIG. 131 (A), ( A thick broken line portion between two unsealing protrusions 3206 shown in B) is cut. Of the three cut portions 3124 and 3205 formed by overlapping the three cut portions 3124 on the base body 3101 side and the three cut portions 3205 on the cover body 3102 side, the main control board box 3000 Along the line connecting the notches 3124 and 3205 located on the side end side and the apex portion of the triangular hole located on the side end side of the main control board box 3000 (the hole serving as the cutting trace of the unsealing projection 3206) The nipper blade tips are inserted individually from above at an angle of 45 ° (see FIGS. 131A and 131B), and the unsealing projection 3206 and the notch portions 3124 and 3205 on the side end side of the main control board box 3000 (Bold broken line part) is cut. Similarly, the notches 3124 and 3205 located second from the side end side of the main control board box 3000 and the triangular holes (unsealing protrusions 3206 located second from the side end side of the main control board box 3000 are arranged. Cut along the line connecting the apex portion of the hole that becomes the cutting trace of.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 137A, the sealing portion of the sealing tool insertion hole 3203 sealed by the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104 is cut, and the main control board box 3000 (sealing portion 3114, 3202) is opened. The main body control is performed by rotating the cover body 3102 with respect to the base body 3101 with the short side of the cover body 3102 on which the engagement protrusion 3209 is formed as a fulcrum and the unsealed sealing portions 3114 and 3202 as the open side. The substrate box 3000 is opened. At this time, the cut sealing part (a part of the cut cover body 3102 and the one-way screw 3103, the anchor rivet 3104, and the sealing cap 3105) remains on the base body 3101 side.

  Thereafter, when the inspection of the ROM 3023, maintenance, and the like are completed and the main control board box 3000 is sealed again, a spare one-way is provided with the cover body 3102 covered with the screws 3106 on the main control board 1350 and the base body 3101. The screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104 are screwed into the sealing tool insertion hole 3204 indicated by the second indication portion 3208 which is an imprinted character of “2”, and in the same manner as the sealing method in the sealing tool insertion hole 3203 described above, The cover body 3102 and the base body 3101 are sealed by holding the cut pin portion 3103e with the body tip portion 3104c spreading outward, and the main control board 1350 is sealed again in the main control board box 3000. Stop.

  Then, the sealing cap 3105 is inserted into the sealing tool insertion hole 3204 sealed by the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104, and an ultraviolet curing agent is injected from above. At this time, as the sealing cap 3105 to be inserted into the sealing tool insertion hole 3204, a red one that is stored in advance in the main control board box 3000 (preliminary cap storage unit 3116) is used. Therefore, in this state, the sealed portion by the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104 is covered with the red sealing cap 3105, so that the main control board box 3000 is once unsealed from the outside and then resealed. You can see at a glance that it was stopped.

  Such re-sealing of the main control board box 3000 is performed when the main control board box 3000 that has been unsealed by inspection of the ROM 3023, maintenance, etc. is temporarily reused. It can be replaced with a regular main control board box 3000 (IC tag seal seal 3107 is also attached). For this reason, in the main control board box 3000 of this embodiment, the sealing tool insertion holes 3204 for resealing are provided only at a pair of left and right for one reseal. However, the sealing tool insertion hole for resealing is not limited to one time, but may be provided as many times as possible for resealing.

  In this embodiment, the pin portion 3103e is cut by twisting of the twisted portion 3103d by screwing, and the sealing portions 3114 and 3202 are sealed by holding the cut pin portion 3103e at the body tip portion 3104c. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Hereinafter, a modified example of the one-way screw that seals the sealing portions 3114 and 3202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139.

  A modified one-way screw 3500 shown in FIG. 138 includes a large-diameter head portion 3500a in which a one-way cut groove 3500b is formed and a small-diameter male screw portion 3500c, similar to the one-way screw 3103 described above. Unlike the one-way screw 3103, there is no twisted portion 3103d and pin portion 3103e. Instead, a caulking pin 3501 is used as a separate member in advance. The caulking pin 3501 has a frustoconical shape with a tapered lower part and is flat at the lowermost end. The maximum circular diameter of the upper end surface is a cylinder in which the female screw of the anchor rivet 3104 is formed. It is set to a size that can be inserted into the hollow portion (substantially the same size as the diameter of the male screw portion 3500c). Then, first, a caulking pin 3501 is inserted into the hollow portion (female screw) of the anchor rivet 3104 so that the tapered portion is downward, and the male screw portion 3500c of the one-way screw 3500 is inserted into the hollow portion (female screw) from above. ). Therefore, in the device shown in FIG. 138, the one-way screw 3500, the caulking pin 3501, and the anchor rivet 3104 constitute a sealing tool.

  It should be noted that the length dimension of the male screw portion 3500c is set to a size that cannot reach the trunk tip portion 3104c of the anchor rivet 3104 even when the one-way screw 3500 is screwed into the anchor rivet 3104, similarly to the male screw portion 3103c. ing. Further, the length dimension of the caulking pin 3501 is the same as that of the pin portion 3103e, with the one-way screw 3500 screwed into the anchor rivet 3104, the barrel tip portion 3104c is spread outward, and the barrel tip spreads outward. It is set to a dimension that can be held by the portion 3104c.

  Here, a sealing method of the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101 using the anchor rivet 3104, the one-way screw 3500, and the caulking pin 3501 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), a caulking pin 3501 is inserted into the hollow portion of the anchor rivet 3104 in advance, and a one-way screw 3500 is inserted into the hollow portion of the anchor rivet 3104 from above and screwed ( However, it should not be screwed to the end of the body tip 3104c) and is inserted into the sealing tool insertion hole 3203 in the sealing portion 3202 of the cover body 3102. At this time, the trunk tip portion 3104c of the anchor rivet 3104 having substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the insertion hole 3223 and the sealing hole 3115 comes into contact with the inner wall portion of the insertion hole 3223 and the sealing hole 3115, so that a so-called temporary press-fitted state is obtained. Kept. As a result, even if the main control board box 3000 (cover body 3102) is turned over in this state, the anchor rivet 3104 and the one-way screw 3500 will not fall out of the sealing tool insertion hole 3203.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (B), a minus driver is inserted into the anchor rivet 3104 and the one-way groove 3500b of the head 3500a of the one-way screw 3500 in the temporarily press-fitted state, and further pushed into the back, and the sealing portion 3202 is inserted. The hole 3223 and the sealing hole 3115 of the sealing portion 3114 are penetrated all at once. At this time, the head 3104a of the anchor rivet 3104 cannot enter the insertion hole 3223 of the sealing portion 3202, and as a result, the upper part of the wall surface constituting the insertion hole 3223 is the lower part of the protruding part of the head 3104a of the anchor rivet 3104. The pushing of the anchor rivet 3104 and the one-way screw 3500 is completed at the position where it abuts (the position shown in FIG. 138B). At this time, the caulking pin 3501 disposed below the one-way screw 3500 is pushed downward with its upper end surface in contact with the lower end surface of the male screw portion 3500c.

  Therefore, at this position, as shown in FIG. 138 (C), the one-way screw 3500 is tightened with a flat-blade screwdriver. Here, the hollow portion of the trunk tip 3104c of the anchor rivet 3104 is narrow. For this reason, when the one-way screw 3500 is further tightened (screwed) and the caulking pin 3501 below the one-way screw 3500 is advanced to the portion, the barrel tip portion 3104c of the anchor rivet 3104 is moved forward. The caulking pin 3501 has been pushed and spread. As a result, the trunk tip 3104c of the anchor rivet 3104 that penetrates the caulking portion 3132 below the sealing hole 3115 is expanded outward from the penetrating position. When the one-way screw 3500 is completely tightened (the state shown in FIG. 138 (C)), the caulking pin 3501 below the one-way screw 3500 is held by the barrel tip 3104c that spreads outward. Become. Thereby, the caulking of the anchor rivet 3104 is completed, and the sealing of the cover body 3102 to the base body 3101 is completed.

  Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 138 described above, the caulking pin 3501, which is formed of a member different from the one-way screw 3500 and is disposed below the one-way screw 3500, has a lowermost end formed in a planar shape, and the lower part is tapered. However, instead of this, a caulking pin 3502 of a modified example shown in FIG. 139 may be used. Similar to the caulking pin 3501, the caulking pin 3502 includes a pin body 3502a having a truncated cone shape in which the lowermost end is formed in a flat shape and the lower end is tapered. A cylindrical reduced diameter abutting portion 3502b formed with a reduced diameter compared to the circular diameter dimension of the end face is integrally provided. Note that the length of the caulking pin 3502 including the pin main body 3502a and the reduced diameter abutting portion 3502b is the same as that of the caulking pin 3501, with the one-way screw 3500 screwed into the anchor rivet 3104, The dimension is set such that it can spread outward and can be held by the barrel tip 3104c that spreads outward. Therefore, in the device shown in FIG. 139, a one-way screw 3500, a caulking pin 3502, and an anchor rivet 3104 constitute a sealing tool.

  Here, a sealing method of the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101 using the anchor rivet 3104, the one-way screw 3500, and the caulking pin 3502 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), a caulking pin 3502 is inserted into the hollow portion of the anchor rivet 3104 in advance, and a one-way screw 3500 is inserted into the hollow portion of the anchor rivet 3104 from above and screwed ( However, it should not be screwed to the end of the body tip 3104c) and is inserted into the sealing tool insertion hole 3203 in the sealing portion 3202 of the cover body 3102. At this time, the trunk tip portion 3104c of the anchor rivet 3104 having substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the insertion hole 3223 and the sealing hole 3115 comes into contact with the inner wall portion of the insertion hole 3223 and the sealing hole 3115, so that a so-called temporary press-fitted state is obtained. Kept. As a result, even if the main control board box 3000 (cover body 3102) is turned over in this state, the anchor rivet 3104 and the one-way screw 3500 will not fall out of the sealing tool insertion hole 3203.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), a minus driver is inserted into the anchor rivet 3104 in the temporarily press-fitted state and the one-way groove 3500b of the head 3500a of the one-way screw 3500, and further pushed into the back to insert the sealing portion 3202 The hole 3223 and the sealing hole 3115 of the sealing portion 3114 are penetrated all at once. At this time, the head 3104a of the anchor rivet 3104 cannot enter the insertion hole 3223 of the sealing portion 3202, and as a result, the upper part of the wall surface constituting the insertion hole 3223 is the lower part of the protruding part of the head 3104a of the anchor rivet 3104. The pushing of the anchor rivet 3104 and the one-way screw 3500 is completed at the position where the anchor rivet 3104 and the one-way screw 3500 are in contact with each other (position shown in FIG. At this time, the caulking pin 3502 disposed below the one-way screw 3500 is pushed downward with the reduced diameter contact portion 3502b contacting the lower end surface of the male screw portion 3500c.

  Therefore, at this position, as shown in FIG. 139C, the one-way screw 3500 is tightened with a flat-blade screwdriver. Here, the hollow portion of the trunk tip 3104c of the anchor rivet 3104 is narrow. For this reason, when the one-way screw 3500 is further tightened (screwed in) and the caulking pin 3502 below the one-way screw 3500 has advanced to that portion, the trunk tip portion 3104c of the anchor rivet 3104 is in the progress. The pin is pushed by the crimping pin 3502 and is spread by the crimping pin 3502 (strictly speaking, the upper end portion having the maximum diameter of the pin main body 3502a). As a result, the trunk tip 3104c of the anchor rivet 3104 that penetrates the caulking portion 3132 below the sealing hole 3115 is expanded outward from the penetrating position.

  In the state where the one-way screw 3500 is completely tightened, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), the caulking pin 3502 below the one-way screw 3500 is held by the barrel tip 3104c spreading outward. Become. Thereby, the caulking of the anchor rivet 3104 is completed, and the sealing of the cover body 3102 to the base body 3101 is completed. At this time, the caulking pin 3502 held by the barrel tip 3104c is different from the caulking pin 3501 described above, and the upper end portion of the caulking pin 3502 (pin main body 3502a) having the maximum diameter enters the barrel tip 3104c. In this state, the lower part of the body tip 3104c is pushed and widened. For this reason, even if the sealing cap 3105 and the one-way screw 3500 can be removed from the sealing tool insertion hole 3203 by fraudulent acts, the upper end portion having the maximum diameter enters and is held in the barrel tip portion 3104c. It can be made more difficult to remove the pin 3502 from the sealing tool insertion hole 3203.

  In addition, when the caulking pins 3501 and 3502 are formed of separate members previously separated from the one-way screw 3500 as in the above-described modification, the one-way screw 3103 integrally including the caulking pin (pin portion 3103e) described above is provided. Has no features. Specifically, since it is not necessary to cut the caulking pins 3501 and 3502 by twisting, even if the one-way screw 3500 itself is formed of a hard material (for example, an inexpensive iron material plated), there is no particular restriction. When the one-way screw 3500 is formed of a hard material, the strength of the one-way screw 3500 and consequently the strength of the sealing portion can be increased. Further, even if the one-way screw 3103 is screwed with a weak rotational force, the anchor rivet 3104 is securely caulked. Can be performed.

  However, the one-way screw 3103 provided integrally with the caulking pin (pin portion 3103e) does not mean that it can be molded only with a soft material. When the entire one-way screw 3103 is formed of a soft material (for example, brass), the twisted portion 3103d is easily twisted. Therefore, the twisted portion 3103d is more rigid than a hard material (for example, an inexpensive iron material plated). It means that the constriction can be designed shallowly. That is, since the tightening torque, the time of the twisting, and the like until the torsion differs depending on the material for forming the one-way screw 3103, the constriction depth of the torsion part 3103d is changed according to the material, and the torsion of the torsion part 3103d is performed. It is possible to adjust the strength to reach a desired size. In addition, the one-way screw 3103 integrally provided with the caulking pin (pin portion 3103e) is characterized in that the one-way screw 3103 and the caulking pin (pin portion 3103e) are one component, so that inventory management and production management become easy. However, when the one-way screw 3103 is fastened to the anchor rivet 3104, there is no need to insert a caulking pin (pin portion 3103e) into the anchor rivet 3104 in advance, and the assembly work process can be reduced accordingly. When the assembly work is automated, the cost of the automated equipment can be reduced.

  In the embodiment, the screw member according to the present invention is composed of a one-way screw formed with a one-way cut groove that enables screwing in only one direction of the screw member. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the screw member may be formed of ordinary screws that can be screwed and unscrewed by rotation in both directions.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 140 to 140, the application of the IC tag seal seal 3107 for securing the sealed state by the one-way screw 3103 and the anchor rivet 3104 and the attachment of the seal seal cover 3108 for protecting the IC tag seal seal 3107 will be described. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the IC tag seal seal 3107 is affixed between the affixing outer surface portion 3121 of the base body 3101 and the cover body 3102 in a state of being folded in the shape of “reverse L” along a line 3107k indicating the expected folding position. The adhesive layer on the back surface of the base sheet 3107a is pasted across the outer surface portion 3211. That is, on the upper wall portion of the pasting outer surface portion 3211 that is the upper surface side of the main control board box 3000, the ink application portion 3107e, the model number 3107f, the serial number 3107g, and the trademark provided on the upper side of the line 3107k indicating the planned bending position The main display of the name 3107h will be arranged. With the main control board box 3000 attached to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main display can be easily seen, and the IC tag sealing seal 3107 Confirmation can be easily performed.

  On the other hand, in each of the pasting outer surface portions 3121 and 3211 to which the IC tag seal seal 3107 is pasted, the cover body 3102 is connected to the base body 3101 side via a pair of left and right mounting holes 3212 provided in the upper wall portion of the pasting outer surface portion 3211. The screw 3106 is fixed to the screw fixing boss 3119 (mounting hole 3120). For this reason, since the respective outer surface portions 3121 and 3211 whose outer peripheral surfaces are flush with each other in the assembled state of the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101 can be partially firmly fixed, The IC tag seal seal 3107 can be beautifully affixed across the pasting outer surface portions 3121 and 3211, and since the relative misalignment between the pasting outer surface portions 3121 and 3211 is less likely to occur, the IC tag seal seal 3107 is easily damaged. Can be prevented from being damaged. Therefore, the antenna portion 3107d disposed across the pasting outer surface portions 3121 and 3211 can be properly disposed in the main control board box 3000 by being provided so as to intersect with all the side directions of the base sheet 3107a, and the antenna The ID information of the IC tag seal sticker 3107 can be reliably read via the part 3107d. Further, since the IC tag seal seal 3107 is pasted so as to cover the upper part of the screw fastening portion (mounting hole 3212) in the upper wall portion of the pasting outer surface portion 3211, it is also possible to prevent unauthorized release of the screw fastening. It is like that.

  Further, in the assembled state of the base body 3101 and the cover body 3102, as shown in FIG. 141, the upper end surface 3121c of the pasting outer surface portion 3121 and the lower end surface 3211a of the side wall portion of the pasting outer surface portion 3211 are brought into contact with each other. The affixing outer surface portions 3121 and 3211 constitute a flush affixing surface, but such a contact portion between the upper end surface 3121c and the lower end surface 3211a, in other words, a joint between the affixing outer surface portions 3121 and 3211. Are provided on the side wall of the main control board box 3000 at a position closer to the upper wall side (the upper surface 3200 side of the cover body 3102) than the central portion. For this reason, when the IC tag seal seal 3107 is illegally cut with a tool such as a cutter along the joints of the respective sticking outer surface portions 3121 and 3211, the main control board box 3000 is opened. The cut portion of the tag seal seal 3107 is positioned on the upper wall side of the main control board box 3000. Therefore, since the cut portion can be easily seen with the main control board box 3000 attached to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is easy to find illegal activities by cutting the IC tag seal 3107. It can be done.

  In addition, the pasted outer surface portions 3121 and 3211 whose outer peripheral surfaces are flush with each other when the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101 are assembled are the upper end surface 3121c of the pasted outer surface portion 3121 and the lower end surface 3211a of the side wall portion of the pasted outer surface portion 3211. Is contacted at the side wall position of the main control board box 3000 and the contact part becomes a joint, so that the IC tag sealing seal 3107 can be attached to the main control board box 3000 in a state where it is difficult to break. That is, when the joint of each of the outer surface portions 3121 and 3211 is provided at either the upper or lower end (corner portion) of the side wall of the main control board box 3000, a tensile force acts on the IC tag seal 3107. (For example, when a force for forcibly sliding the cover body 3102 and the base body 3101 is applied), the force acts in a linear manner on the joint located at the corner, and the IC tag The seal seal 3107 is easily broken at the corner joint. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, when the joint of each of the sticking outer surface portions 3121 and 3211 is the side wall portion of the main control board box 3000, a tensile force acts on the IC tag sealing seal 3107. At that time, since the force can be dispersed in a plane at the joint located on the side wall portion, the IC tag sealing seal 3107 can be hardly broken.

  Further, by forming the seal seal for sealing the main control board box 3000 from the IC tag seal seal 3107, in addition to visually confirming the breakage of the seal seal, it is transmitted from the antenna unit 3107d constituting the IC tag seal seal 3107. The seal seal breakage can also be confirmed by whether or not the identification information of the IC chip 3107C can be read by the scanner (if the antenna portion 3107d is broken, the identification information of the IC chip 3107C is not transmitted from the antenna portion 3107d), and more It is possible to confirm the presence or absence of fraud with respect to the seal seal. Of course, the antenna portion 3107 d is stuck so as to straddle the upper wall portion of the sticking outer surface portion 3211 of the cover body 3102, the side wall portion of the sticking outer surface portion 3211, and the sticking outer surface portion 3121 of the base body 3101. In other words, the antenna portion 3107d for transmitting the identification information of the IC chip 3107C can be disposed over a wide range across the upper wall portion and the side wall portion of the main control board box 3000. For this reason, even if the combination of the IC tag seal seal 3107 and the scanner, which can only communicate at a very short distance, can be brought close to or in contact with the IC tag seal seal 3107 without taking an excessive inspection posture. The inspection of the IC tag sealing seal 3107 can be easily performed.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the seal seal cover 3108 is configured so that the IC tag seal seal 3107 is stuck across the sticking outer surface portion 3121 of the base body 3101 and the sticking outer surface portion 3211 of the cover body 3102, and the slide engagement groove portion 3108 e. Is slidably engaged with the slide engagement convex portion 3121b on the sticking outer surface portion 3121 side, and finally, the contact protrusion 3108f of the upper surface covering portion 3108a is slid to a position where it abuts on the upper wall portion of the sticking outer surface portion 3211. Then, the engagement hole 3108d is locked to the locking protrusion 3121a on the sticking outer surface portion 3121 side, so that the outer periphery of the IC tag seal seal 3107 stuck to each sticking outer surface portion 3121, 3211 is entirely covered. A seal seal cover 3108 is attached to the main control board box 3000. Note that the seal seal cover 3108 is detachably attached to the main control board box 3000 by engagement and disengagement of the engagement hole 3108d with the locking projection 3121a.

  At this time, the slide engagement groove 3108e is slidably engaged with the slide engagement protrusion 3121b, and the IC tag sealing seal 3107 in which the inner wall surface of the side surface covering portion 3108b is affixed to each of the affixing outer surface portions 3121 and 3211. A slight gap 3108g is formed without interfering with the upper surface covering portion 3108a, and the contact protrusion 3108f of the upper surface covering portion 3108a contacts the upper wall portion of the applying outer surface portion 3211 so that the inner wall surface of the upper surface covering portion 3108a is attached to the outer surface of the applying surface. A slight gap 3108g is formed without interfering with the IC tag sealing seal 3107 attached to the upper wall portion of the portion 3211. In other words, the sealing seal cover 3108 forms a slight gap 3108g where the inner wall surfaces of the upper surface covering portion 3108a and the side surface covering portion 3108b do not interfere with the IC tag sealing seal 3107 adhered to the pasting outer surface portions 3121 and 3211. Are attached to the main control board box 3000. Therefore, when the seal seal cover 3108 is attached or removed, it is surely avoided that the IC tag seal seal 3107 collides with the seal seal cover 3108 to cause tearing or slight burrs.

  Further, the seal seal cover 3108 covers the IC tag seal seal 3107 that ensures the sealed state of the main control board box 3000, thereby protecting the IC tag seal seal 3107 from damage caused by collision with the outside. In other words, it is made of a transparent synthetic resin material so that the IC tag seal seal 3107 can be seen through from the outside and the ID information of the IC tag seal seal 3107 can be read by a scanner. However, the upper surface covering portion 3108a and the side surface covering portion 3108b of the seal seal cover 3108 are arranged at positions where a slight gap 3108g is provided without interfering with the IC tag seal seal 3107 as described above. For this reason, when an external article hits the upper surface covering portion 3108a or the side surface covering portion 3108b of the seal seal cover 3108, the seal seal cover 3108 is bent and buffered by the gap 3108g, so that the shock is sealed with the IC tag seal seal. 3107 (including the antenna portion 3107d disposed across the sticking outer surface portion 3121 of the base body 3101 and the sticking outer surface portion 3211 of the cover body 3102), and thus the IC tag sealing seal 3107 can be more reliably damaged. It comes to prevent.

  In this embodiment, a seal seal cover 3108 that is detachable from the main control board box 3000 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and once it is attached to the main control board box 3000, it is partially cut. The IC tag seal seal 3107 may be covered with a seal seal cover that cannot be removed as long as it is not. Hereinafter, a modification of the structure of such a sealing seal cover and the main control board box 3000 (base body 3101 and cover body 3102) to which the sealing seal cover is attached will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. FIG.

  The sealing seal cover 3600 of the modified example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate, like the sealing seal cover 3108 described above. As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the upper surface side of the main control board box 3000 is formed. An upper surface covering portion 3600a covering the upper wall portion of the pasting outer surface portion 3211 (strictly speaking, the portion of the IC tag seal seal 3107 pasted on the upper wall portion of the pasting outer surface portion 3211), and the side surface of the main control board box 3000 Side covering portion 3600b covering the side wall portion of the sticking outer surface portion 3211 and the sticking outer surface portion 3121 (strictly speaking, the side wall portion of the sticking outer surface portion 3211 and the portion of the IC tag sealing seal 3107 attached to the sticking outer surface portion 3121). Are formed in the shape of a letter “reverse L” in side view.

  Engagement protrusions 3600c for attaching the sealing seal cover 3600 to the main control board box 3000 are formed on both side end portions of the side surface covering portion 3600b. An engaging protrusion 3600d that can be elastically deformed is protruded on the lower end side of the engaging protrusion 3600c, and an engaging claw 3600e is formed on the inner wall portion thereof. In addition, a slide engagement groove 3600f is provided on the inner wall portion of the engagement protrusion 3600c along the longitudinal direction of the engagement protrusion 3600c. The slide engagement groove 3600f is in a state of slidingly engaging with a slide engagement convex portion 3601 on the cover body 3102 side, which will be described later, in the same manner as the slide engagement groove 3108e of the seal seal cover 3108. The inner wall surface is formed at a position where a slight gap can be formed without interfering with the IC tag sealing seal 3107 affixed to each of the affixing outer surface portions 3121 and 3211. In addition, the slide engagement groove 3600f is set to have a slightly larger width dimension than the slide engagement protrusion 3601 in order to enable slide engagement with a slide engagement protrusion 3601 described later. However, it is set slightly smaller than the width dimension of the slide engagement convex portion 3601 in the upper portion from the middle. This is because the slide engagement groove 3600f is slid to the end with respect to the slide engagement projection 3601, in other words, the seal seal cover 3600 is completely attached to the main control board box 3000. This is because the seal seal cover 3600 is designed to hold the main control board box 3000 so as not to rattle at the engagement portion between the joint groove portion 3600f and the slide engagement convex portion 3601.

  Abutment protrusions 3600g are provided so as to protrude from both end portions of the upper surface covering portion 3600a. The contact protrusion 3600g is similar to the contact protrusion 3108f of the seal seal cover 3108, and is attached to the main control board box 3000 with the seal seal cover 3600 attached to the main control board box 3000. By contacting the concave outer peripheral side wall portion, the inner wall surface of the upper surface covering portion 3600a can form a slight gap without interfering with the IC tag sealing seal 3107 affixed to the upper wall portion of the affixing outer surface portion 3211. It has become. That is, the inner wall surfaces of the upper surface covering portion 3600a and the side surface covering portion 3600b are affixed to the affixing outer surface portions 3121 and 3211 in a state where the sealing seal cover 3600 is attached to the main control board box 3000 as well as the seal seal cover 3108. A slight gap that does not interfere with the IC tag sealing seal 3107 is formed.

  On the other hand, on the side of the main control board box 3000 (the base body 3101 and the cover body 3102) to which the seal seal cover 3600 is attached, the slide engaging groove portions 3600f are slidably engaged with the both side ends of the sticking outer surface portion 3211 of the cover body 3102. An engaging convex portion 3601 is projected. Further, claw locking portions 3602 with insertion holes 3603 for inserting the engaging projections 3600d are provided on both side ends of the sticking outer surface portion 3121 of the base body 3101, and the claw engagements communicating with the insertion holes 3603 are provided. A locking recess that locks the engaging claw 3600e of the engaging projection 3600d inserted into the insertion hole 3603 in a killed state (a state that cannot be removed unless partially cut) on the inner wall surface of the stopper 3602 3604 (see FIG. 145A) is provided.

  Thus, from the state before being attached to the main control board box 3000 (base body 3101 and cover body 3102) shown in FIG. 145 (A), the slide engagement groove 3600f is a slide engagement convex part on the sticking outer surface part 3211 side. The seal seal cover 3600 is inserted from above so as to be slidably engaged with 3601, and finally slides to a position where the contact protrusion 3600 g of the upper surface covering portion 3600 a contacts the upper wall portion of the sticking outer surface portion 3211. As the sealing seal cover 3600 is slid, the engaging projection 3600d is inserted into the insertion hole 3603 formed in the nail locking portion 3602 on the sticking outer surface portion 3121 side, and is engaged. The engaging claw 3600e of the protrusion 3600d is locked in the locking recess 3604 on the inner wall of the claw locking portion 3602 in a slaughtered state, and the mounting to the main control board box 3000 shown in FIG. 145 (B) is completed. That is, the sealing seal cover 3600 is locked to the main control board box 3000 in a state where the engaging claw 3600e is struck in the locking recess 3604, in other words, cannot be removed unless it is partially cut. It is done. For this reason, if the seal seal cover 3600 is removed and the IC tag seal seal 3107 is illegal, it is necessary to cut off a part of the seal seal cover 3600 or the main control board box 3000. It is possible to easily find fraud with respect to the seal 3107.

  Thereafter, when the main control board box 3000 is unsealed for a valid reason such as inspection or maintenance of the ROM 3023 of the main control board 1350, as shown in FIG. 145 (C), the claw locking portion 3602 (insertion hole 3603). ) A portion sealed in, that is, a portion slightly above the portion where the engaging claw 3600e is locked to the locking recess 3604 is cut as a cutting portion 3605 by a cutting means such as a nipper, and sealed from the main control board box 3000. Remove the cover 3600. When the inspection of the ROM 3023, maintenance, etc. are completed, the main control board box 3000 is sealed again, and the broken IC tag seal seal 3107 is covered with the seal seal cover 3600, as shown in FIG. 145 (D). Further, in the sealing seal cover 3600 cut through the cut portion 3605, the contact protrusion 3600g is again attached to the upper wall of the sticking outer surface portion 3211 by the slide engagement between the slide engagement groove portion 3600f and the slide engagement convex portion 3601. Slide to the position where it touches the part. In this case, the engaging portion of the engaging claw 3600e to the engaging concave portion 3604 is cut and enters the claw engaging portion 3602 (insertion hole 3603), but the upper portion of the slide engaging groove portion 3600f and The seal seal cover 3600 is held by the main control board box 3000 by the engagement with the slide engagement convex portion 3601.

  By the way, in the state where the main control board 1350 is housed in the main control board box 3000 as described above, as shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the plurality of outer wall pieces 3113 and the side wall parts 3112 of the base body 3101 are arranged. The outer wall 3201 of the cover body 3102 is internally fitted (concave fitting), and the side wall 3112 of the base body 3101 is internally fitted (concave fitting) between the outer wall 3201 and the inner wall 3210 of the cover 3102. ) That is, the main control board box 3000 in the assembled state has a double uneven fitting from the four wall surfaces of the outer wall piece portion 3113, the outer wall portion 3201, the side wall portion 3112, and the inner wall portion 3210 on the side wall portion. It is composed of a composite structure. For this reason, even if a long and narrow object is inserted through the gap between the side walls of each housing (base body 3101 and cover body 3102), this is replaced with a four-layer wall structure (a plurality of outer wall pieces). 3113, outer wall 3201, side wall 3112, and inner wall 3210) prevent unauthorized insertion, so that an illegal tool is used from the side wall to try to improper main control board 1350 in main control board box 3000. Has come to prevent this.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 146, when a driver W is screwed into the side wall portion of the main control board box 3000 to forcibly create a gap from the side wall portion and an attempt is made to cheat on the main control board 1350 in the main control board box 3000 The driver W is screwed between the outer wall piece 3113 and the outer wall 3201 which are the outermost wall surfaces of the main control board box 3000 to create a gap. However, since the outer wall piece 3113, which is the outermost wall surface, is a plurality of side wall pieces arranged in parallel via the slit portion 3113a, the base portion thereof is accompanied by the screwing operation of the driver W as shown in FIG. It will break. For this reason, when the driver W is screwed into the main control board 1350 in the main control board box 3000 for fraud, it is always one of the plurality of outer wall pieces 3113 that are the outermost wall surfaces of the main control board box 3000. Since the outer wall piece 3113 is broken, the broken portion of the outer wall piece 3113 remains as a trace of the fraud, and the illegal act of screwing the driver W into the side wall portion of the main control board box 3000 Can be easily found.

  The plurality of outer wall pieces 3113 provided in the base body 3101 are provided at positions where the lower ends of the slit portions 3113a are slightly above the upper wall portion of the bottom surface 3111 of the base body 3101 (FIG. 123B). reference). Accordingly, the slit portion 3113a is provided close to the upper wall portion of the bottom surface 3111 (the slit portion 3113a is provided deeper than necessary), and conversely, the slit portion 3113a is provided shallowly so that the outer wall piece can be screwed in even if the driver W is screwed. The outer wall piece 3113 is prevented from being broken by the bending of the portion 3113. Moreover, it is desirable to set the width dimension of the slit portion 3113a as small as possible. If the width dimension of the slit part 3113a is set larger than the diameter dimension of the rod-shaped part of the driver W, the driver W is easily inserted from the lower end of the slit part 3113a, and the outer wall piece part 3113 is provided. This is because the meaning is lost.

  Further, in the embodiment, the plurality of side wall pieces arranged in parallel as the outermost wall surface of the main control board box 3000 are configured by the plurality of outer wall piece portions 3113 with the slit portions 3113a cut, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, a structure that is easy to cut by screwing the driver W may be added. For example, as shown in FIG. 148 (A), by providing a notch portion 3113b at the lower end portion of the slit portion 3113a that is a cut between the plurality of outer wall piece portions 3113, the outer wall piece portion 3113 can be easily cut. Alternatively, as shown in FIGS. 148 (B) and 148 (C), the outer wall piece 3113 can be easily cut by providing a groove 3113c along the width direction on the inner wall side of the base of the outer wall piece 3113. Also good. Since the outer wall piece 3113 is structured to be easily cut in this way, the outer wall piece 3113 can be easily cut if an attempt is made to act improperly on the side wall portion of the main control board box 3000. It will surely be possible to detect the fraud.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of outer wall piece portions 3113 and a double concavo-convex fitting structure (a side wall portion 3112 on the base body 3101 side and a plurality of outer wall piece portions 3113 are broken with the insertion of foreign matter from the gap. The outer wall 3201 on the cover body 3102 side is concavo-convexly fitted, and the side wall 3112 on the base body 3101 side is concavo-convexly fitted between the outer wall 3201 on the cover body 3102 side and the inner wall part 3210). Although fraud from the side wall portion of the main control board box 3000 is prevented, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, with respect to the structure of the plurality of outer wall piece portions 3113 that breaks along with the insertion of foreign matter from the gap, the inner wall portion 3210 is not provided on the cover body 3102 side, and the plurality of outer wall piece portions 3113 and side wall portions 3112 are provided. It is also possible to prevent fraud from the side wall portion of the main control board box 3000 by adding a single concavo-convex fitting structure in which the outer wall 3201 on the cover body 3102 side is concavo-convexly fitted. However, it goes without saying that a more reliable fraud can be prevented by using a double concavo-convex fitting structure. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control is not performed on the base body 3101 in which a plurality of outer wall pieces 3113 ruptured along with the insertion of a foreign object from the gap is provided, but on the cover body 3102 side in which the outer wall pieces 3113 are not provided in parallel. Although the board 1350 is configured to be fixed with screws, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board 1350 may be fixed to the base body 3101 side on which the outer wall pieces 3113 are arranged in parallel.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the board storage box according to the present invention is applied to a main control board box for storing a main control board that performs main control related to a game is illustrated. The board storage box according to the present invention may be applied to a board box that houses an electric board other than the main control board, such as a payout control board box that houses a prize ball payout control board. Further, although the gaming machine according to the present invention is illustrated as a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to this, and a parrot machine that performs slot gaming using a slot machine or a game ball as a revolving gaming machine (this) The present invention may be applied to a revolving type gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Further, in this case, the board storage box is attached to a drum unit constituting the fusion gaming machine, and the drum unit is attached to a mechanism plate provided on the back side of the fusion gaming machine, so that the fusion gaming machine (rotational gaming machine) ) Is attached to the back side.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a side view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a top view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko game machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main part frame, game board, and door frame which constitute a pachinko game machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 11, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 13 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), and EE sectional drawing (D). It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is AA sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is BB sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is the cross-sectional top view of the pachinko gaming machine cut | disconnected by the horizontal line of the middle (main control board box part) of the pachinko gaming machine. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle part, and a launch rail. They are a top view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA sectional view (D) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of pachinko game machine 1 which shows the relation of a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the vertical direction center of the pachinko game machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. FIG. 75 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 74. It is CC sectional drawing in FIG. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the exploded view of FIG. 80 from diagonally behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected and shown in the vertical direction in the state which assembled the front structural member in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member, game panel, panel holder, etc. which mainly comprise a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 83 from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view shown from diagonally behind in the state which fixed the main control board box to the board | substrate holder for boards. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, the drawer holder, and the main control board box in an exploded perspective view after FIG. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which attached the front side member and the start port unit to the game panel. It is the perspective view which looked at the accessory winning a prize mouth unit from diagonally upper front. It is the perspective view which looked at the accessory prize winning opening unit from diagonally lower back. (A) is a front view which shows the state in which the prize winning opening in the prize winning unit is opened, (B) is a front view which shows the state in which the prize winning opening is closed. It is a perspective view which shows the drive mechanism in an accessory prize winning unit. It is a front view of a back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into the movable accessory unit, the back box provided with the decoration, the liquid crystal display device, etc., and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st movable accessory in a movable accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st movable accessory into the 1st accessory unit and the storage unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st accessory unit in a 1st movable accessory into the 1st accessory main body, and the 1st accessory drive unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st accessory unit in a 1st movable accessory into the 1st accessory main body, and the 1st accessory drive unit, and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the drive mechanism of the 1st actor drive unit in the 1st actor unit from back diagonally. It is the perspective view which looked at the storage unit in the 1st movable combination from the front diagonally upward. It is the perspective view which looked at the drive mechanism of the storage board in a storage unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd movable accessory in a movable accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd movable accessory from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd movable body in the movable body unit into the 2nd body body and the 2nd body drive unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the drive mechanism of the 2nd accessory drive unit in a 2nd movable accessory from diagonally forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the 1st accessory main body of the 1st movable accessory in a movable accessory unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the 1st accessory main body following FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the 2nd movable combination in a movable combination unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the main board periphery in a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the periphery control board periphery in a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a periphery control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure which concerns on the display of the fraud warning indicator on a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control side reset process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control side timer interruption process. It is a sequence flowchart which shows the operation | movement of the prize winning opening and movable accessory unit which concern on a start winning, and operation | movement of various effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the various effect images in a start winning process etc. It is a sequence-like flowchart which shows the game processing concerning a continuous opening effect. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine which attached the main control board box. It is a perspective view which shows a main control board box. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows a main control board box. FIG. 4A is a top view showing a base body constituting the main control board box, and FIG. 2B is a side view showing the base body. FIG. 4A is a rear view showing a cover body constituting the main control board box, and FIG. 4B is a side view showing a base body. It is a top view which shows a main control board box. FIG. 126 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 125. FIG. 4A is a side view of one side of the long side showing the main control board box, and FIG. 3B is a side view of the other side of the long side showing the main control board box. 127 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 127A, and is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 127A. It is a fragmentary sectional perspective view which shows the main control board box cut | disconnected by the BB arrow of FIG. 127 (A). FIG. 4A is a side view of one side of the short side showing the main control board box, and FIG. 3B is a side view of the other side of the short side showing the main control board box. FIG. 4A is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a sealing portion constituting the main control board box, and FIG. 2B is a partially enlarged top view showing the sealing portion. 131 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 131 (B), and is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 132 (B). It is a perspective view which shows the one-way screw and anchor rivet which seal a sealing part, and the sealing cap which coat | covers the sealing part. It is a top view which shows the IC tag sealing seal stuck on the main control board box and ensuring a sealing state. FIG. 4A is a perspective view showing a sealing seal cover for protecting the IC tag sealing seal, FIG. 4B is a top view showing the sealing seal cover, and FIG. 4C shows the sealing seal cover. It is a side view and the figure (D) is a front view which shows a sealing sticker cover. FIGS. 9A to 9E are cross-sectional views for explaining a sealing method of a sealing portion using a one-way screw and an anchor rivet and a covering method of a sealing portion using a sealing cap. FIG. 4A is a partially enlarged top view showing a pair of left and right sealing portions constituting the main control board box, and FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. FIGS. 9A to 9C are cross-sectional views for explaining a sealing method of a sealing portion by a one-way screw and an anchor rivet in a modified example. FIGS. 9A to 9D are cross-sectional views for explaining a sealing method of a sealing portion with a one-way screw and an anchor rivet in a modified example. It is a disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the operation | work which affixes an IC tag sealing seal to a main control board box, and attaches a sealing seal cover to the affixed part. It is a partial expanded sectional view of CC line arrow of Drawing 127 (A). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the DD arrow of FIG. 127 (A). It is a partial expansion perspective view which abbreviate | omits an IC tag sealing seal and shows the sealing seal cover and the attachment part by the side of the main control board box in a modification. FIG. 4A is a perspective view showing a sealed seal cover in a modified example, FIG. 4B is a top view showing the sealed seal cover, and FIG. 4C is a side view showing the sealed seal cover. FIG. 4D is a front view showing the sealed seal cover. FIGS. 9A to 9D are cross-sectional views for explaining the operation of reattaching the seal seal cover removed by cutting after attaching the seal seal cover in the modification to the main control board box. FIG. 4A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view showing a state in which the driver is screwed between the outer wall piece portion and the outer wall portion, which is the outermost wall surface of the main control board box, and FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view which shows the state which the outer wall piece part fractured | ruptured by. It is a perspective view which shows the main control board box which the outer wall piece part fractured | ruptured. FIG. 4A is a partially enlarged front view showing an outer wall piece portion of a modified example having a notch portion, and FIG. 4B is a partially enlarged front view showing an outer wall piece portion of the modified example having a groove portion. FIG. 3C is a partially enlarged sectional view showing the outer wall piece. It is a partial expanded sectional view which shows the fraud with respect to the conventional board | substrate storage box.

Explanation of symbols

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
3 Main frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1350 Main control board (control board)
3000 Main control box (board storage box)
3101 Base body 3102 Cover body 3103 One-way screw (sealing tool)
3103a head (screw head)
3103b One-way groove 3103c Male thread portion 3103d Twisted portion 3103e Pin portion 3104 Anchor rivet (sealing tool)
3104a Head (rivet head)
3104b Body 3104c Body tip 3105 Sealing cap 3107 IC tag sealing seal 3107e Ink coating unit 3107f Model number 3107g Serial number 3107h Trade name 3107k Line 3108 indicating the expected folding position Sealing seal cover 3112 Side wall 3113 Outer wall piece 3113a Slit 3114 Sealing portion 3115 Sealing hole 3119 Screw fixing boss 3120 Mounting hole 3121 Pasting outer surface portion (base-side pasting outer surface portion)
3121c Upper end surface 3132 Caulking portion 3200 Upper surface 3201 Outer wall portion 3202 Sealing portion 3203, 3204 Sealing tool insertion hole 3210 Inner wall portion 3211 Pasting outer surface portion (cover side pasting outer surface portion)
3211a Lower end surface 3212 Mounting hole 3223 Insertion hole 3600 Seal seal cover 3600e Engagement claw 3600f Slide engagement groove 3601 Slide engagement convex part 3604 Locking concave part

Claims (5)

In a gaming machine comprising a control board for controlling a game and a board storage box for storing the control board,
The substrate storage box has a housing-shaped base body with a side wall portion standing to form a storage opening of the control board, and an outer wall portion with which the side wall portion of the base body is fitted up. A housing-shaped cover body that covers the opening, and a sealing tool that seals the cover body and the base body,
The base body is erected along the side wall portion on the outer peripheral side of the side wall portion, and the outer wall portion is ruggedly fitted to the side wall portion in an assembled state with the cover body. A gaming machine comprising a plurality of outer wall pieces that are individually broken along with a foreign object inserted through a gap between the first and second portions through a slit.   An inner wall portion that is erected along the outer wall portion on the inner peripheral side of the outer wall portion and that fits the side wall portion with the outer wall portion in an assembled state with the base body. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: A part of the side wall of the base body is provided with a screw-fixing boss instead of the outer wall piece, and a base-side sticking outer surface portion is formed so as to cover the outside of the screw-fixing boss,
A cover-side pasting outer surface portion is formed at a position corresponding to the base-side pasting outer surface portion in the assembled state with the base body on the upper surface and the outer wall portion covering the storage opening in the cover body,
The cover-side pasting outer surface portion includes an upper wall portion that is recessed in a step shape from the upper surface, and a side wall portion whose outer peripheral surface is flush with the base-side pasting outer surface portion in the assembled state of the cover body and the base body, The upper wall portion is provided with a mounting hole for fixing the cover-side pasting outer surface portion and the base-side pasting outer surface portion by screwing with the screw-fastening boss,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a seal seal is affixed across the cover side affixing outer surface part and the base side affixing outer surface part so as to cover the upper part of the screwing portion.   The lower end surface of the side wall portion of the cover-side pasting outer surface portion is brought into contact with the upper end surface of the base-side pasting outer surface portion and the side wall position of the substrate storage box in the assembled state of the cover body and the base body, The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the contact portion is a joint between the cover-side pasting outer surface portion and the base-side pasting outer surface portion. The seal seal is composed of an IC tag seal seal provided with an IC chip in which identification information is stored, and a long antenna unit that can transmit the identification information of the IC chip to a reading unit,
The IC tag seal seal is pasted so that the antenna section straddles the upper wall portion of the cover-side pasting outer surface portion, the side wall portion of the cover-side pasting outer surface portion, and the base-side pasting outer surface portion. The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, characterized by the above.